best big travel e bike

The 10 Best Electric Bikes, Tested by Our Editors

We’ve ridden dozens of electric bikes in every category—commuter, cargo, cruiser, folding, mountain, and city. Here are the ones worth considering in a range of styles and prices.

Gear-obsessed editors choose every product we review. We may earn commission if you buy from a link. How we test gear.

To make these reviews as helpful as possible, we focus on lower and mid-price options from brands you can purchase directly online—though we did include some recommendations for e-bikes available through bike shops and more expensive models that our bike testers loved.

Brands like Aventon , Ride1Up , and Lectric offer affordable models you can buy online that perform well in our ride testing. If you want to purchase an electric bike in person or test ride before you buy, established players like Specialized and Trek offer many types of e-bikes and have hundreds of dealers nationwide. Additionally, REI has many locations across the U.S. offering its Co-op e-bikes and models from other popular brands.

Check out Bicycling ’s 2023 Bike Awards for 12 exceptional, high-performing e-bikes rigorously vetted by our editorial team.

The Best E-Bikes

• Best Overall : Aventon Level.2
• Best Utility: Co-op Cycles Generation e1.1
• Best Fat Tire : Aventon Aventure.2
• Best Fat Tire Commuter : Rad Power RadRover 6 Plus
• Best E-MTB: Aventon Ramblas eMTB

How We Test E-Bikes

Our full electric bike reviews, things to consider when buying an e-bike, how to buy a used e-bike.

Our experienced bike test team evaluates each model included here on its overall quality, safety features, handling, motor, and battery life. We also assess whether the components and features added to the overall quality of the ride. Bicycling editors tested these bikes on our local roads, commuting to and from work, using them to stock up on groceries and beer, and running their batteries down to see how long they last on one charge. Deputy editor Tara Seplavy , the author of this article, also worked in bicycle product development for two decades and led product management for major bike brands. Plus, she commutes to Bicycling HQ daily on an e-bike.

While we rode most of the e-bikes in this story, sometimes we can’t get our hands on a great electric bike. In those cases, we rely on the expertise of our test team, interviews with product managers, and rigorous research to compare the bikes’ value and performance against similar models we’ve tested.

Aventon Level.2 Electric Bike

Although we dug the original Level , its update is outstanding in practically every way. A much smoother ride than its predecessor, it sports a new torque sensor that evenly distributes power, resulting in a more natural ride feel that’s easier to control and manage. Its update also adds visibility, not just with integrated lights, but also a full color, easy-to-read display. The Level.2 isn’t just one our favorite e-bikes—at its price, comfort level, and premium features, we think it just might be the best.

Our only gripe is with its Zoom Aria suspension fork, which can’t handle bigger bumps, though the lockout feature works well. Still, if you need an e-bike for doing just about anything, from commuting to work to zipping around pavement on the weekend, the Aventon Level.2 is our top nomination.

Co-op Cycles Generation e1.1 Electric Bike

The Co-op Cycles Generation e1.1 is a reliable workhorse for around-town use, from short grocery trips to quick coffee runs. It has a rack, integrated lights, Schwalbe Super-Moto-X tires with puncture protection, hydraulic disc brakes for improved stopping power, and a suspension fork to smooth out bumpy rides. Oh, and it’s affordable, too.

Through testing, Bicycling contributor Aithne Faey found the Generation e1.1 lacked city-appropriate gearing, but REI’s product team has since resolved this issue after hearing feedback. As for the bike itself: “The aluminum frame may not be light, but it feels stiff and reliable. The Shimano Altus drivetrain is tried-and-true and shifts smoothly, and the Tektro hydraulic brakes inspire safety and confidence with their short stopping distance. The Gen e1.1 even includes a suspension fork from SR Suntour. The only parts of the bike manufactured solely for REI are the frame, wheels, seatpost, and saddle.”

Because Co-op Cycles is an REI in-house brand, its stores offer one year of free adjustments or two years for REI Co-op members (with free flat repair!), including derailleur and brake adjustments, lateral wheel truing, hub and headset bearing adjustments, tire inflation, chain lubrication, and e-bike firmware updates. Its in-store service also makes it great for anyone intimidated by at-home e-bike assembly, too—just buy it online, deliver it to your nearest REI store, and have them do it for you.

The Co-op Cycles Generation e1.2 Electric Bike is also available for more power.

Read Full Review

Another utility e-bike we like: Electra Ponto Go!

Aventon Aventure.2 Electric Bike

Aventon has been on a roll, with new models and continuous revisions to existing platforms. The brand’s update to its Aventure fat-tire e-bike is no exception. At first glance, there are few significant visual differences between the original Aventure and this second-generation model. However, once outside, the small changes feel huge.

Compared to the original Aventure, this second gen rides much more smoothly. The new torque sensor allows more control over the acceleration of Aventure’s 750W rear hub motor; previous lighter-weight testers found the previous model to have too much torque, but the latest Aventure remedied this fault. Additional updates include a new head unit interface, integrated turn signals, a front light, a rear rack, and fenders for keeping clean.

The Aventure.2 is an excellent fat-tire e-bike for commutes, especially on snowy days and gravel pathways. Off-roading, it excels on doubletrack trails, but with this burly bike’s weight and components, it has limited functionality on singletrack and more aggressive mountain trails.

More of the Best Fat-Tire E-Bikes

More fat-tire e-bikes we like: Denago Hunting 1 , Velotric Nomad 1

Rad Power Bikes RadRover 6 Plus Electric Bike

Brawny, big, and bold, the RadRover 6 Plus is powerful at its best and sluggish at its worst. With its 750W rear hub, 4-inch-wide tires, and RST spring suspension fork (with 60mm of travel), it’s cushy and stable enough to eat potholes as much as dirt, rocks, and snow. Compared to its predecessor, an updated display and solid hydraulic disc brakes make the RadRover 6 Plus a substantially comfortable and casual ride.

But with its extreme weight of 74 pounds (without a rack!), we wouldn’t dare to roll this thing upstairs. If you need a do-it-all bike to help get you to and from work or the grocery store and frequently battle the elements while doing it, or if you have a lot of land you’d like to tear up, the RadRover 6 is your beast. But anyone living in a small space might have trouble handling this steed.

Aventon Ramblas eMTB

The recently launched Aventon Ramblas is a category-defining hardtail e-MTB that impressed us during trail testing. Its trail-forward components—1x12 SRAM Eagle drivetrain that can handle most climbs, powerful 4-piston SRAM brakes, a solidly stiff 35mm RockShox fork, a comfy dropper seatpost, cushy 2.4-inch wide tires—are unmatched by any other hardtail e-MTB, especially given its price.

"The Ramblas has no true competitors for comparatively priced, trail-ready e-MTBs," says Seplavy in her rave review. "Every so often a bike comes along that entirely shifts the bicycle market—the Ramblas might do that for mountain biking. And once more bike brands see and ride the Ramblas, I expect several will soon follow Aventon’s lead with sharp-priced, trail-capable hardtail e-MTBs."

More electric mountain bikes we like: Trek Fuel EXe 5 , Santa Cruz Heckler 29 Carbon S , Specialized Turbo Tero 3.0

Ride1Up Portola Electric Bike

Ride1Up’s new Portola folding bike packs a lot of punch for how small it is. Folding down to a compact 19 x 29.5 x 33-inch footprint, this bike features a 750W rear hub motor with 65Nm torque, hydraulic disc brakes, a Shimano 8-speed drivetrain, and an integrated rear rack with 130-pound carrying capacity.

For less than $1,000, this is a great deal for bimodal commuters, RVers, vanlifers, or folks living in a small apartment. The standard 10.4Ah battery has a claimed range of 20-40 miles. Or bump the range up to 45 miles with an optional 13.4Ah battery for an additional $100.

More folding e-bikes we like: Denago Folding 1 , Brompton Electric P-Line , GoCycle G4

Specialized Globe Haul ST Electric Bike

If you need to haul it all, go with our 2023 Bike of the Year : Specialized’s Globe Haul ST. With a carrying capacity of a whopping 419 pounds, it’s good for a range of riding tasks, from grabbing groceries at your local farmer’s market to dropping Fido off at doggy daycare. Specialized designed this bike with the average commuter in mind, motivating riders to swap those short- and medium-distance car trips with a bicycle instead. The result is a well-designed short-tail cargo bike with wide 20 x 3.5-inch tires that can eat bumps while keeping you stable and low to the ground. It’s also a blast to ride.

Our test editor Dan Chabanov says it feels much more like a traditional bike than a souped-up e-cargo, which is to say, it’s actually fun. “If you haven’t ridden an e-cargo bike, you might take this for granted,” he says. “But the reality is that even some of the more compact e-cargo bike options out there often don’t ride like a typical bike, or worse, they simply ride poorly. As a cyclist, one of the Haul ST’s most enamoring traits is how much it rides like a ‘normal’ bike. Well, that and the ability to carry a week’s worth of groceries on it.”

More electric cargo bikes we like: Aventon Abound , Tern HSD P-10 , Lectric Xpedition

Cannondale Treadwell Neo 2 Electric Bike

We’re fans of the unpowered Treadwell for its clean looks and upright rider position. It’s not quite a hybrid but also not a foot-forward-style cruiser. The line is comprised of unique, practical bikes for city commuting or riding around town.

The Treadwell Neo 2 improves on this by offering electric assistance without a big weight penalty. This makes for a lighter and zippier riding bike at a lower price. A Class 1 rear hub motor moves the Treadwell along smoothly at up to 20 mph with pedal-assisted power. The 7-speed drivetrain and a wide-range cassette help you get up longer hills, and the Maxxis 650b tires roll fast on pavement.

More commuter e-bikes we like: Aventon Soltera , Co-op CTY e1.1 , Trek Dual Sport+ 2

Specialized Turbo Vado 4.0 Step-Through Electric Bike

Specialized’s Turbo Vado 4.0 is smart and comfortable, with solid brakes, a terrific fork, a sleek design, and a clean iPhone companion app. We’ve ridden a lot of e-bikes over the years, and the Specialized Turbo models consistently test amongst the best in all categories. The brand puts a ton of development time into its Turbo series e-bikes by refining the motor tune and carefully selecting parts. This work pays off with best-in-class ride quality. If you have hesitated to try an e-bike because you think it won’t feel like your favorite non-assist bike, try a Specialized Turbo. You’ll quickly become a convert.

Specialized offers the bike at several price levels between $3,250 and $5,500. You can purchase Turbo Vados with traditional or step-through frame styles, derailleur or internal hub drivetrain configurations, and several color offerings.

More premium e-bikes we like: Ride1Up Prodigy V2 CVT , Gazelle Ultimate C8

Ride1Up Cafe Cruiser Electric Bike

Sometimes, you just want a classic cruiser to take out on the weekends. And if that casualness is your desired style, the Ride1Up’s Cafe Cruiser is your best bet. Strapped with a built-in rack, front and rear lights, a 750W motor, hydraulic disc brakes, a decent suspension fork, and 3-inch-wide tires, this upright bike is stable enough for newer e-riders and, with an added passenger kit , the little one, too.

Our testing found that the bike had plenty of oomph to climb short hills despite its weight and laidback geometry. But, like several wide-tire bikes, it has some handling issues. It’s capable of speeds up to 28 mph (and 20 mph using the throttle), which is more than enough power to get you where you need to be.

Other cruiser e-bikes we like: Electric Bike Co. Model R , Electra Kakua Cruiser Go! , Sixthreezero Around The Block

A Few E-Bike Terms to Know

.css-1f6aja5{-webkit-align-items:center;-webkit-box-align:center;-ms-flex-align:center;align-items:center;background-color:#ffffff;border:0;border-bottom:none;border-top:0.0625rem solid #e8e8e8;color:#000;cursor:pointer;display:-webkit-box;display:-webkit-flex;display:-ms-flexbox;display:flex;font-style:inherit;font-weight:inherit;-webkit-box-pack:start;-ms-flex-pack:start;-webkit-justify-content:flex-start;justify-content:flex-start;padding-bottom:0.3125rem;padding-top:0.3125rem;scroll-margin-top:0rem;text-align:left;width:100%;}@media(min-width: 64rem){.css-1f6aja5{scroll-margin-top:3.375rem;}} .css-jtmji2{border-radius:50%;width:1.875rem;border:thin solid #6f6f6f;height:1.875rem;padding:0.4rem;margin-right:0.625rem;} .css-jlx6sx{display:-webkit-inline-box;display:-webkit-inline-flex;display:-ms-inline-flexbox;display:inline-flex;width:0.9375rem;height:0.9375rem;margin-right:0.625rem;-webkit-transform:rotate(90deg);-moz-transform:rotate(90deg);-ms-transform:rotate(90deg);transform:rotate(90deg);-webkit-transition:-webkit-transform 250ms ease-in-out;transition:transform 250ms ease-in-out;} torque.

Measured in Newton meters (or Nm), torque is a rotational measurement of force—and the number to pay attention to when you want an idea of an e-bike motor’s output. More torque means more power off the line and more boost to your pedaling. The heavier the bike, the more torque it needs. Lighter road bikes typically have 30 to 40 Nm of torque, and trail and cargo models (generally) have at least 80 Nm. Most commuter bikes fall somewhere in between.

The size of an e-bike’s battery is measured in watt-hours (or Wh). This measurement represents the energy stored in the battery and how many watts it can deliver each hour. The higher the number, the longer the range, but the faster you go, the less range you get. So, if a 504Wh battery paired with a 500W motor gives you one hour of ride time at the highest assist, riding at about half that power will double your range.

Locking Battery

Many e-bike brands seamlessly integrate batteries to make the bike look sleeker (and more like a traditional non-assist bike). Most batteries lock to the bike and come with a key that lets you unlock and remove it, which serves multiple purposes: You can remove the battery and charge it off the bike, a locked battery deters (and hopefully prevents) a thief from stealing it. And an e-bike with the battery removed is safer for hauling on a bike rack and lighter for carrying up steps.

Wider Tires

Since e-bikes can maintain higher speeds for longer than standard bikes, you want extra control when riding. Wider tires provide better traction and the freedom to leave the pavement with little penalty, and a suspension fork will help tame some of the rougher roads you might explore. Good disc brakes are a must, too, for slowing a heavy bike at high speed. This is not a place to skimp.

Integrated Lights

Some e-bikes have an integrated lighting system that turns on when you power up the bike. While this is a great feature, it’s not a deal-breaker if your bike doesn’t come equipped this way. It’s just as easy to attach your own since so many great bike lights available.

Warranty and Service

E-bikes need regular maintenance and repair to stay in good working condition. Because they’re heavier and go faster than non-assist bicycles, e-bikes often require more regular service on parts like brakes, tires, and drivetrain components. We recommend having a good relationship with a local bike shop experienced in e-bike repair to keep your equipment running smoothly.

E-bikes use electronics for their motors, batteries, and displays. These parts are often proprietary to bike brands or even specific e-bike models, making replacement more difficult than parts on non-electric bicycles. Make sure to use the correct electronic replacement parts to avoid damaging your e-bike (or it catching fire). Established brands usually (but not always) have a good supply of these parts for replacement, even for years after a bike goes out of production. Bosch and Shimano are two e-bike motor manufacturers with some of the most compatibility between bikes and stock parts for previous generations of systems.

Look for e-bikes from brands that offer at least a one-year warranty on electronic components (many brands’ warranties are longer) and make items like replacement batteries for your bike. These parts are usually not cheap (sometimes up to half the cost of a new bike), but it’s the difference between having an e-bike that can be repaired or becomes a bicycle-shaped paperweight if something goes wrong.

Certification

Following a dramatic increase in fires caused by the lithium-ion batteries used in electric bikes, there is a push from local officials, regulatory agencies , and advocacy groups across the U.S. for improved safety certification of e-bikes, batteries, and motor units. On September 16, 2023, a New York City law went into effect requiring that any e-bike sold in the city “has been certified by an accredited testing laboratory for compliance with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) standard 2849”. And in November 2023, Amazon announced it ceased sales of illegal batteries to New Yorkers.

However, just because something is marketed as UL 2849 compliant, tested to UL 2849, or even “certified to UL 2849” does not mean it is UL Safety Certified. Ibrahim Jilani, UL’s Global Director of Consumer Technology, notes: “Certification is always earned by a manufacturer and not a given when they undergo a product submittal. The UL Mark, or any authorized certification mark, can only be issued upon successful demonstration of meeting the requirements of the safety standard.” You can find UL’s updated list of products Certified to UL 2849 here .

We contacted many e-bike brands on this topic. Most companies informed us they are working toward the certification process. So, expect the list of certified e-bikes to grow in the coming months. If owning a UL 2849-certified bike is important to you, ask the brand from which you plan to purchase it for proof of certification. You can cross-reference OSHA ’s Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories if you want to dive deeper into the topic.

Conversion Kits

Several manufacturers offer kits to add pedal assistance to a non-electric bike. We purchased a few popular conversion kits, fitted them to bikes, and rode them. We do not currently recommend these kits for use. While converting an old bike to an electric assist sounds good in theory, it rarely makes practical sense. Plus, it can lead to rider injury or failure of the bike.

Manufacturers do not design non-electric bikes to accommodate the extra weight and forces incurred when adding an e-bike motor, battery, and control equipment. This puts more stress on the bicycle frame and other components and can lead to breakage or failure of the bike.

Selecting most conversion kits requires knowing fitment details about your bike and might require specialized tools for installation. Many do not have a straightforward installation process, and it can be a challenging project for novice mechanics. If you want a shop to install a conversion kit, check with the shop before purchasing it. Since most non-electric bikes are not engineered to accommodate electric conversions, many shops will not install these kits.

Many economical e-bikes do not cost much more than the total price of a conversion kit plus the installation price. We recommend buying a purpose-built e-bike for the best and safest experience.

The Three Classes of E-Bikes

After determining which style of bike is right for you, the next consideration is which class of e-bike best fits your needs. In the U.S., there are three e-bike classifications. These are defined by the type of assist and how fast the motor will propel you. Most electric bikes are defined as class 1 or 3. Class 1 bikes have a motor (max 750W) that assists while pedaling up to 20 mph. Class 3 (sometimes known as “speed pedelec”) can have up to a 750W (aka 1-horsepower) motor but can assist you up to 28 mph. Both are allowed in most states and cities without needing a license.

Class 2 models have become more popular with riders, especially at lower prices. These models have a throttle that can propel a bike up to 20 mph without needing continuous pedaling.

Some bikes blur the lines. Aventon’s popular Pace 500 , for example, is technically a Class 3 e-bike in that it reaches speeds up to 28 mph, but it also has a throttle that tops out at 20 mph (the maximum legal speed for a throttle).

Good quality e-bikes can cost a lot of money; purchasing a pre-owned bike is one way to save some cash and get a better model. If you want to shop for a used e-bike in person, some bicycle stores offer refurbished units. Shopping in person allows you to check the integrity and condition of the bike before you buy it. When purchasing from a shop, make sure that the retailer is experienced with e-bike service and that the bike includes the proper charger and battery.

If purchasing a used e-bike directly from another owner on a third-party site, it’s wise to have the bike inspected by an experienced e-bike shop or mechanic before handing over your money. E-bikes experience higher wear-and-tear than non-assist bicycles, and many e-bikes use proprietary parts or require special tools to service or update software.

With the boom in e-bike sales, a few websites have recently sprung up selling reconditioned and certified e-bikes. Often, these e-bikes have low mileage or were sales floor samples at shops—some are even brand new or are new old stock of a previous model year. While it costs more than purchasing from an individual seller, buying a used bike from these sites usually means you have some sort of warranty on your e-bike and ensures that it was inspected properly.

Two sites offering high-quality, certified pre-owned e-bikes include Upway and TPC.

Upway The Pro’s Closet

As Deputy Editor, Tara Seplavy leads Bicycling’s product test team; after having previously led product development and sourcing for multiple bike brands, run World Championship winning mountain bike teams, wrenched at renowned bicycle shops in Brooklyn, raced everything from criteriums to downhill, and ridden bikes on six different continents (landing herself in hospital emergency rooms in four countries and counting). Based in Easton, Pennsylvania, Tara spends tons of time on the road and trail testing products. A familiar face at cyclocross races, crits, and bike parks in the Mid Atlantic and New England, on weekends she can often be found racing for the New York City-based CRCA/KruisCX team. When not riding a bike, or talking about them, Tara listens to a lot of ska, punk, and emo music, and consumes too much social media.  

Kevin Cortez is an editor for Runner's World, Bicycling, and Popular Mechanics covering reviews. A culture and product journalist for over ten years, he’s an expert in men’s style, technology, gaming, coffee, e-bikes, hiking, gear, and all things outdoors. He most recently worked as the Style Editor for Reviewed, a top product recommendation site owned by USA TODAY. He also helped with the launch of WSJ's Buy Side commerce vertical, and has covered the music and podcast industries for Mass Appeal, Genius, Vulture, Leafly, Input, and The A.V. Club. Equally passionate about leisure as he is his penmanship, Kevin dedicates his spare time to graphic novels, birding, making cold brew, and taking long, meandering walks.

Bill Strickland is the Rider-in-Chief of Bicycling . His equal passions for cycling and writing have led to the books Ten Points: A Memoir ; Tour de Lance: The Extraordinary Story of Cycling’s Most Controversial Champion ; Mountain Biking: The Ultimate Guide to the Ultimate Ride ; and The Quotable Cyclist . His Bicycling story, “100 Pedal Strokes” won a National Magazine Award for Interactive Feature in 2008. In 2009, he assigned and edited the story “Broken,” which won the National Magazine Award for Public Interest. “The Escape,” the December, 2011, edition of his Bicycling magazine column The Pursuit, was named a Notable story by  The Best American Sports Writing . Various editions of his books have been translated into Dutch, German, Hebrew, and Japanese. He uses commas by rhythm and sound, which is a terrible way to do it but makes him happy.

.css-1t6om3g:before{width:1.75rem;height:1.75rem;margin:0 0.625rem -0.125rem 0;content:'';display:inline-block;-webkit-background-size:1.25rem;background-size:1.25rem;background-color:#F8D811;color:#000;background-repeat:no-repeat;-webkit-background-position:center;background-position:center;}.loaded .css-1t6om3g:before{background-image:url(/_assets/design-tokens/bicycling/static/images/chevron-design-element.c42d609.svg);} Bike Reviews

The Best Beach Cruisers for Leisurely Rides

The Best Hardtail Mountain Bikes

Best Hybrid Bikes You Can Buy Right Now

The 14 Best Road Bikes of 2024

The Best Commuter Bikes for Getting Around Town

These Folding Bikes Can Go Everywhere

Smoother and Faster: The New Pivot Switchblade

The Best Beginner Mountain Bikes

Reviewed: Colnago's Italian Made C68 Gravel

The 6 Best Kids’ Bikes in 2024

Obed’s GVR Is a Fast and Customizable Gravel Racer

Our car experts choose every product we feature. We may earn money from the links on this page.

Tested: The Best Electric Bikes, as Chosen by Experts

The cycling experts at Bicycling have released their top E-bike picks for 2024. From leisurely commuter cruisers to rugged fat-tire bikes, here are the best E-bikes for a range of needs.

The push toward automotive electrification has set forth a wave of research and development into battery and charging technology. A byproduct of all of this R&D has been a trickle-down of some of this technology into other modes of transport, perhaps most notably the humble bicycle. The market for electric bicycles has exploded, which has led new manufacturers as well as some established cycle makers to produce their own electric bicycles.

The Gear Team knows that the interests of our car and truck-loving readers sometimes extend to things like watches and alternate forms of transportation. As we set out to assemble a list of the best electric bicycles on the market, however, we were humbled by the dizzying amount of information about them.

Our Top Picks

Best Overall Electric Bicycle

Aventon level.2 commuter.

Best Around Town Electric bicycle

Co-op cycles generation e1.1.

Best Off-Road Electric bicycle

Aventon aventure.2.

Best Fat Tire Commuter Electric Bicycle

Rad power bikes radrover 6 plus.

Best Electric Mountain Electric bicycle

Specialized turbo tero 3.0.

Best Folding Electric Bicycle

Ride1up portola.

Best Cargo Electric Bicycle

Specialized haul st.

Best Commuter Electric Bicycle

Cannondale treadwell neo 2.

Best Premium Electric Bicycle

Specialized turbo vado 4.0 step-through.

Best Cruiser Electric Bicycle

Ride1up cafe cruiser, things to consider about electric bikes.

Road & Track readers know jumping into the deep end of car shopping without any of the requisite knowledge is a bad idea. Likewise, there is a lot to know about electric bicycles with all the latest tech, gadgets, and features they offer. So before you purchase one of these (not inexpensive) shiny new vehicles, take a moment to consider a few things:

Purpose and Use : First determine what you will primarily use your electric bicycle for. Different models are tailored to specific purposes, such as commuting, recreation, off-road, and cargo hauling or deliveries.

Type of E-Bike : Electric bicycles come in various types, including road , mountain , hybrid , folding , and cargo bikes. Each type caters to different riding conditions and needs.

Battery Capacity and Range : Battery capacity, usually measured in watt-hours (Wh), influences how long you can ride and how far you can go on a single charge. An e-bike’s range also depends on factors including the rider and bike weight, the terrain ridden, and the level of assistance used. Consider your typical ride length and whether the battery range meets your needs.

Weight and Portability : Electric bicycles are generally heavier than traditional bikes due to the motor and battery. Consider the bike's weight if you need to carry it upstairs or lift it frequently. Folding e-bikes offer added portability but are usually still heavier than unassisted bicycles (those without motors).

Security : Some electric bicycles require a key or key fob to operate, adding to their security. Moreover, numerous electric bicycle manufacturers design integrated batteries to be lockable and removable, offering several advantages: off-bike charging, theft deterrence, ease of transport on racks, and lighter weight for carrying upstairs.

All that said, there's nothing wrong with picking up a heavy chain lock or good quality U-lock if you plan to keep your bike in any theft-prone or outside area.

Pedal Assist vs. Throttle : Some electric bicycles offer pedal assist, which provides power only when you are pedaling, while others have a throttle mode that can propel the bike without pedaling. Decide which mode or combination of modes suits your riding style.

Fit and Comfort : Like most bicycles, electric bicycles usually offer sizing options via seat and handlebar adjustment. But these tweaks will only get you so far. Ensure the height, weight, and frame size fit your body. Test ride different models to check for comfortable seating position, handlebar height, and ease of mounting and dismounting.

Warranty and Service : Check the warranty coverage for the bike, battery, and components. Consider the manufacturer's reputation and the availability of service and parts.

Legal Restrictions : Be aware of local regulations regarding electric bicycle use, such as speed limits, motor power limits, and where e-bikes are allowed to be ridden.

E-Bike Classes: Electric bicycles are broken down into three distinct classes based on the type of assist and how fast the motor can propel you; classes one and three are the most common.

• Class 1 supports pedaling up to 20 mph with a max power output of 750 watts;
• Class 2 e-bikes feature a throttle and can reach up to 20 mph without pedaling. Some models, like Aventon's Pace 500 , mix features, reaching 28 mph with pedal assist and 20 mph with just the throttle;
• Class 3 (often known as "speed pedelec") offers assistance up to 28 mph with the same maximum power output.

The Best E-Bikes You Can Buy

The Level.2 from Aventon builds on the solid success of its first-generation Level commuter bikes. The Level.2 is a Class 2 e-bike, featuring both pedal assist and a throttle that can reach speeds of up to 20 mph. However, it has the capability to be unlocked to a Class 3 e-bike, allowing for pedal-assisted speeds of up to 28 mph.

This second-generation version of the Level includes a new torque sensor, integrated lights, and a smaller user-friendly display. The testers at Bicycling noted that the Level.2 bested their expectations in every situation, saying "the Aventon Level remains the best commuter electric bicycle you can purchase for less than $2000 and one of the best commuter bikes you can buy overall."

The Generation e1.1 is a solid bike for short trips, city dwellers, and around town. Its rigid aluminum frame, SR Suntour fork, and hydraulic disc brakes help to provide a smooth and compliant ride, the sort that those riding around cities will surely appreciate. You can choose between either blue or black, but whichever you choose, you'll also get a rack, lights, and tough Schwalbe Super-Moto-X tires.

Being the house brand of outdoor retailer REI , Co-op Cycles benefits from the established infrastructure. This means that you can get your bike serviced, warrantied, and even assembled at REI stores. Further, if you are an REI member (just $30 for life!), the bike comes with free flat-tire repair and two years of free adjustments.

Aventon updated its popular Aventure electric bicycle, resulting in significant improvements that enhance the riding experience. A new torque sensor provides better control over the bike's rear hub motor, addressing the issue of excessive torque that reviewers had with the previous iteration. This is especially helpful for those new to e-bicycles.

Other upgrades include an updated head unit interface, integrated turn signals, a front light, a rear rack, and fenders, making the bike more versatile for commuting in various conditions. While the folks at Bicycling found that the bike works well on snowy days and gravel pathways, its weight and components limit its performance on challenging trails.

The 6 Plus is a versatile fat-tire electric bicycle designed for comfort across various terrains, including urban and off-road environments. Testers at Bicycling said improvements such as an updated display and hydraulic disc brakes, enhancing the overall riding experience when compared to its predecessor.

The bike's big drawback is its weight, which will be a limiting factor if you'd like to navigate it around a congested city. While the weight may make the bike cumbersome, the powerful 750-watt rear hub motor ensures that you'll have the torque needed to push the bike's heft around.

There is also a step-through version , and buyers can opt for either charcoal or white paint schemes.

Specialized Turbo-series mountain bikes are among the favorites of the staff at Bicycling. If you're a mountain biker and want to dip your toes into the world of e-bicycles, the Turbo Tero 3.0 is a great place to start.

With 2.4-inch-wide tires, hydraulic disc brakes, and a 110-mm travel suspension fork, this bike is capable but takes some getting used to on the trail, according to one test rider. The components are durable enough for off-road conditions, and their standard sizing facilitates easy upgrades and replacements, enhancing the bike's appeal for entry-level trail riders.

The Portola from Ride1Up offers a compelling package for city dwellers or anyone low on storage space, and it does so while providing good bang for your buck. It can be folded down to fit easily into the trunk of most cars and the back of just about any hatchback or SUV.

Though it's compact, the Portola comes with a handsome list of features including a powerful 750-watt motor, hydraulic disc brakes, an eight-speed drivetrain, and an integrated rear rack capable of carrying up to 130 pounds. An optional extended-range battery can be selected for additional cost and there are a few cool accessories you can snag, like a basket , phone mount , and passenger's seat .

As its name implies, the Haul ST is probably the best bike on this list for moving big loads, making it ideal for delivery workers or just running errands. This compact bike can carry an impressive 419 pounds and features a 750-watt motor, strong brakes, meaty 3.5-inch tires, and a bunch of intuitive features. For all of these reasons and more, the Haul ST was named Bicycling 's 2023 Bike of the Year .

If you need even greater carrying capacity, you can opt for the larger Haul LT , which includes many of the same features as the ST with more space for hauling.

For casual riders looking to take a ride in the park or along the boardwalk, the Treadwell Neo 2 from Cannondale stands out for its classic good looks and comfortable riding position. The leisurely character of the Treadwell is enhanced in the Neo 2 thanks to the addition of electric power.

You'll never be overworked again thanks to an adequate 250-watt rear hub motor assisting pedaling. The package is only sweetened by a pair of Maxxis 650b tires, a seven-speed drivetrain, and a wide-range cassette for conquering inclines.

Road & Track readers know: If you want the best, it's going to cost you. The Specialized Turbo Vado 4.0 stands out for its exceptional design, seamless integration of components, and superior ride quality, making it an excellent choice for both seasoned cyclists and first-time e-bicycle users.

The folks at Bicycling heaped on the praise by adding, "We have ridden a lot of e-bikes over the years, and the Specialized Turbo models consistently test among the best in all categories. The brand puts a ton of development time into its Turbo series e-bikes. . . . This work pays off with best-in-class ride quality."

There are lots of options available for the Turbo Vado, including several colors, traditional or step-through frames, and a few drivetrain configurations. A full-spec Turbo Vado 4.0 can top out at over $5500, so choose your options carefully.

Classic motorcycle style and comfortable practicality are combined to create a relaxed cruiser with a casual ride. The smooth ride is provided by a torquey 750-watt motor, relaxed geometry, 3.0-inch wide tires, and a bit of heft. Bicycling testers found the big cruiser comfortable while offering enough oomph to get you over whatever small inclines block your way.

A version with a step-through frame is also available , and we recommend opting for the passenger kit as this bike is well suited for two-up cruising.

What is an electric bicycle?

An electric bicycle, or e-bike, is a bicycle equipped with an electric motor that can provide assistance to the rider. This assistance can come in the form of pedaling support or, in some models, a throttle that can power the bike without pedaling.

Are electric bicycles legal to ride everywhere?

E-bike laws vary by country and, in the United States, by state. Generally, e-bicycles are allowed where traditional bicycles are allowed, but there may be restrictions based on the e-bike's top speed and whether it has a throttle. It's important to check local laws.

Do I need a license to ride electric bicycles?

In most jurisdictions, you do not need a license to ride an e-bicycle if it meets certain criteria, typically regarding its maximum speed and power output. However, regulations can vary, so it's important to verify local laws.

How far can electric bicycles go on a single charge?

The range of an e-bike depends on a variety of factors, including battery capacity, level of pedal assist, rider's weight, terrain, and riding conditions. E-bikes can typically travel between 25 to 70 miles on a single charge, but these numbers may increase or decrease depending on the above-mentioned factors.

How long do electric bicycle batteries last?

E-bike battery lifespan is typically measured in charge cycles, with many batteries rated for 500 to 1000 cycles before their capacity significantly diminishes. This can translate to several years of use, depending on the frequency of charging.

Do electric bicycles require maintenance?

E-bikes require similar maintenance to regular bicycles, such as tire-pressure checks, brake adjustments, and drivetrain lubrication. The electrical components, however, should be serviced by professionals or according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Why Trust Us?

Road & Track and its sibling publications at Hearst Autos represent three of the most influential automotive publications in the world. We rely on decades of experience in the automotive and gear spaces to help readers make informed purchasing choices. Read more about our testing process here .

For this article, we reached out to our Hearst colleagues at Bicycling magazine . Bicycling provides expert reviews and advice on everything cycling, including gear, accessories, and fitness. Deputy editor Tara Seplavy leads Bicycling 's product test team. Having led product development and sourcing for multiple bike brands, run world championship–winning mountain bike teams, and wrenched at some of the best-known bike shops in NYC, Tara is among the best at what she does, and we appreciate her cooperation for this piece.

With the legacies of Autoweek, Car and Driver, and Road & Track behind us, the Hearst Autos Gear Team is more concerned with the trust our readers have in us than our bottom line. We won't tell you to buy something if we wouldn't buy it ourselves or recommend it to our friends, and we'll never claim to have used or tested something we haven't.

We've evaluated dozens of product categories, from heated steering wheel covers to traction boards and radar detectors . Our picks and recommendations of products and gear are based on testing and knowledge, not hype.

The Assistant Commerce Editor for Hearst Autos, Justin Helton is an enthusiast with a passion for heavily depreciated autos and a penchant for philosophical debate. As a lifelong Manhattanite, he has mastered the ins and outs of classic car ownership in one of the least car-friendly cities in the world.

As Deputy Editor, Tara Seplavy leads Bicycling’s product test team; after having previously led product development and sourcing for multiple bike brands, run World Championship winning mountain bike teams, wrenched at renowned bicycle shops in Brooklyn, raced everything from criteriums to downhill, and ridden bikes on six different continents (landing herself in hospital emergency rooms in four countries and counting). Based in Easton, Pennsylvania, Tara spends tons of time on the road and trail testing products. A familiar face at cyclocross races, crits, and bike parks in the Mid Atlantic and New England, on weekends she can often be found racing for the New York City-based CRCA/KruisCX team. When not riding a bike, or talking about them, Tara listens to a lot of ska, punk, and emo music, and consumes too much social media.  

.css-ryud0:before{margin-right:0.3125rem;width:1.125rem;height:1.125rem;content:'';display:inline-block;-webkit-background-size:1.125rem;background-size:1.125rem;background-repeat:no-repeat;-webkit-background-position:bottom;background-position:bottom;}.loaded .css-ryud0:before{background-image:url(/_assets/design-tokens/roadandtrack/static/images/slash.3b27b9a.svg);} Lifestyle

Get Amazing Deals on Watches Right Now at Amazon

The Best Amazon Spring Sale AirPod Deals to Shop

Casio Launches Land Cruiser–Inspired G-Shock

Experts Pick the Top Snowblowers

The Ultimate BMW Lover's Smartphone

Best Tech Gifts for Men, 2024

The Best Early Black Friday Deals on Amazon

The Best Boots for Men that Suit Every Style

Best Racing Games for PlayStation, 2024

The Best Black Friday TV Deals of 2023

Best Racing Games for Xbox, 2024

The best electric bikes of 2024

Our picks for the best electric bikes for riders of all types and budgets, based on dozens of reviews and tests.

• The best for most people
• Best budget ebike

Best fat tire ebike

• Best for commuters

Best electric dirt bike

Best under $1,000

Best cargo ebike, best folding ebike, best front-storage cargo bike, best for long distances, ebike specs compared.

• What to look for
• Ebike rules and regulations

Meet our testers

• How we test electric bikes

The best electric bike for most people

The best ebike for most people

It's not the flashiest, but we think the RadCity 5 Plus will more than fit the needs of most riders. It's comfortable, offers plenty of power, and comes with lights, fenders, and a rear rack for your gear. Plus, RadPower makes a lot of accessories that let you easily customize the bike.

In our tests, we found the RadCity 5 Plus to be responsive and powerful enough to get us up and down hills easily, and do so in comfort. It is a bit heavy at 64 pounds, but that should only be an issue if you try to go farther than it's 55-mile range.

Read more below .

The best affordable electric bike

For those who don't want to spend too much on an ebike, the Ride1Up Turris offers just about everything you could want, with few compromises. 

If you're looking for an ebike that can go anywhere, look no further. This bike is responsive, stable in all conditions, including snow, has both lights and turn signals, and even comes with fenders.

Read more below

The best for commuters

This affordable ebike has a neat feature: Its handlebars can turn sideways, so it'll take up less room when you have to store it in a hallway or some other cramped space. It's also fairly light, has a great range, and has a built-in rear rack.

This BMX-style fat tire bike delivers some great thrills on trails and dirt paths. It has a powerful motor to get you around, but no suspension.

This lightweight ebike lacks some niceties you'll find on more expensive rides — you'll have to provide your own lights and fenders — but it delivers a zippy ride around town at a great price.

The best cargo ebike

A truly versatile ebike that can be configured with dozens of accessories. It's also compact, powerful, very comfortable to ride, and one of the most affordable cargo bikes around.

Read more below 

Click to view more products...

This futuristic-looking ebike is made from carbon fiber, which keeps its weight to just 36 pounds. It has a speedy electronic shifter, responsive and powerful motor, and a great range for something this small. It ain't cheap, though.

Read more below.

When you need to haul really big loads, the Supercargo CL is your best bet. It has a ton of space, yet is very stable and even fun to ride.

Longest range

With dual batteries, this bike has the endurance to get you wherever you need to go. And, it's often on sale for a very reasonable price.

1. The best for most people 2. Best affordable ebike 3. Best fat tire ebike 4. Best for commuters 5. Best electric dirt bike 6. Best under $1,000 7. Best cargo ebike 8. Best folding ebike 9. Best front-storage cargo bike 10. Longest-range e-bike 11. What to look for 12. Electric bike FAQ 13. Ebike rules and regulations 14. How we test ebikes  

What makes for the best electric bike? With so many models out there, it's hard to know at a glance which model will get you where you need to go and which features you can and can't live without. That's why we've tested a number of the top models across all types of electric bikes to give you the best recommendations for your needs. 

We test the bikes by riding them around, to see how responsive their electric motors are when going up hills and getting started from a dead stop. We also gauge the comfort of the bikes over long miles, and note the ease with which we can use their various features, such as an accompanying smartphone app. And, we also test the bikes' battery life; while endurance is affected by many factors, such as terrain and temperature, we try to the best of our ability to see how the bikes live up to the company's estimates.

While many of the best electric bikes are expensive — upwards of $2,000 — they're coming down in price; in fact, we also have a list of the best budget electric bikes under $1,500. And before you do any riding, be sure to pick up one of the best bike helmets to keep your head safe, and one of the best bike locks to keep your ride secure. 

Read on for all our best electric bike picks. 

The best electric bikes you can buy today

Why you can trust Tom's Guide Our writers and editors spend hours analyzing and reviewing products, services, and apps to help find what's best for you. Find out more about how we test, analyze, and rate.

best electric bike

1. Rad Power RadCity 5 Plus

Our expert review:

Specifications

Reasons to buy, reasons to avoid.

For the vast majority of riders, the Rad Power RadCity 5 Plus will be the best electric bike. It has a comfortable design, plenty of power, and a multitude of mounting points for things such as baskets and child seats. Plus, it comes with a rear rack and mudguards. Its 7-speed shifter, combined with three levels of pedal assistance and a twist throttle is more than enough to get you up even the steepest of hills.

Rad Power says that the RadCity5 should get upwards of 50+ miles on a charge; in our testing, it came fairly close — about 40 miles. 

We really enjoyed pedaling around on this bike, which is offered in both step-through and step-over models. Its battery, while not fully integrated into the downtube, provides plenty of range, and can also be used to charge your phone (with the right adapter). The one caveat is that this bike weighs a hefty 64 pounds, so you're not going to want to lug it up stairs.

At a starting price of $1,999, it's reasonably affordable, but you should check out our Rad Power Bikes promo codes for the latest discounts. 

Read our full Rad Power RadCity 5 Plus review .

Best affordable ebike

2. Ride1Up Turris

While there are plenty of great electric bikes that cost more than $2,000, the Ride1Up Turris shows that you can get a lot of value from an ebike that costs much less. During our testing, we found the Turris' 750W motor to be more than powerful enough for most situations. We were equally impressed with how quickly it responded when we started pedaling, as many budget ebikes exhibit a slight delay in these situations. (There was a slight lag when using just the throttle, though).

Other standout features include its mechanical disc brakes, easy-to-read digital display, and bright 60 Lux headlight. Included front and rear fenders helped keep our clothes clean on wet days, and its wide, 27.5 x 2.4-inch tires made for a comfortable ride — so much so that we thought that the front suspension felt a bit extraneous. 

There's no taillight, so you'll want to check out our picks for the best bike lights , and unlike some pricier ebikes, you'll have to assemble a few pieces of the bike yourself, including the handlebars, front wheel, and pedals. We also had to make a few adjustments to the fenders, which might mean a trip to your local bike shop. 

But for those who want an affordable electric bike to get around town, the Turris should be at the top of your list. 

Read our full Ride1Up Turris review .

3. Aventon Aventure.2

If you're looking for a fat-tire electric bike that's less than $2,000, the Aventon Aventure.2 is hard to beat. It's as good off-road as it is on pavement, has a beefy battery and a clear color display, as well as fenders that'll save your clothes from getting too muddy. Other niceties include a brake-activated rear light and turn signals.

The Aventure.2 has both pedal-assist and throttle modes, and the battery and wires are neatly integrated into the frame. What's more, the battery can be removed for charging. The battery lasted nearly the advertised 60 miles on a charge, but, as with other ebikes, we drained it much faster when we relied on the throttle.

While not as capable as a dedicated mountain bike, the Aventure.2 was able to get us up and over hilly terrain, and its torque sensor was quick to translate our pedaling into power. 

Our only real critiques were the bike's 77-pound weight and its front suspension fork, which felt unnecessary. Otherwise, it's an excellent bike for the price.

Read our full Aventon Aventure.2 review .

best for commuters

4. Charge Bikes City

If you plan on commuting to work, Charge Bikes City may well be the best ebike for you. Not only does it come with features like full-fenders to keep the mud off and a rear rack for a pack or bag, but it does everything well for a very reasonable price. The Charge City has a five level power assist, as well as a full-power throttle button, should the need or hill arise. 

The biggest reason why we think this bike is best for commuters is that its handle bars fold flat, so you can more easily store it in an apartment or a cubicle at work. It comes with all the necessary bells and whistles a commuter is going to want, including the bell (actually a superior and very loud electronic horn). The bike is available in both step-over and step through, and in a few color options, too.

The City's electric assist is so smooth you'll think you're doing all the work yourself. At night, the bike's lights sufficiently lit up the road and the throttle helped us zip around potential trouble when we felt out of gas. Its advertised range of 50 miles held up, too; we found we only had to recharge the bike every three days using it on our regular commute.

Founded by folks from biking icon Cannondale, Charge's sui generis feature is that even newbies can assemble the bike right out of the box in 10 minutes or less. All you basically have to do is put the front wheel on. 

Read our full Charge Bikes City review

Best BMX-style bike

5. Juiced Ripracer

The Juiced Ripracer is a lot of fun, and costs a lot less than you might think. It's one of the more affordable offroad ebikes we've tested, and it can go just about anywhere. This fat-tire bike has 20-inch wheels and a 40.3-inch wheelbase that's meant for trails and other unpaved surfaces. However, its lack of shock absorbers, like most e-mountain bikes, means you're in for a rougher ride. 

Its 750W motor delivered some real get-up-and-go, and, thanks to its low-end torque, was great for charging up hills. In one concession to its price, the Ripracer has a cadence, rather than a torque sensor, so you have to rotate the pedals a couple of time before the assist kicks in. As it's a BMX-style bike, the Ripracer is a lot smaller than other mountain e-bikes, which also makes it easier to maneuver around tight spaces. 

Read our full Juiced Ripracer review .

6. Ride1Up Roadster V2

At first glance, the Ride1Up Roadster V2 It looks like a regular, non-motorized commuter bike — the better to blend in with traditional rides — but concealed inside is a battery capable of up to 30 miles of range. 

The Roadster V2 is also one of the lightest ebikes we tested — it weighs just 33 pounds, so carrying it around shouldn't be a problem — and although there's no step-through model, Ride1Up offers it in two sizes to accommodate riders of nearly all heights. 

The Roadster V2 was fast and fun on flat and rolling terrain, and its belt drive made for a very quiet ride. However, this is a single-speed model, so it's a bit hard to get moving on hills. 

There are a few concessions to get to this price: The Roadster V2 doesn't have lights of any kind, nor does it have fenders, and it uses rim, rather than disc brakes. We also found its display to be on the small side. Still, if you can live with those compromises, you'll enjoy the Roadster V2.

Read our full Ride1Up Roadster V2 review .

7. RadPower RadRunner 3 Plus

How's this for an endorsement? Our reviewer loved this bike so much that he decided to buy one for himself. 

While it can't haul as heavy loads as some other larger (and much more expensive) cargo bikes, the RadPower RadRunner 3 Plus is more than capable of carrying you, your kids, and plenty of groceries wherever you need to go. We loved its responsive 750W motor, its comfortable ride, and its low center of gravity, thanks to its 3.3-inch thick, 20-inch tires.

However, we found it to be fairly heavy, tipping the scales at 75 pounds, so you're not going to want to try pedal it without any power assist. But we found its advertised 45-mile range to be pretty accurate, so long as we didn't go too heavy on the throttle.

Aside from its performance, what made the RadRunner 3 Plus stand out so much to us was its versatility: You can outfit the bike with any number of combinations of racks, seats, bags, and other accessories to truly customize it for your needs. And, its relatively low price for a cargo bike makes it a real bargain for those looking to replace their car with an electric bike.

Read our full RadPower RadRunner 3 Plus review .

8. Gocycle G4i+

The Gocycle G4i+ looks like something a supercar designer would build, which isn't surprising given that it was conceived by former McLaren sports car engineer Richard Thorpe. Not only is this bike's unique wheels-on-one-side and tapered body eye-catching, but we were able to fold it up in less than a minute into a size small enough to get us on and off a train, and past our security and into our office elevator. At 36 pounds, it's one of the lightest folding electric bikes out there, too. 

Despite that, this bike was a real pleasure to ride. Its electric shifter responded near instantly, as did the pedal assist and throttle. However, while the G4i+ has daytime running lights, you'll have to pay extra for a legit headlight, as well as mudguards. Also, the G4i+ has a great smartphone app, but one of the flimsiest methods of holding your phone on the bike itself — a cheap solution for a bike that costs $7,000. 

If you're looking for something slightly more affordable, GoCycle also sells the G4i ($5,999) and the G4 ($4,799). A 2022 version of the G4 has an injection molded composite mid-frame. Still too much for your wallet? Then you should check out the Brompton Electric C-Line Explore , which starts around $3,000. 

Read our full GoCycle G4i+ review .

9. Yuba Supercargo CL

The Yuba Supercargo CL can haul an astounding 500 pounds, making it one of the heftiest electric cargo bikes in its class. Yet, it offers a surprisingly stable ride, thanks to its low center of gravity. Its cargo area is very customizable, letting you convert it from a place to carry groceries to a space to tote your tots to soccer practice.  

Magna hydraulic brakes and a Bosch mid-drive motor were very responsive, though the relatively small 20-inch tires and lack of suspension did make bumps feel a bit jarring. The Supercargo CL starts at around $6,000, but is incredibly customizable; you can select from a range of accessories to adapt the cargo area to suit your needs. 

If you're looking for a cargo bike that can haul more than the Rad Power RadRunner 3 Plus, this is the model to consider.

Read our full Yuba Supercargo CL review .

10. NIU BQi-C3 Pro

There's nothing worse when running out of power when riding your electric bike, especially if you're miles from home — and at the bottom of a hill. With its dual batteries, the NIU BQi-C3 Pro is the best electric bike for those who have range anxiety, as it can give you up to 90 miles of range before you need to recharge. And, that's no boast — based on our testing, we found that 90-mile estimate to be pretty accurate, too. 

But range isn't the only thing we liked about the BQi-C3 Pro: It has mechanical disc brakes, front and rear lights, and a rear rack so you can carry things wherever you plan to go. A carbon belt drive is another nice-to-have feature, as it's quiet and easier to maintain than a traditional metal chain. Its step-through design also makes the bike easy to use for riders of all sizes; we tried it with both a 5' 11" rider and a 5' 3" rider, and both found it comfortable. 

Our only real complaint with the BQi-C3 Pro is that at 70.5 pounds, it's one of the heaviest electric bikes we've tested that's not a cargo bike, so this is not a model to buy if you have to go up any stairs. Still, the bike's 500W motor was more than powerful enough to get its bulk moving with ease. 

The bike's regular price is $2,199, but we've seen it on sale during the holidays for as low as $1,299, so wait for a sale to pick it up.

Read our full NIU BQi-C3 Pro review .

What to look for when buying an electric bike

Pedal-assist or throttle? All electric bikes have what's called pedal-assist; you start pedaling, and the bike's motor kicks in to make your ride a little easier. But you need to put in at least some work: you won't go anywhere unless you pedal. Most electric bikes will also let you set the level of assistance, so you can decide how hard you want to pedal.

However, some electric bikes will also have a throttle. Press a button or push a lever, and the bike will do all the work for you — no pedaling needed! Using a throttle will quickly eat up the battery life on the bike, so you'll get far less of a range if you don't want to pedal at all.

Motor type Less expensive electric bikes traditionally use a rear hub motor. Mid-drive motors located in the center pedal crank shaft tend to be more expensive but offer better overall balance and smoother shifting. 

Motors are also rated based on their power, measured in Watts. Typically, the least powerful motor will be 250 Watts, but unless you're a very large person or planning to go up really steep hills, the motor size shouldn’t be a major determining factor for your purchase. More important,  there is no industry standard for measuring Watts (is it continuous or peak and if peak, for how long?). So in general, a motor’s Watt rating isn’t a reliable indication of power.

Battery size Consider where you live. If you're in San Francisco you're going to want more help than if you're cruising around Austin. Watt hours (Wh) is the most important figure for comparison—it takes into account battery output and battery life to give you a better sense of available power. Higher Wh translates into more range. 

Many electric bike makers will also include an estimated range (usually about 40 miles) that you can get off a single charge. You should take this figure with a large grain of salt, as that number is usually determined under ideal circumstances: A fairly lightweight person riding on flat terrain with no wind, and at the perfect ambient temperature for the battery. Range is also dependent on the level of power assist being used, whether full-throttle has been applied and for how long, and your average speed. As they say, your mileage may vary.

Removable or built-in battery? Most bike batteries will handle rides of about 40 miles and need to be plugged in for at least a couple of hours to get to 80 percent of capacity. So if you have a more demanding commute, consider a model that lets you swap out the battery rather than a bike with an integrated battery. 

Also, if you live in a place where you can't bring your bike inside or get close to a wall outlet (such as if you live in a walk-up apartment), definitely look for a bike with a removable battery. It will make your life a lot easier.

Step-over or Step-through? Many electric bike makers will offer their bikes in two configurations: Step-over (which has a top bar that runs parallel to the ground) and Step-through (the bar is angled downwards). Once upon a time, step-through models were traditionally thought of as women's bikes, but that perception is changing. It's generally easier to get on and off a step-through bike, as you don't have to lift your leg over a bar. 

Safety features If you're planning to ride your electric bike in traffic or in low-light conditions (such as dawn and dusk), it's worth looking for an electric bike with built-in head and taillights. While increasingly common, it's not a standard feature on all models. 

Electric bike FAQ

What are the different types of electric bike.

Generally speaking, electric bikes fall into the same categories as non-electric bikes. Here's a quick summary of some of the kinds of electric bikes you'll find.

Road bike: These are meant solely for riding on roads, and are designed for speed. They will have thinner tires and curved handlebars, so that the rider will be crouched forward. Higher-end models may also be made out of carbon fiber, so as to make the bike as light as possible.

Mountain bike : Designed for off-road use, mountain bikes will have thick, knobby tires, full suspension, and a burlier frame to better absorb bumps and jumps. 

Fat tire bikes : Similar to mountain bikes, fat tire bikes are meant to be ridden off-road, usually on very soft ground, such as mud, sand, and snow. As their name suggests, these bikes have very wide tires — as much as four inches — which helps keep a grip on unsteadier terrain.

City/Commuter bike: Made for urban dwellers who need to get around town, a commuter bike will have tires that are somewhere in between a road and a mountain bike. Generally, the bikes will be configured so that the rider's back is vertical when seated, which gives them a better view of their surroundings.

Cargo bike: These bikes are made for carrying heavy loads, and will have a cargo area either in the front or rear of the bike. Because of the payload area, these bikes often tend to me much longer and heavier — and more expensive — than a typical bike.  

What is a good speed for an electric bike?

In the U.S., electric bikes are limited to 20 miles per hour; that is, they can only provide you with power — either through pedal-assist or with a throttle — until the bike hits 20 MPH. While you can easily go faster than 20 MPH on an electric bike, the rest of that power will have to be provided by you — or gravity. 

How much does an electric bike cost?

Electric bikes range widely in price. Some of the best cheap electric bikes start at around $1,000; you can certainly find models for less, but quality will be less. 

The bulk of electric bikes cost anywhere from $1,500 to around $2,500, and there are hundreds of models in this price range.  

Higher-end and specialized electric bikes — such as cargo bikes — will cost upwards of $3,000, and can easily reach $6,000 to $8,000, which is a sizable investment. 

rules and regulations

There has been a lot of confusion about ebikes (pedal assist versus throttle bikes) and where you can legally ride them. Some municipalities have banned ebikes from bicycle paths, for example. Many places classify ebikes depending on whether they can go full throttle and have a maximum speed of 20 or 28 mph. There are three official classifications:

Class 1: Ebikes that only assist while you pedal, with a top speed of 20 mph.

Class 2: Ebikes with a throttle that don't require you to pedal but have a top speed of 20 mph.

Class 3: Ebikes that only assist while you pedal, with a top speed of 28 mph.

So check your local regulations before you buy. And always wear a helmet.

Dan Cavallari is the former technical editor for VeloNews Magazine, who currently reviews electric bikes, the best bike lights , best bike locks , and other bike accessories for Tom's Guide. In addition to VeloNews, his work has appeared in Triathlete Magazine, Rouleur Magazine, CyclingTips.com, Road Bike Action, Mountain Bike Action, CycleVolta.com, Tomsguide.com, and much more. 

Dan also hosts two podcasts on his site, Slow Guy on the Fast Ride: One is about cycling and other outdoor activities, while the other looks at mental health issues. Most recently, Dan also covered the 2022 Tour de France. Dan lives outside of Denver, Colorado with his family. 

John R. Quain has been reviewing and testing video and audio equipment for more than 20 years. For Tom's Guide, he has reviewed televisions, HDTV antennas, electric bikes, electric cars, as well as other outdoor equipment. He is currently a contributor to The New York Times and the CBS News television program. John has also written our guide to the best bike helmets . 

how we test

All the bicycles in this feature were road (and in some cases, off-road) tested by Tom’s Guide reviewers and staff. 

The testing process begins when we first receive the bike; as most come only partly assembled, we assess the difficulty with which we have to put the final pieces together. Typically, this involves attaching the front wheel, handlebars, and pedals, but some bikes are easier to put together than others. 

Next, we take the bikes for a ride, evaluating their comfort, handling, responsiveness of their motors — some will be faster to apply power than others — as well as how they perform over a variety of terrain and conditions. For example, if we're testing a fat-tire bike, we'll take it off-roading; if we're testing a cargo bike, we'll load it with kids and grocery bags. 

If a bike has headlights and/or taillights, we'll also check to see how bright they are in dimmer conditions. After all, you're not going to only ride it during the day. We'll also try out any other safety features, such as bells and horns. 

We also evaluate the advertised battery range of an electric bike. Many companies will offer, shall we say, optimistic range estimates based on ideal riding conditions: A light rider using the lowest level of power assist, and traveling on a level road in 70-degree conditions. 

But, that's not reflective of real-world use. While it's impossible to replicate the exact same conditions from one bike review to the next, we do our best to provide as much detail in our reviews as to how we rode the bike (terrain, pedal assist levels) to determine how close to accurate the companies' claims are.

Finally, if an electric bike comes with an app — as is becoming increasingly common— we'll test it out too, to see how easy it is to use, and how well it works with the bike itself. 

Sign up to get the BEST of Tom’s Guide direct to your inbox.

Upgrade your life with a daily dose of the biggest tech news, lifestyle hacks and our curated analysis. Be the first to know about cutting-edge gadgets and the hottest deals.

Michael A. Prospero is the U.S. Editor-in-Chief for Tom’s Guide. He oversees all evergreen content and oversees the Homes, Smart Home, and Fitness/Wearables categories for the site. In his spare time, he also tests out the latest drones, electric scooters, and smart home gadgets, such as video doorbells. Before his tenure at Tom's Guide, he was the Reviews Editor for Laptop Magazine, a reporter at Fast Company, the Times of Trenton, and, many eons back, an intern at George magazine. He received his undergraduate degree from Boston College, where he worked on the campus newspaper The Heights, and then attended the Columbia University school of Journalism. When he’s not testing out the latest running watch, electric scooter, or skiing or training for a marathon, he’s probably using the latest sous vide machine, smoker, or pizza oven, to the delight — or chagrin — of his family.

• John R. Quain

I cycled 46 miles with the Himiway Zebra ebike — here's what happened

Blood, sweat and beers — 7 lessons I learned from building my first ebike

Samsung Galaxy Book 4 Ultra review — this is now my favorite Windows laptop

• Marc-G Hello, I noticed a couple of errors in the article around pricing on a couple of the bikes. Regarding the Gazelle Medeo T9 classic, your article list a starting price of $1999 but clicking the link takes you to their site where the least expensive model is $2499 and no model called Medeo T9 Classic is available nor can such a model be found with search. The second model is the VanMoof S3 which is listed in the article with a starting price of $1999 but going to the site shows a price of $2299. As someone trying to persuade his wife that an ebike would be a worthwhile purchase for me, I’d be grateful if you would clarify these discrepancies. One last thing. On the article itself, it says it was published 21 hours ago when it was actually published on July 21. I’m going to assume some aspect of it was updated but I can’t spot any changes to it and would appreciate it if whatever was updated could be noted somewhere. Many thanks for the article. Pricing confusion aside, it’s been quite helpful for me. Reply
• Marc-G Thanks for the reply. Just went back to the top of this page and realized that it said 2020. However, if that’s the case, why is it made to look like a recent article? Does that mean all the authors did was change the title from best of 2020 to best of 2021? That seems kind of disingenuous to me. Reply
• mprospero Hi Marc - We've recently updated the pricing for all the models. We've also added new ones to this list as we've reviewed them. Reply
• GFujioka You do your readers a disservice and reveal your partiality by not listing the 64,5 lb weight of your number one bike. Cheers. Reply
• gtilford One factor that seems to be missing from virtually every review-support. I have some friends who could not get parts for their ebikes for 6+months, and they were only 1 year old. I've had problems getting parts with a highly recommended brand. The bike is well made, it performs well, but parts are nearly unobtainable. If I knew then when I know now about parts availability I wouild not have purchased the brand. Reply
• View All 5 Comments

Most Popular

• 2 Act fast! This iMac M3 deal won't last long — save $150 now at Amazon
• 3 Android 15 might transform your phone into a smart home hub while it charges
• 4 Meletrix Boog75 review — a gaming keyboard with style to spare
• 5 All four Google Pixel 8a colors just leaked ahead of Google I/O 2024 launch — here’s your options

10 of the Best Ebikes for Touring

After long hours in the saddle, we’ve selected ten of our favorite touring ebikes. We’ll go through the details of these in a moment, including the Pros, the Cons, and the typical price you can expect to pay for each. Before that, we’ll look at the key features that you should consider when choosing an electric bike for touring.

There’s no denying that cycle touring is quite hard work. Pedaling yourself and your bike along (even on the flat) for 10 miles, 20 miles, or more is a challenge. Once you’ve loaded up your bike with all the essentials for touring (including your toothbrush and clean underwear) you might even have difficulty going once around the block. Luckily, there’s an easy answer to this and it comes in the form of electric bikes (AKA ebikes). These are bikes that have an electric motor fitted to give you assistance as you pedal and they’re exploding in popularity.

How to choose an ebike for touring

At its most basic, an ebike is a pushbike with a battery and an electric motor fitted. Start hunting around, though, and you’ll soon discover there’s a wide array of brands, models and specs available. So, how do you choose the right one for your budget, tastes and needs? Well, there are a few key factors to consider and we’ll take a look at them now.

Comfort First up, you’ll want a bike that is comfortable to ride as you’re likely to be on it for long periods of time. Road bikes are built for speed and great for touring and will get you to your destination fastest. But, if you’re not used to cycling on one, then choose a bike that has a more upright riding position – our goal here is to see the sights, not set a PB time. Similarly, bikes that have wider tires and a more padded saddle are useful as these will help soak up the lumps and bumps of the road or trail surface and be more enjoyable to ride.

Battery range In recent years battery technology has come on in leaps and bounds, with some ebikes now able to take you up to 230 miles on a single charge. Choose an ebike that has a lithium-ion battery from a well-known manufacturer (such as Panasonic or Samsung).

Cargo-carrying capacity The best place to store your gear when you’re bike touring is on the bike. Loading up a heavy backpack will get uncomfortable and sweaty very quickly. It will also make you top-heavy and more likely to topple over. Look for ebikes that either have pannier racks pre-fitted or have the fixings so that you can add your own.

It’s also worth considering a step-through or low-step bike if you plan on carrying lots of cargo with you on your tour. This can make it easier to get on and off a fully-laden bike without tilting it dangerously over to one side.

Best ebikes for touring

Let’s take a look at our ten favorite electric bikes for touring. These cover a wide range of different styles and price ranges. Some have loads of added extras and some are a simpler design.

Pros: Bosch battery and motor combo, fitted rear rack and fenders, sloping downtube, front suspension Cons: What’s not to like about this Haibike! Rating: 9/10 Typical price: $2600 / Purchase at Backcountry.com

Pros: Integrated rear rack, low-step through frame, budget price Cons: No suspension, small wheels Rating: 7/10 Typical price: $1299 / Purchase at Radpowerbikes.com

Pros: Great Shimano electronics paired with a light and strong aluminum frame Cons: Limited space to install water bottle cage Rating: 8/10 Typical price: $2399 / Purchase at Rei.com

Pros: Folds for easy transport, pre-fitted fenders and rear rack, suits wide range of rider heights Cons: No suspension, small wheels Rating: 7/10 Typical price: $2799 / Purchase at Rei.com

Pros: Bosch motor, 28mph top speed, light aluminum frame Cons: no integrated rear cargo rack Rating: 8/10 Typical price: $4100 / Purchase at Backcountry.com

Pros: excellent bike package for trail touring and bikepacking Cons: non-locking front fork Rating: 8/10 Typical price: $4100 / Purchase at Rei.com

Pros: Massive cargo-carrying capacity, ideal for wide range of rider heights (4’8” to 6’4”) Cons: at 71 lbs, it’s a heavy bike Rating: 7/10 Typical price: $4999 / Purchase at Rei.com

Wilier Cento1HY Ultegra E-Bike

(Photo: wilier.com)

Amongst die-hard bike tourers, there’s an obsession with trying to cut out weight before a tour commences. Eating salads and sawing toothbrushes in half are all common practice. But it doesn’t have to be that way. Wilier does away with the need for all of that scary green stuff and suspect dental hygiene by giving us the Cento1HY. An ebike that is one of the lightest around (at only 26 lbs) and has oodles of power available (a 250W motor delivering speeds up to 20mph).

Pros: super-light ebike Cons: limited cargo-carrying potential Rating: 8/10 Typical price: $6000 / Purchase at CompetitiveCyclist.com

Pros: 26 lbs bike weight, hidden power, Shimano drivetrain Cons: limited cargo capacity Rating: 9/10 Typical price: $7200 / Purchase at CompetitiveCyclist.com

Pros: Shimano GRX Di2 electronic shifting, go-anywhere touring bike Cons: $$$ Rating: 9.5/10 Typical price: $9999 / Purchase at CompetitiveCyclist.com

—————————————————–

Ben Jones is a lover not a fighter, a cyclist not a DIY-er, and the founder of BicycleVolt a handy resource for cyclists from Tour-de-France wannabees to those just starting out on their bicycling journey.

Latest Articles

• 3 of the Best Tours of Switzerland and Austria April 11, 2024
• Where to Buy Vintage Gold Necklaces April 11, 2024
• 5 of the Best Trafalgar Tours of Italy April 10, 2024
•  A Comparison of Ferries from Algeciras to Tangier April 10, 2024
• The Best All Inclusive Hotels in Albufeira April 10, 2024

The 15 Best Electric Bikes of 2024

• Last updated March 6, 2024

• All of our bikes are electric, but all of our writers are human.

Velotric Nomad 1

Aventon Level.2

RadRover 6 Plus

How we review e-bikes.

Our goal is to provide you with the most accurate information possible, which is why we actually get out on the road (or trail, depending on the type of bike) and test these e-bikes. Standardized evaluations like our hill climb and range tests provide unbiased data about the bike’s performance. We then use that data to rate each product on a universal 5-star scale.

If, for some reason, we can’t get our hands on a physical model, our team of researchers steps in and scours the internet for the most reliable information. And they aren’t just any old researchers; they’re industry experts with years of e-bike riding experience.

Learn more about our team and our product research methodology .

Best E-Bikes You Can Buy Now

• Best All-Terrain E-Bike: RadRover 6 Plus  
• Best Commuter E-Bike: Aventon Level.2  
• Best Cargo E-Bike: Xtracycle Swoop
• Best Folding Cargo E-Bike: Flyer™ Folding Cargo
• Best Lightweight E-MTB: Trek Fuel EXe
• Best E-MTB: Canyon Spectral:ON
• Best Fat-Tire E-Bike: Velotric Nomad 1
• Best Electric Beach Cruiser: Townie Go! 7D
• Best E-Bike for Cities: Tenways CGO600 Pro
• Best Folding E-Bike: Gocycle G4i
• Best E-Bike for Hunting: QuietKat Apex Pro
• Best Step-Thru E-Bike: Trek Verve+ 3 Lowstep
• Best Touring E-Bike: Cannondale Tesoro Neo X
• Best E-Bike for Seniors: RadCity 5 Plus
• Best E-Bike for Kids: Hiboy BK1

Best All-Terrain E-Bike

What We Like

• Affordable price
• Cushy suspension and ride
• Impressive 750W motor
• Heavy duty sturdy cargo rack

What We Don't Like

• Hefty weight (over 70 lbs)
• Some diminished power due to weight
• Average range — nothing extraordinary

Originally released in 2021 by Rad Power Bikes, the RadRover 6 Plus remains one of the best all-terrain electric bikes on the market today. But we think it’s better called an adventure commuter bike since it performs well on gravel trails and bumpy city roads.

This American-made bike offers the perfect combination of sturdiness and comfort, thanks to its big frame, 4″ fat tires, suspension fork, and heavy-duty rack. Its 750W rear hub motor also packs a big punch when required, helping you tackle even the steepest of hills — even with a full load on throttle alone.

However, the powerful motor guzzles up some of the battery, limiting the range to about 45 miles. The weight of the bike also diminishes the power a bit, making the pedal assist unnoticeable on lower levels.

Bottom Line

With its affordable price and great features, the RadRover 6 Plus is definitely one for you if you don’t want to stick just to paved roads. It does have a few inefficiencies with the weight and range, but a realistic 40+-mile run on mixed terrain isn’t a dealbreaker.

Rad Power RadExpand 5

Rad Power Bikes’ RadExpand 5 is a folding electric bike version of the RadRover. It, too, comes with 4” fat tires, a throttle, a comfortable saddle, and a powerful rear hub motor ideal for an all-terrain  e-bike. Unlike the heavyweight beast above that might just fit in the back of a truck, the RadExpand can fold down and sit in the space of a large trunk.

Another aspect we like about the RadExpand is the low-step design, which is practical for seniors, individuals with mobility issues, or those who wear dresses/skirts while riding.

Be The First To Know

Best commuter e-bike.

What we like

• Torque-sensing system
• Frame-integrated brake lights
• Customizable max assist options
• Reasonable price

What we don't like

• Weighs over 60 lbs
• Mediocre range

The Aventon Level.2 is Aventon’s second generation of top-end city/commuter e-bikes , and this most recent model really steps it up. It comes programmed as a Class 2 e-bike, but you can customize the maximum assist features to accommodate a Class 1 or 3 status — or make it an out-of-class e-bike with the throttle and maximum pedal assist.

The new torque-sensing system enhances the PAS, offering a more sophisticated and natural feeling than the original Level e-bike. On top of those features, the Aventon Level.2 includes accessories and an impressive suspension fork. 

That said, this e-bike is fairly heavy at  62 lbs. The range is also unimpressive, topping out at 42 miles — or less if you depend on the throttle. And while we give Aventon props for sleekly integrating the battery and lights, the wires could use some tidying up.

The Aventon Level.2 comes with a bunch of great features — like a torque-sensing system and thumb throttle — at a reasonable price. Even with the range topping out around 40 miles, that’s typically more than enough for most commutes.

Trek Allant+ 8S Stagger

As commuter electric bikes go, the Trek Allant+ 8S Stagger has a lot to offer. The 625Wh battery offers a great range, and the powerful Bosch Performance Speed mid-drive motor kicks like a mule. Capable of 28 mph, this Class 3 e-bike offers high-speed, long-range commuting.

Another perk is the COBI.Bike app that turns your smartphone into a bike controller where you can view stats like speed and distance. Plus, the e-bike can even charge your phone while you ride.

Need More Options?

Best Cargo E-Bike

Xtracycle Swoop

• Thoughtfully designed to grow with your family
• Carries up to 470 lbs
• Sturdy yet lightweight construction
• High-quality components for extended durability
• High price tag may push people away
• Long charge time at 10.2 hours for a full charge

The Xtracycle Swoop is the perfect alternative to a car that is designed to adapt and grow alongside your family’s needs. Although it has a hefty price tag, it is essential to understand that this is not just a purchase but a long-term investment that guarantees to prove its worth over time. The Swoop was designed to grow with your family.

The Swoop’s system pairs the Shimano STEPS EP8 mid-drive motor with a 630Wh externally mounted battery for pedal assist speeds up to 20 mph. The 60-mile range is more than enough to handle most daily round trips, from errands and delivery jobs to kid drop-offs/pick-ups.

Xtracycle doesn’t cut corners on durability, either. You get high-end mountain bike-level components, powerful Tektro hydraulic disc brakes, and  unlimited cargo configurations. That’s why the $5,000 price tag seems more than fair — especially considering the savings you’ll enjoy from ditching your car.

One cannot help but notice the impeccable attention to detail that has gone into the design of the Swoop. Every aspect of this e-bike has been carefully crafted with high-end components that exude quality and dependability. It’s clear that this bike was not just created to meet standards, but rather to surpass them.

Lectric XPedition Cargo

Lectric is a well-established brand known for its solid and reliable machines, and the Lectric Xpedition Cargo is no exception. It does what $5,000+ cargo e-bikes can do — but at a fraction of the cost.

For under $2,000, you get an e-bike capable of carrying up to 450 lbs of rider and cargo for over 100 miles. That’s plenty of range to complete a full day of deliveries or errands, making this bike a game-changer in the cargo e-bike niche.

Best Folding Cargo E-Bike

Flyer™ Folding Cargo E-Bike

• Lightweight but sturdy frame
• Compact size (35.5″ x 22″ x 31.5″)
• Rear rack that holds up to 80 lbs
• Accommodates varying rider height (4' 11"-6' 4")
• Throttle for moderate hills
• 350W motor — could use a little more juice
• Not ideal for riding steep hills or mountains

The Flyer™ Folding Cargo electric bike is a product of Radio Flyer, a company known for crafting classic wagons. Surprisingly, they have created an exceptional e-bike that lives up to the company’s high standards.

The Flyer™ Folding Cargo is suitable for both city commuters and adventure enthusiasts. The compact size means it fits almost anywhere, from tiny apartments to your car’s trunk. And the compactness doesn’t affect durability. This e-bike has a sturdy yet lightweight aluminum frame and an integrated rear rack that can hold up to 80 lbs.

The one major drawback is that there are no gears to shift into on steep climbs, so this Folding Cargo e-bike isn’t going to be that hill climber you’d expect from a geared electric bike. If you live in a city with steep hills or plan on riding in the mountains, this probably isn’t for you.

The Flyer™ Folding Cargo is a versatile and practical bike that is perfect for both city and outdoor adventures — unless you live in an area with a lot of steep hills.

Lectric XP 3.0

The Lectric XP 3.0 has a lot of the same great features as the Flyer™ Folding Cargo: It’s great for hauling heavy cargo on a durable, compact folding frame. The Lectric XP 3.0 loses points because of the extra weight but makes up for it with the gears. You be the judge, though!

Best Lightweight E-MTB

Trek Fuel EXe 9.9 XX1 AXS

• Extremely lightweight
• Ultimate comfort and maneuverability
• High-quality components and impressive durability
• Limitless ranging with motor off
• Extremely high price – might put it out of reach for casual riders

The Fuel EXe rides so smoothly you might question whether it’s actually an electric bike. And that’s just the point. The e-mountain bike (eMTB) is both lightweight and durable but not meant to be super powerful. It has just enough power to give you some support on hard climbs while still performing like a normal MTB.

This 40-lb bike responds to your every movement and offers exceptional comfort. Thanks to the accompanying app, you can adjust your exact position and suspension. You also get complete control of the steering with a 64.8-degree head angle for direct cornering.

While marked at 40 miles, the range can be unlimited if you turn off the motor — which is quite impressive. The only downside is the price, which totals nearly $14,000.

The FuelEXe is a top-of-the-range e-mountain bike that comes with an equally high-range price tag. As a result, it’s the ideal bike for dedicated professional athletes willing to invest in a high-performance electric mountain bike.

Trek Powerfly 4 Gen 4

While not a competition machine, the Trek Powerfly 4 has everything you need to tackle fun cross-country rides and explore state park footpaths and trails – all at a much more affordable price.

It’s ideal as a first electric mountain bike, thanks to its tried and tested components. But it still offers plenty of torque, and the 10-speed transmission with an 11-46t cassette will help you ride economically.

Canyon Spectral:ON

• Exceptional range for an eMTB
• Hardly looks like an electric bike
• 85NM of torque for steep climbs
• High-end suspension for ultimate comfort
• High-end price

Canyon has pulled out all the stops for its  Spectral:ON model, which comes with a lightweight reserve carbon form and a 900wh battery (or 720wh, depending on the frame size). Add to that an X2 rear shock and a Factory Float 36 front fork, and you have a great combination of power and comfort.

One of the best features is the extended range, which tops off at about 40 miles. That’s hard to beat when it comes to eMTBs! The style is also worth mentioning since Canyon was able to fit a large battery into a sleek frame so successfully that you can hardly tell this is an electric bike.

The Spectral:ON is a high-end bike, so it only makes sense that it comes with a high-end price tag. Just keep in mind that a bike of this caliber also requires regular maintenance to maintain its quality and performance.

The 2023 Canyon Spectral:ON is a new and improved model, and we’re huge fans of the range, power, and comfort. The $9,000 price might seem like a lot, but it’s worth it for the performance. We feel it’s one of the best you’ll find in 2024. 

Trek Rail 5 Gen 2

The Trek Rail 5 Gen 2 is a classic heavyweight trail shredding machine ideal for downhill or cross-country riding. It comes out slightly ahead of the Spectral:ON in terms of power, thanks to its Bosch Performance CX motor.

The range for this electric mountain bike is much lower at 29 miles, but you can push it to 40 or 50 if you only use it to climb back up those steep hills.

Best Fat-Tire E-Bike

• The powerful 750W motor and 75nm of torque help on steep hills
• The 440 lb payload capacity means this can haul a ton of cargo.
• The wide tires, 100mm of travel from the front fork, and comfort saddle provide a comfortable riding experience.
• The riding position is slightly leaned forward but not overly aggressive.
• Step-through model is available for riders with mobility concerns
• Diverse color options
• Lesser-known components may affect long-term maintenance
• Warranty coverage on battery and components is relatively short

Overview of the Velotric Nomad 1

The Velotric Nomad 1 is an awesome electric bike that’s perfect for riding around on any terrain, but it’s not just for rugged outdoorsy types. It’s actually really practical and great for commuting thanks to its sturdy frame, comfortable 100mm front suspension, and fenders. Plus, you can easily add a rack to carry your stuff. And get this – it can hold up to 440 lbs, so it’s great for all kinds of riders! The Nomad 1 receives our vote for the best fat-tire e-bike out there, and it’s perfect for urban adventurers.

Just be mindful of the speed limits, because it can go pretty fast when you change the settings and unlock an upper limit of 25mph! Now this does take it out of the Class 2 classification, but we are seeing that as an option with many electric bikes on the market these days.

The bottom line is that the Nomad 1 is one of our favorite fat-tire electric bikes because of the versatility it offers. Ride it on the city streets in Class 2 mode, then hop onto the trails for some gravely good times. You won’t miss a beat and you won’t empty your wallet because the Nomad 1 costs under $2,000. Good times shouldn’t cost too much.

Aventon Aventure

The Aventon Aventure is a favorite thanks to its versatility and affordable price. Like the Nomad 1, the Aventon Aventure isn’t ideal for intensive off-roading, but it works well for trail, beach, and urban riding.

It is right on par with the Nomad 1 as well when it comes to range and component quality. You’re looking at very similar electric bikes, so either one is a great pick for your all-road riding needs. The Nomad 1 is slightly lighter and to be honest, comes in better color options. Style isn’t everything, but when two e-bikes are tied in performance, it does act as the tie breaker.

Need More Fat-Tire E-Bike Options?

Best Electric Beach Cruiser

Townie Go! 7D Step-Thru

• Fun style and colors
• Lightweight frame
• Includes Shimano Tourney 7-speed system
• Easy-to-mount frame
• Doesn't come with accessories
• Low-capacity battery

An electric beach cruiser should be the definition of fun, free, and stylish — and that’s just what the Trek Townie Go! 7D is. This lightweight e-bike comes in at just 44 lbs and sports a casual style with the sweep-back handlebars, fun colors, and curved frame.

The performance is also impressive. This beach cruiser has just a 250W motor but can reach 20 mph and last up to 40 miles. That’s admirable for a bike that costs less than $2,000 — and perfect for fun cruises around town.

One drawback is the low-capacity 250Wh battery, but it fits the bike’s design and purpose, so we can’t complain too much! You’ll also have to purchase accessories like a rack and lights.

The Trek Townie Go! 7D is a fun and practical cruiser that offers an impressive performance, especially considering the low price. It has a low-capacity battery, but it’s more than enough to get you around town.

Nakto Santa Monica Fat Tire

With its timeless style, the Nakto Santa Monica Fat Tire won’t look out of place cruising beaches and roads alike. Thanks to the fat tires, this bike is also a comfortable ride on most terrains.

The 500W rear hub motor is more powerful than the one on the Trek Townie Go! 7D, but it only only reaches 19 mph and weighs much more (72 lbs).

Best Electric Bike for the City

Tenways CGO600 Pro

• Incredibly lightweight at 35.2 lbs
• Maintenance-free Gates Carbon CDX belt drive
• Impressive 52-mile range with efficient battery use
• Sleek and minimalist design that doesn't scream e-bike
• Ultra-smooth ride feel
• Not a powerhouse for steep hill climbs
• Focused on pedal-assist, may not suit those wanting more motor reliance

The Tenways CGO 600 Pro e-bike is seriously impressive when it comes to modern design, being one of the lightest e-bikes on the market. We found the aerospace aluminum frame to be sturdy and stiff like a steel-frame fixie, yet it’s sleek and lightweight. The Gates Carbon CDX belt drive promises a maintenance-free experience, which is invaluable when riding in mixed weather conditions.

With a clutched rear-hub motor and a torque sensor, you can expect a range of 52 miles. It’s perfect for city commuting, with an integrated headlight for visibility and safety, as well as full coverage fenders to keep the elements off of your clothes. The CGO600 Pro easily maneuvers through crowded streets, and is easily shouldered when encountering stairs thanks to its light weight of only 35.2 lbs.

Overall, the Tenways CGO 600 Pro is a fantastic choice for anyone looking for a light hassle-free city electric bike. The added perk is that Tenways doesn’t charge an arm and a leg for their e-bikes. It’s ideal for commuters who want an affordable, easy-to-maintain, lightweight, whisper-quiet ride. You won’t find a better e-bike for your city rides.

The Trek FX+ 2 and Tenways CGO600 Pro are priced similarly, but they differ in weight and range. The FX+ 2 weighs 40 lbs., which is 5 lbs. more than the CGO600 Pro. However, the CGO600 Pro can travel about 18 miles further per charge, than the FX+ 2. Even though there is a significant difference in range, the Trek FX+ 2 is still a good option for short commutes as it can cover up to 35 miles per charge.

Best Folding E-Bike

Gocycle G4i

• Ultra-lightweight
• Predictive automatic transmission
• Impressive 50-mile range
• Mid-suspension system under seatpost
• Rolls when folded
• Pedal assist only (no throttle)
• A little pricey

The 2021 Gocycle G4i came to impress with its streamlined appearance and lightweight materials. Even two years later, it stands as one of the best folding e-bikes.

The hydroformed aluminum fork, carbon frame, and magnesium rear — plus the battery — have a combined weight of less than 38 lbs. That makes it easy to fold and transport, even for the smallest rider. As an added bonus, the bike still rolls when folded, meaning you don’t have to pick it up and carry it everywhere.

Because this is a Class 1 e-bike, you don’t get any throttle. But the 500W motor is more than powerful enough to carry you and this lightweight bike at top speeds (20 mph). Keep in mind, though, that you will end up paying more for such an ultra-lightweight bike with a powerful motor.

The Gocycle is a powerful, utility-focused bike that provides just about everything you could want in a folding e-bike. However, these perks come with a slightly higher price tag.

Aventon Sinch.2

The Aventon Sinch.2  offers the two things the Gocycle G4i doesn’t: a much more affordable price and a throttle. The motor is comparable at 500W, and you can even upgrade the Aventon Sinch to a Class 3 bike if desired.

However, the bike weighs nearly twice as much which can make lifting and carrying a challenge. So, the decision really comes down to what you’re looking for in a folding e-bike .

Best E-Bike for Hunting

• Incredibly powerful 1,000W motor
• Solid frame and 4.5" tires
• 100-lb rear carrying rack
• Suitable for all terrains
• Top-tier hunting bike
• Extremely heavy weight
• Heavy use of throttle shortens battery life

The Quietkat Apex Pro packs the brute force to climb any inclines you encounter, even with your day’s catch on the back. The Apex Pro is among the most competitive hunting electric bikes out there, traveling almost silently and quickly across most terrains.

Its 4.5” fat tires grip sand, mud, and snow, while the 1,000W power of the Bafang motor can easily take you — and your gear — up most slopes. Another great element of the Apex Pro is the 100-lb payload capacity of the integrated rear rack. You can also add accessories like a trailer and front basket, extending your carry load.

Keep in mind, though, that the bike itself weighs about 70 lbs. Then add to that your own weight, plus your catch and gear. The 1,000W motor does its job, but it can quickly eat away at the batter and leave you with just a 20-mile range on the throttle.

The Quietkat Apex Pro is a beast of an e-bike, perfect for hunting and wilderness adventures. Just make sure to pack an extra battery, as it might not last for the duration of your trip.

QuietKat Ranger

The Quietkat Ranger is very similar to the Apex Pro model but with a slightly lower price. It comes with a 750W or 1000W motor, both offering quick acceleration uphill support. This version weighs about five pounds less than the Apex Pro and includes 4″-4.5″ tires, depending on the size.

While QuietKat claims the range is longer than the Apex Pro at 38 miles, that’s unrealistic on rough terrain. You can expect closer to 14-20 miles on backwood terrain.

Best Step-Through E-Bike

Trek Verve+ 3 Lowstep

• Mid-range price
• 50 Nm of torque
• Durable Bontrager E6 Hard-Case Lite tires
• Attractive frame shape and color options
• Realistic 40-mile range
• Might be nice to have a throttle at certain times

The Trek Verve+ 3 Lowstep is a great-looking, mid-priced electric bike that’s easy to ride both on city streets and countryside roads. Despite its 250W motor, this e-bike offers a very respectable 50 Nm of torque that will make climbing hills seem easy.

Relatively light and agile, this is a straightforward electric bike to ride. The 300-lb load capacity also means you can use the bike to carry your gear to work or complete the week’s grocery shopping.

Keep in mind that the Verve+ 3 Lowstep is a Class 1 bike, meaning it lacks a throttle and only reaches 20 mph. The motor should be enough to make up for the lack of throttle, but you might need to find a different model if you need a faster e-bike.

The Trek Verve+ 3 Lowstep is an affordable, easy-to-use e-bike that works for commuting and touring alike. Its versatility and powerful torque compensate for the lower maximum speed, making this a competitive low-step bike.

Lectric XP Step-Thru 3.0

We already ranked the Lectric XP Step-Thru 3.0 as the best fat-tire bike, but it’s worth mentioning again in the step-through category. While an all-around quality bike, it comes up just a tad short compared to the Trek Verve+ 3.

The style is a bit less streamlined, and you might need to put in a bit more maintenance with the chain and cassette pedal powertrain. However, we’re really splitting hairs here. The XP Step-Thru 3.0 has an impressive 500W motor and 65-mile range that make it a (very) close second choice.

Best E-Bike for Seniors

Rad Power RadCity 5 Plus

• Step-through frame for easy mounting
• 80 Nm of torque
• Option of using the throttle
• Large 27.5" wheels
• 20-mile range on throttle alone
• Fairly heavy

At just around $2,000, the RadCity 5 Plus is an affordable e-bike that will quickly have you making excuses to get out and ride. No doctor would argue with that!

The reason this is our top pick for seniors is that it has a step-through frame for easy mounting and dismounting, plus a powerful motor with 80 Nm of torque that can get you up those tricky hills. It also has a throttle for when you don’t want to pedal anymore. Just keep in mind that using only the throttle limits the range to about 20 miles.

Other attractive features include a rear rack to carry your groceries (up to 275 lbs of total cargo), as well as a sprung suspension fork and large wheels for comfort. The only major downside is the bike’s weight, totaling 64 lbs without cargo or rider. However, the battery and motor make up for their added weight, so you won’t notice any heaviness while riding.

The RadCity 5 Plus is both affordable and easy to ride, making any city or town ride easily manageable for senior riders. We think the weight is probably worth it for the power that the motor and battery deliver.

Rad Power RadTrike

For seniors with limited mobility, the RadTrike might be a better option. While it weighs much more than the RadCity 5 Plus (80 lbs total), it has three wheels for added support and a wide, comfortable saddle.

It only reaches 14 mph, but trikes usually aren’t built for speed. Instead, this e-bike offers an increased capacity of 400 lbs and the ability to fold down for storage.

Best E-Bike for Kids

• Fun, new way to teach kids to ride a bike
• Balance bike with a motor (no pedals)
• Anti-slip handles
• Adjustable height
• Speed might be a lot for a young child
• 50-minute use time

Forget training wheels. Pedal-free balance bikes are a fun way to teach kids to ride a bike — and now they’re available with a motor in models like the Hiboy BK1 . This mini e-bike is suitable for kids 2-6 (up to 77 lbs) and helps teach them independent riding. Plus, we can’t complain about the $400 price since non-motorized balance bikes can cost over $200.

The 100W battery is powerful — but not too powerful. Little riders can reach a maximum speed of 9 mph, so mom and dad, make sure you can keep up! With anti-slip handles and an adjustable seat, this e-bike is built to last for years and potentially multiple siblings.

The only thing to keep in mind is the short 6-mile range. This translates to about 50 minutes of use, which might not be long enough for your little speedster (or maybe it’s more than enough for you trying to keep up with them!).

The Hiboy BK1 is a sturdy motorized balance bike that gives just enough speed for kids to get a taste of what it’s like to ride a real motorbike. Just make sure you’re up to chasing them down at 9 mph!

The Woom Up 6 is an equally great bike for kids, but it’s more geared toward older kids (10-14) ready to get into mountain biking. This lightweight bike has a 250W motor with a 20-mile range, perfect for a first eMTB. You can even remove the Fazua Evation motor and batter to convert it into a traditional mountain bike.

What to Know Before You Buy

If you’re new to the e-bike scene, welcome! We get that it can feel a bit overwhelming with so many electric bikes for sale, and that’s why we’ve put together a quick buyer’s guide to help you  choose the best e-bike for you . Here are some critical points to consider: 

• Match your e-bike type to your intended use (e.g., commuting vs. off-roading)
• Calculate daily commute or trail mileage to choose a bike with adequate range

Brand Name Components

• Choose reputable brands for motors, batteries, and brakes
• Local e-bike shops can more easily service your bike
• Budget based on your intended use and preferences
• High-performance options are available at higher prices but are unnecessary for all – good e-bikes don’t have to cost a fortune

And last but not least, you need to consider the class of your e-bike. Due to the increasing popularity of e-bikes and growing questions such as, ‘Are e-bikes the same as traditional bikes?’ and ‘Can you ride them in the same places?’, there’s a need for regulation to help answer and align with these questions.

PeopleForBikes  helped develop a three-class system to categorize e-bikes based on their capabilities and features. Get this gist here:

Class 1 E-Bikes

Feature only a pedal assist system (PAS), without a throttle, and have a maximum speed limit of 20 mph

Class 2 E-Bikes

Similar to Class 1, but comes with a throttle in addition to PAS and also has a top speed of 20 mph

Class 3 E-Bikes

Include PAS and have a higher maximum speed, up to 28 mph

Other e-bikes that don’t fall under any class in the system

Of course, there’s a bit more to it. Discover more about  e-bike classes and U.S. laws  and regulations to determine which class is right for you and where you’ll be riding frequently.

Choose Your Perfect E-Bike

The electric bike market increasingly mirrors the wide range of traditional bikes available, from road and racing e-bikes to gravel, hybrid, and mountain e-bikes. So many options can make selecting the perfect e-bike challenging — but that’s why we made this guide to the best e-bikes of 2024.

Hopefully, the insights here have given you a better idea of your ideal electric bike. Remember to consider where and when you plan to ride, how often you intend to use the bike, and critical features like top speed, weight, and range before hitting the buy button.

Discover more of the types of e-bikes available and learn about their general benefits to your everyday life . For more guidance on finding the right e-bike, discover some of our additional reads to aid you in choosing the e-bike just for you.

We personally research and test every e-bike featured in our reviews and guides to provide accurate, data-driven recommendations. Learn how we review.

About Our Editorial Team

Meet Our Editorial Team

The best electric bikes for 2024: These e-bikes are perfect for sport and commutes

The best electric bike for commuting, trails and more

Whether you want to get fitter or find a cheaper, eco-friendly way to commute, an electric bike is a great investment. The electric assistance also allows beginners to go further but still reap the benefits of an outdoor ride. 

The Specialized Turbo Vado 4.0 is our best all-rounder, but don't discount the usefulness of a cheap folding bike, like the MiRider One if you're after a city commuter. For a full breakdown of what kind of bike is best for you, scroll to the bottom of this guide for our recommendations.

If you're looking for the best deal, we recommend keeping an eye on retailers like Dick's Sporting Goods in the US and Halfords in the UK.  

Matt Evans, Fitness & Wearables Editor

The best electric bikes are a great investment if you want a way to get around that’s cheap, easy and environmentally friendly. Known as e-bikes, the best electric bikes you can buy today come in all sorts of styles and sizes, which means it can be tricky to work out which you need. In this guide, we’ll help you pick the best electric bike for you.

Below you’ll find electric bikes built for rugged trail rides, as well as slimmer e-bikes ideal for gliding along the pavement in a city, and others that fold. You’ll find the best electric bikes to be more expensive than regular bikes because you’re not just paying for a cycle, but the cost of the motor and battery, too. So it’s best to consider one of the best e-bikes as an investment.

One benefit of the best electric bikes you might not have considered is they’re a less sweaty form of cycling, but they still help you build your cardio strength. They can assist your ride with a boost of power but can’t propel the bike completely for you. Having said that, you will find their power to be incredibly helpful if you’re cycling uphill. 

We’ve put all of the best electric bikes in this list to the test in all sorts of environments to help you choose the right one for you. If space is limited in your home or office, take a look at our guide to the best folding e-bikes . Or, if you’re looking to save, we created a list of the best cheap electric bikes for those on a budget.

The best electric bikes for 2024

Why you can trust TechRadar We spend hours testing every product or service we review, so you can be sure you’re buying the best. Find out more about how we test.

1. Specialized Turbo Vado 4.0 (2022)

Our expert review:

Specifications

Reasons to buy, reasons to avoid.

The Specialized Turbo Vado 4.0 has received a redesign for 2022 that's made it the best all-purpose e-bike you can buy today. Its high capacity battery means there's plenty of power to tap into, and results in an extremely impressive range of up to 90 miles with pedal assistance.

Power assistance is delivered smoothly, and controlled through the superb MasterMind ride computer that allows for real-time tuning of power levels, lets you receive over-the-air software updates so you don't have to take your bike to a service center, and can be locked and unlocked using a PIN.

The new Specialized Turbo Vado 4.0 has a robust, practical build that makes it ideal for everyday riding in almost all conditions, with a comfortable upright riding position that's well suited to navigating city traffic. Lights and fenders are fitted as standard, and there's a front suspension fork to soak up bumps and potholes.

It's not a cheap e-bike, and the generous battery means it's quite heavy. During our tests, we found it a little bit of a challenge to drag around when not in the saddle, but a joy to ride and supremely practical in just about all riding conditions. Highly recommended.

View our full Specialized Turbo Vado 4.0 (2022) review

2. MiRider One

A folding e-bike is the perfect solution for commuters – small enough to fit on a train or under a desk, with an added boost of power to ensure you reach your destination fresh and ready to work. The MiRider One strikes a brilliant balance here, and does so for a remarkably affordable price.

Despite its small size, it gives a smooth and comfortable ride thanks to its robust build and a rear shock absorber that absorbs any minor bumps on your route.

The motor has five levels of power assistance compared to the usual three, giving you plenty of control, with a boost button plus a throttle control to help you get away quickly at crossings and junctions. We found the extra power levels useful, with a reassuring amount of control whether you want a gentle boost or a more powerful assist. It charges from flat in just two hours, faster even than the Ribble Hybrid AL e at no. 5, and gives you a maximum range of 40 miles before it needs topping up.

When you're done, the MiRider One folds down in a matter of seconds ready to be stored in the included case. The best e-bike for commuters on a budget by a long stretch.

Read our full MiRider One review

3. Gocycle G4

The Gocycle G4 is an ideal premium electric bike option for commuters, and in our opinion, it's the best folding e-bike you can buy today if money is no object. Previous Gocycle bikes have impressed us with their smooth power assistance, and the G4's new motor is its best to date. The bike has a very respectable range too, running for up to 40 miles on a fast charge, and you can use Gocycle's well-designed smartphone app to tweak its performance to optimize power assistance and range.

The G4 folds easily for storage or carrying on public transport, but it feels reassuringly solid to ride. Gocycle has made clever use of different materials throughout the bike's build to keep weight down (it's 1kg lighter than the previous model) and ensure it's well balanced. All cables are internally routed, there's a chain guard to protect your clothing, and mudguards and lights are fitted as standard

The small wheels of a folding bike are inevitably less forgiving of potholes than full-size tires, but the small shock absorber under the seat helped soak up most of the bumps we encountered during everyday rides.

This is a premium e-bike, and has a price to match (if you need a more affordable option, the excellent MiRider One is well worth a look) but if it's going to be your main bicycle for regular riding, it's a justifiable investment.

Read our full Gocycle G4 review

4. Cowboy 4

If you're looking for an electric bike for city riding, the Cowboy 4 is impossible to ignore. 2020's Cowboy 3 was an impressive machine, but the new model pushes things even further with an even more refined experience and a choice of step-over and step-through frames.

One of the Cowboy 4's standout features is its simplicity. Even if you've never ridden an e-bike before, we found that the absence of gears, switches and other controls means we were riding effortlessly immediately, as it felt very intuitive. The motor kicks in automatically when you turn the pedal, adjusting the assistance depending on how much pressure you're applying.

Maintenance is simple too, thanks to the internal cabling and carbon belt drive system, which doesn't require oiling or tensioning like a chain. Lights and fenders are built in, and there's even a charging port to juice up your smartphone (which provides easy navigation with smart route suggestions via the Cowboy app).

Although it was initially only sold in Europe, the Cowboy 4 is now available in the US as well. The company received €71 million in Series C funding in January 2022, so it seems likely that it'll soon roll out in other countries as well.

Read our full Cowboy 4 review

5. Ribble Hybrid AL e

With its road-inspired design and super smooth ride, the Ribble Hybrid AL e is a great electric bike and the best hybrid on our list. Whether you're looking for something to take the sweat out of your daily commute, or a bike for long weekend rides, this electric hybrid could be just the ticket.

Electric bikes often aren't particularly stylish, and their chunky frame-mounted batteries are common targets for mean-spirited vandals, but the Ribble Hybrid AL e could easily pass as a conventional push-bike. Its drive system weighs a mere 3.5kg, making the bike surprisingly light (it weighs less than some electric scooters), and only a discreet power button and slightly thicker than usual downtube give it away.

It can be charged from flat in 3.5 hours, and gives you up to 60 miles of power-assisted riding over mixed terrain. There are three levels of assistance to choose from (though in our experience the highest is the most fun), and the Ebikemotion companion app provides you with turn-by-turn navigation and live stats on your ride.

If that's not enough, this is also one of the most affordable e-bikes available today. Highly recommended, and during our tests, it was simply hugely enjoyable to ride.

Read our full Ribble Hybrid AL e review

6. WAU Bike

The WAU Bike is an electric bike with remarkable range – able to travel up to an incredible 215 miles with an additional power pack attached, so you can forget range anxiety even on long leisure rides. That longevity also makes it a solid choice for commuters, meaning you only need to charge it up on the weekend.

The rear hub motor is smooth to pick up, whichever of the five pedal-assisted modes you choose, and you can easily switch between them when facing a hill or a flat. 

There’s also an eight-speed cassette on the rear, which provided just the right amount of adjustment during testing to prevent our legs free-spinning while travelling at high speeds.

There are also some carefully designed extras here, including an anti-tamper alarm, multi-function rear lights, and geo-fencing so the bike can't be ridden outside a certain area.

View our full WAU Bike review

7. Engwe M20

The Engwe M20 is a good-looking cafe racer-style bike with a bit of substance behind it. The dual-battery option (should you take it) allows you to get a serious amount of range out of a full charge, around 92 miles, making it perfect for all-day rides. The emerald-green-and-yellow combo is pretty, and it's all packaged into a very appealing price tag.

Unfortunately, it's not quite perfect. The disc brakes really ought to be hydraulic, and  the bike itself is very heavy at 35kg. It's not going to be one you're lugging upstairs and onto trains without quite a bit of physical strength. 

However, if you're willing to look past these small faults, you get a stylish four-star electric bike with great range at a very reasonable price.  

Read our full Engwe M20 review

8. Mycle Cargo

The Mycle Cargo is a big and beefy electric cargo bike with storage capacity on the rear and sides of the bike. Want to carry your shopping home regularly, or frequently moving equipment around? This bike is sure to fit the bill: it's excellent value for money, powerful and well-designed, with an intricate frame to distribute weight more effectively and a second battery to boost range.

It's not perfect, though: it's big, bulky and very heavy, extremely difficult to store and at 1.87 meters, it's not a recommended ride for first-timers.  The length and footrests that are attached to the rear sides of the bike can catch you out if you’re  slaloming through traffic. But, as a well-constructed cargo bike for a reasonable price, it's an excellent choice.

Read our full Mycle Cargo review here.

9. Ride1Up Prodigy XR

The Ride1Up Prodigy is a good value mid-drive e-bike that multiplies the power you put in with the pedals. No throttle here: even though the assistance is excellent and makes for a comfortable ride, it's still you doing all the work. The aim is to make your efforts become more powerful, and help you ride longer distances. 

It offers an upright riding position that’s comfortable, and the sophisticated torque sensor does a good job responding to input. The range is respectable, with heavy use of its 'turbo' mode offering, when tested, 26 miles on a single charge. 

There are better bikes out there, but mid-drives in this class tend to cost a lot more. It may be heavy at 25kgs, but when it comes to value for money, the Ride1Up punches well above its weight class. 

Read our full Ride1Up Prodigy XR review here

10. Specialized Levo SL Expert Carbon

The Specialized Levo SL Expert Carbon is one of the best lightweight eMTBs we've ever tried, with incredible specs courtesy of a powerful Specialized exclusive mid-drive motor, top components from the likes of Fox and SRAM, and very responsive handling. 

It's got a full day's worth of riding in a charge, providing you use it well and conservatively, with the motor supporting up to 20mph speeds, which is fine on trails, which this bike is made for. The wheel and suspension construction is excellent and will endure all the punishment you're going to throw at it.

This is an electric mountain bike that is lightweight, with great gearing and a premium drivetrain to support the battery and electric motor too. The design is striking, but practical and agile, easily comparable to the old Stumpjumper models.

Read our full Specialized Levo SL Expert Carbon eMTB review

How we test electric bikes

We've ridden a wide range of e-bikes, so even if two models have comparable specs, we'll be able to give you a full rundown of how they actually ride on the road. We always test electric bikes in real-world conditions so you know how each one will perform in day-to-day life, and put them through their paces on a range of terrains and gradients. 

We test each bike's full range of power settings, plus custom settings, and if the bike has a navigation system then we'll also use it to plot and ride several routes. We'll also compare the GPS tracking from the ride computer with the readings from a top-end sports watch, and if the bike has a mobile app, we'll let you know just how easy it is to install and use – plus any hidden surprises you should be aware of, like the need to pay a subscription fee to download maps. 

It's always a good idea to test-ride any bike yourself before committing to a purchase, but our aim is to give you the most complete picture of the experience possible first.

How to choose the best electric bike for you

First off, you need to take a look at what kind of electric bike is best for your needs... and your budget. If you're someone who's fed up of commuting by car or bus, and you're looking for a convenient, healthier, happier and cheaper way to travel to work, a folding e-bike like the MiRider One is ideal. 

Any road-worthy electric bike makes a good commuter, but bikes are expensive, and locking them up (even with one of our best bike locks ) can risk theft. Folding bikes can be taken into work to keep them safe or bundled onto trains to cut long commutes short. 

On the other hand, if you're looking for an electric bike to take on off-road, you'll want an electric mountain bike, or eMTB, like the Specialized Levo SL Expert Carbon. While standard road bikes are designed for economical travel on flat surfaces, eMTBs require extra juice to compensate for the increased resistance and thicker tires, as well as better suspension to handle jumps and rough rides. Because of these additional complexities in construction, eMTBs usually cost a premium, and there aren't many good budget options around beyond a conventional pedal-power MTB. 

However, if you're just looking to increase the distance, decrease the effort during your ride, or even work a side-job delivering food in the evenings, a road bike like the Specialized Turbo Vado 4.0 is a great investment. You can ride hard all weekend to remote spots or zip around town with ease. 

As well as budget and riding style, you'll need a battery to suit your needs. Check the distance you travel on a regular basis, and that will dictate the range you need. City-dwellers never going more than a few miles at a time can afford to sacrifice battery capacity, while people heading out on long rides will need to ensure a charge can last them during their adventures. 

Get daily insight, inspiration and deals in your inbox

Get the hottest deals available in your inbox plus news, reviews, opinion, analysis and more from the TechRadar team.

Matt is TechRadar's expert on all things fitness, wellness and wearable tech. A former staffer at Men's Health, he holds a Master's Degree in journalism from Cardiff and has written for brands like Runner's World, Women's Health, Men's Fitness, LiveScience and Fit&Well on everything fitness tech, exercise, nutrition and mental wellbeing.

Matt's a keen runner, ex-kickboxer, not averse to the odd yoga flow, and insists everyone should stretch every morning. When he’s not training or writing about health and fitness, he can be found reading doorstop-thick fantasy books with lots of fictional maps in them.

Honda's first eMTB has a portable charging station for more fun on the trails

Zwift’s first controllers turn your indoor cycling bike into a video game

Quordle today – hints and answers for Friday, April 12 (game #809)

Most Popular

By Barclay Ballard February 28, 2024

By Barclay Ballard February 27, 2024

By Krishi Chowdhary February 26, 2024

By Barclay Ballard February 26, 2024

By Barclay Ballard February 24, 2024

By Barclay Ballard February 23, 2024

By Barclay Ballard February 22, 2024

• 2 Kobo Libra Colour review: twice improved for better reading and writing
• 3 Tubi's free streaming is more popular than Max, Peacock and Paramount Plus – here are 5 great shows to start with
• 4 Android phones finally get their first AirTag-style trackers – here's how they work
• 5 Color me surprised: Kobo's finally beaten Kindle with its latest ereaders
• 2 Austrian Audio's The Composer headphones are crashing the high-end audio party
• 3 Windows 11’s next big update is here – these are the top 5 features introduced with Moment 5
• 4 I switched over from Windows to Mac, and these are my three favorite macOS features
• 5 Kobo Libra Colour review: twice improved for better reading and writing

Best Electric Bikes: Don’t Strain Yourself Enjoying the Outdoors or Your Commute

Get pedaling.

jonathon_klein

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Two wheels are my preferred method of travel but, sometimes, pedaling sucks. Yes, it’s good for your physical and mental health. That doesn’t mean I like being winded all the damn time. Thankfully, someone who’s just as indignant about pedaling came up with strapping electric motors to bicycles, and the electric bicycle was invented.  But since that initial bike, thousands have flooded the market from all corners of the globe. That makes selecting one incredibly difficult. At least it does if you don’t listen to the writers at The Drive . We’ve put together this awesome list of great electric bikes so you can skip the BS and get the right electric bike for you. Take a gander.

Ride1Up 700 Series

Relatively inexpensive

Works on both road and gravel

Great accessories

30-50 miles of range

Limited warranty

Limited color options

Schwinn 700c Bay Ridge Hybrid

Inexpensive

Pedal assist

Up to 20mph

Frame fit riders between 5’7” - 6’2” tall

Glitches reported

Smaller battery

Summary List

Best overall: ride1up 700 series, best budget: schwinn 700c bay ridge hybrid, best mountain bike: trek fuel exe 8 xt  , best two-wheel drive: ubco 2x2 special edition.

• Best Cruiser: Quietkat Lynx

Best Cargo: Lectric XPedition Dual-Battery Cargo eBike

Our methodology.

While riding bicycles isn’t my normal two-wheeled method of transportation, I have done a lot of it. I’ve ridden bicycles both in town, through major cities (Chicago and Los Angeles), and in the backcountry of Utah. I’ve done road bikes, mountain bikes, and all manner of electric bicycles over the years, which helped me narrow down the list you have here. 

I didn’t get to test every single bike, but did put miles on a few. I do reserve the right to change my mind, my answers, and this buying guide as more come into my possession or I get to test others. As always, everything is up for debate. 

Best Electric Bikes: Reviews & Recommendations 

Though Ride1Up isn’t the most well-known of bicycle manufacturers, the 700 Series from the brands claims our top spot for a variety of reasons. First of which, it’s well-built, reasonably affordable, and comes with solid range for the money, and a good group of accessories. 

Centered around a 750-watt hub motor, the 700 Series can hit speeds of up to 28 mph with pedal assist, or 20 mph with just the throttle. And it has between 30-50 miles of range, depending on the surface and type of riding you’re doing. Additionally, the frame is a lightweight aluminum alloy for increased strength, but lightness, and the brakes are Tektro Dual Piston 180mm Hydraulic units for great stopping power. 

My only issues with the Ride1Up are the limited 1-year warranty—I would’ve liked to have seen something backed a little longer given its price—and the lack of colorways. Only three are offered: gray, white, and blue. But other than that, it’s a perfect addition for nearly any rider.  

Schwinn’s been in the bicycling game for, what, over a century? And it shows. Though the brand’s been dethroned as the bicycling king by most newcomers and those who’ve pumped millions of dollars into R&D, Schwinn still has great offerings for most riders. And that includes this 700c Bay Ridge Hybrid electric bicycle.

Powered by a 250-watt motor, the bicycle can hit up to 20 mph using pedal assist, has multiple riding and assist modes to dial in your preferred action, and can fit riders that are between 5’7” and all the way up to lanky 6’2” folks like myself. The bike has a 7-speed transmission, a front suspension fork for better ride quality, and dual disc brakes front and rear for great stopping power. 

It’s also incredibly affordable, as at the time of writing, you can pick it up for just $698 from Walmart. That’s a helluva deal. 

Trek brand quality

Shimano XT 12-speed

360Wh removable battery

Not as high-powered as others

I’ve had Treks off and on throughout my life, starting from when I was eight years old. I’ve been a massive fan of the brand, but this Fuel EXe 8 XT looks to be the best of the bunch. 

Yes, it’s not the top-of-the-line e-mountain bike that Trek makes, but those are for crazy people. Not you and me. What we want is a mountain bike that we can rail on and not feel too bad when it gets dirty or we eat dirt ourselves. And that’s this bicycle. 

The Fuel EXe 8 XT is powered by a 360-watt removable battery and sent through Shimano’s XT 12-speed. Fox Shocks both front and rear keep you moving across whoops, through rhythm sections, and whatever mud you happen to cross without slowing you down. And you have Trek’s legendary quality backing everything. It’s the best of all worlds. 

There are just two small things I’d bring up, and those are price (it’s expensive, but not unreasonable for an e-mountain bike of this caliber) and that the pedal assist isn’t as powerful as others. But if you can overlook that, and pony up the cash, you’re golden. 

No pedaling needed

Large battery

Lots of cargo room

No pedals when run out of juice

Brakes could be slightly more robust

How do I describe the Ubco 2x2? Hysterical fun, that’s how. This is a two-wheel-drive electric bike built for adventuring. Designed to go literally anywhere, most folks who grab an Ubco use it for exploring the woods, adventuring into the backcountry, or hunting. But you can use it literally anywhere. 

The Special Edition I received to test came with a rear parcel bag, but also the integrated central pouch, too. There’s also a front rack to store whatever you want. I also especially like the integrated Peak Design phone mount, which keeps my phone stationary throughout whatever scrub brush I go through. And the 3.1kWh battery is good for up to 75 miles of range, at 30 miles per hour. More than enough for just about any use. 

There are two issues I’ve arrived at with the Ubco 2x2, and that’s that the rear brakes can wear somewhat under hard terrain and repeated use. Which is a pretty easy fix from Ubco, and just more even braking application from the user. As well as it doesn’t have pedals, which puts you SOL if you run out of juice. That said, it’s not designed to have pedals, so it’s up to you to plan. 

Best Cruiser: QuietKat Lynx

Comes pre-charged

Easy assembly

Comes with toolkit

Headlight could be more condensed

Design absolutely matters. Whether it’s sleek, boxy, utilitarian, or post-modern, everyone has their preferences for how their stuff looks. And QuietKat’s Lynx definitely has the looks of a high-end electric bicycle. 

The Lynx is QuietKat’s latest offering, as is more in line with a cafe style. A 1,000-watt hub motor can propel the Lynx either through pedal-assist or strictly driving the rear wheel, and can go up to 60 miles on one charge. Brakes are handled by 2-piston Gemma units front and rear, and assembly is incredibly easy as QuietKat provides all the tools you need in the box. That said, a ratchet and/or impact driver will make assembly that much easier and faster. 

Two colors are available from QuietKat (silver and black), and the Lynx also features a great rear parcel shelf that’ll help you attach whatever cargo you have. Other accessories include travel panniers, a cargo cooler, and even a single-wheel trailer. I will say that the one thing I think QuietKat could improve is the headlight design. Yes, it hides all the wires, but it could be more fluidly integrated and look less like a dinner plate around the headlight surround. 

Cargo space galore

Great range

Shipping damage can occur

Not everyone needs a fast AF mountain bike or pavement-decimating road racer. Sometimes, all you need is trunk space. Well, bikes don’t have trunks, but they can have cargo room and that’s where Lectric’s Xpedition Cargo bike shines. 

This e-bike has a truly massive rear cargo shelf that can be transformed in multiple ways in order to suit your needs. Do you need a bags for groceries? Lectric has you covered. Two seats for your twin toddlers? You got it. How about a single seat for your kid and parcel space? Done and done. There’s even a rack that can be attached to the front fork to increase your cargo space more!

The XPedition is powered by a 1,310-watt motor connected to either one or two 48V, 14Ah lithium batteries that give the bicycle a combined range of 150 miles. That’s good for just about any type of exploration or run to the grocery store. There are also five levels of pedal assist to dial in your preferred power, and the rear rack alone can hold up to 300 pounds of payload. An incredible feat. 

Our Verdict

You absolutely cannot beat the Ride1Up for ease of use, affordability, and range in terms of electric bicycles. It’s perfect for just about everyone. However, when your use case is somewhat different, i.e. mountain biking, hunting, etc., any of our other picks would be great in your garage. 

Things You Should Know Before Buying an Electric Bike

Here’s everything you need to know.

There are a number of different types of electric bicycles, including e-mountain bikes, e-commuting bikes, e-road bikes, and even e-cargo bikes. You’ll want to pick the right type of electric bicycle for your application, i.e. you don’t need an e-mountain bike if you live in a city, and likewise, you wouldn’t want an e-road bike if you lived on a mountain. Pick the right one for you.

Range will depend on what powerpack comes with your chosen electric bike, but most have between 20 and 60 miles of range per charge. 

Price ranges wildly. Some electric bicycles cost under $1,000, while others clip into the $20,000 range depending on all the features, construction, and motors that come with it. I tried to stick to a more affordable set with the guide above. 

You’ve got questions. The Drive has answers. 

Do you still have to pedal electric bikes?

Depends on the type of e-bike you get. For most of those on this list you have the option of pedaling. However, the Ubco doesn’t have pedals. 

Can you turn off an electric bicycle?

You can on some models, but not all of them. Some use passive motors and are only activated when you start pedaling, while others have on/off switches. 

What happens if you run out of power on your electric bicycle?

Start pedaling, my friend. Unless it’s the Ubco. 

To revisit this article, visit My Profile, then   View saved stories .

• Backchannel
• Newsletters
• WIRED Insider
• WIRED Consulting

Adrienne So

The 15 Best Electric Bikes for Every Kind of Ride

If you buy something using links in our stories, we may earn a commission. This helps support our journalism. Learn more . Please also consider subscribing to WIRED

Best for Most People Trek FX+ 2 Read more

Best Utility Bike Specialized Globe Haul ST Read more

Best Budget Bike Propella 9S Pro V2 Read more

Best Fun Cruiser Electra Loft Go! 7D EQ Read more

For years, electric bicycles were bulky, inconvenient, expensive machines with limited battery life. Slowly, that has changed. Ebikes are now lighter, more attractive, and more powerful than ever. You don't need to be physically fit to ride one. They get you outside, reduce traffic congestion, and shrink your carbon footprint. I ride one daily to take my kids to school . They're just fun.

Over the past few years, WIRED's Reviews team has tried almost every kind of electric bike, from the best heavy-duty cargo bikes to high-end mountain bikes. We're always testing new ones, so if you don't see what you want, check back later (or drop me a note!). Once you buy an ebike, check out our Best Bike Accessories , Best Bike Locks , and the Best Ebikes for Elderly Riders . Not into pedaling? Read our Best Escooters guide for other transport options.

Updated March 2024: We added the Propella 9S Pro V2, the Santa Cruz Skitch, the Heybike Tyson, the Cowboy Cruiser, and the NIU Electric Bike BQi-C3 Pro. We also updated links and prices.

Special offer for Gear readers: Get WIRED for just $5 ($25 off) . This includes unlimited access to WIRED.com , full Gear coverage, and subscriber-only newsletters. Subscriptions help fund the work we do every day.

Best for Most People

The prices on direct-to-consumer bikes are very appealing, but if you wouldn't send your kid down a hill on a skateboard with wobbly wheels, I wouldn't recommend doing the same yourself. If this is your first bike, I strongly suggest going with an established manufacturer that has a large support network of affiliated retailers and shops, so you can test a few and not have to assemble or fix it yourself. $2,000 is about what I'd expect to spend on a durable, good-quality entry-level electric bike.

Almost every major bike manufacturer now makes an entry-level commuter electric bicycle. Right now, the most reasonably priced one is the Trek FX+ 2 ( 8/10, WIRED Recommends ). It comes in two versions: a step-over and a step-through. (I'm currently riding the step-through.) At 40 pounds, it's pretty light! It rides a lot like the light, versatile hybrid I rode all through college. It has Trek's proprietary 250-watt hub motor, a 250-watt-hour battery, standard 9-speed Shimano shifters, fast road bike wheels, and hydraulic disc brakes, as well as a few fun extra built-ins, like integrated lights, a bell, a rear rack, fenders, and a kickstand. All in all, it's a shockingly affordable package for everything you need to start your 6-mile city commute.

★ Alternatives:  We have tried almost all the entry-level cruisers. Specialized makes one that's pricier but with a nicer low-maintenance internal gear hub and belt drive, and we like Cannondale's version as well. Momentum is owned by Giant, and the Voya E+ 3 ($2,000) is equally light and absolutely stunning in person. But its smart shift system may be a little confusing to those new to electric biking, and the base price doesn't include all the commuter extras.

Best Utility Bike

I have been waiting for a major bike manufacturer to release an affordable, reliable daily driver that can be a car substitute. Specialized's Globe Haul ST ( 9/10, WIRED Recommends ) is the company's first light cargo ebike and it's a winner. It fits a wide variety of heights. The powerful 700-watt motor relies on an IPX7-rated battery that has a remarkable range of well over the stated 60 miles. The display is intuitive and the pedaling feels natural. The compact 20-inch multi-terrain wheels are maneuverable and feel stable on roads, dirt, and gravel.

The proprietary accessories pull in partners like Fjallraven and are attractive and versatile. I just have two small qualms: There's no suspension, which can make a difference if you're carrying a lot of things and people; and there's no belt drive. However, Specialized uses quality components and has a large network of affiliated shops to get routine maintenance. This is the bike that everyone in my family—me, my husband, and my two kids—asks to ride whenever we leave the house.

★ Alternative: If you'd prefer a bike with bigger wheels and slightly more power, reviews editor Parker Hall recently tried the Aventon Aventure.2 ( 8/10, WIRED Recommends ) and loved it. It's a direct-to-consumer bike, but Hall says it's well-made and easy to assemble. He rode it all summer with a pair of panniers, but Aventon also comes with a wide array of proprietary accessories .

Best Budget Bike

I've been riding my current tester for only a week, but I still recommend this Propella as the best budget ebike for most people. It weighs 43.5 pounds, with an aluminum frame, and comes 85 percent assembled, so I can lift it out of the box and put it together without requiring a forklift and/or another person to help me out. (The company also suggests going to a shop if you don't feel comfortable.) It's a class 1 ebike , which means that it assists up to 20 mph and doesn't have a throttle, so you will have to pedal and shift through each of the nine gears. The display is tiny but bright and intuitive. It's easy to navigate while riding, with just a button on the top and the side to turn it on, and a simple thumb toggle to scroll through five assist levels. This is Propella's second version of this bike, which is now lighter and has a torque sensor so that the assistance feels even more natural. Propella also still makes its cheaper seven-speed . This is the best first bike for everyone who already likes bikes and just wants or needs a little boost to make it the last few miles home.

★ Alternative: Almost every manufacturer makes a light commuter ebike, and commerce director Martin Cizmar likes the Aventon Soltera.2 ($999) . It is a slightly more powerful class 2 ebike with a 350-watt motor and a new torque sensor. This is another good-looking, light and maneuverable ebike if you just want a little boost to keep up with your friends on the way home from the bar.

Best Fun Cruiser

Are you afraid of electric bikes, or bikes in general? Then the Electra Loft Go! ( 7/10, WIRED Review ) is a great place to start. Electra went with a Hyena ebike system, which is from a Taiwanese manufacturer that's becoming known for super lightweight motors and batteries. This Electra cruiser is almost 20 pounds lighter than the last Electra I tried, which makes it that much less likely it will crush me (a small woman) when I'm making a tight turn.

As a class 1 ebike, it can only assist up to 20 mph, but with curved leatherette handlebars and a comfy upright seating position, you won't want to go that much faster anyway. The 25-mile range isn't great, but this isn't a commuter bike. Instead, it's a light, simple, beautiful beach bike (it doesn't even have a screen display!) that's made for cruising around with your hair down and a canvas farmer's market bag tucked under your arm.

Julian Chokkattu

David Nield

Jeremy White

Brenda Stolyar

Best All-Around Bike

If you're an avid cyclist, you probably already know the n + 1 rule, where n = the number of bikes you already own and 1 is the number of bikes you should own (in other words: Buy another bike). If you or a loved one wants to break this addictive bike-buying cycle with one bike to rule them all, Specialized's Turbo Tero X ( 8/10, WIRED Recommends ) might just be the bike for you. Specialized revamped its iconic mountain bike to be an electric ride that can go anywhere and do anything, with a long, stable frame; big mullet-style wheels; customized full suspension; straight handlebars; and a bevy of necessary commuter accessories, like a bike bell, lights, fenders, and a rack.

On paper, the 250-watt motor and 730-watt-hour battery are not as powerful or long-lasting as you might expect. But Specialized's Mission Control app and 12-gear shifters let you precisely customize just how much assistance you need, factoring in things like how much battery you want to conserve and your target heart rate. The display even shows you that the battery is optimized when you pedal at a fit cyclist's 80-100 revolutions per minute (rpm), as opposed to a recreational 60 rpm. At almost 58 pounds, though, this bike is not lightweight. The $4,500 price packs a punch as well.

Best Bike for Road Racers

If you're a road cyclist who wants the lightest bike around so that you can commute 15 miles to work and pop through a park on your way home, the bike that you're looking for is the Santa Cruz Skitch ( 9/10, WIRED Recommends ). It has an extremely light carbon fiber frame, with an equally light but powerful Fazua 60 motor and a 430-watt-hour battery. It's a class 3 ebike and also the lightest electric bike I've ever tried. My tester came with all the fixings, including a dropper seat post and a very fancy SRAM button transmission that let me click through gears easily and seamlessly, with no exposed cabling. I cackled with glee as I tried to race a Dodge Challenger home in my neighborhood and swung through a cyclocross course.

Of course, it does cost $7,000, which puts a damper on your gleeful commuting—one does not simply leave a Ferrari parked and unattended in front of the 7-Eleven at midnight. But if you have a 10-mile commute and have access to a locked garage, this would be my pick.

★ Alternative: I love the Skitch, but if all you want is a lightweight commuter and to save a couple grand, you could probably go with the Specialized Turbo Vado SL ( 9/10, WIRED Recommends ) and be totally fine. It's made from aluminum instead of carbon fiber, it weighs a little more, and the motor is slightly less powerful. But you'd still have a pretty fun time.

Best Cargo Ebike

On a tandem bike, the person who sits in the front and steers is called the pilot, while the person in the back who only pedals is called the stoker. That's where Xtracycle's longtail ebike gets its name; not because the person sitting in the back has to do any work (it's an ebike!) but because the Stoker can accommodate two adults comfortably. The adult pilot can also carry a couple of wriggly kids, a week's worth of groceries, overnight camping gear, or bags of soil from the garden center. The rear footrests and expandable cargo nets that encase the back wheel come standard, then you can further trick out the bike with options like a padded rear set, handrails, panniers, or a front rack. That versatility makes it one of the better options for people who like to use their family ebike for way more than just school drop-offs.

Even fully weighed down to the 400-pound limit with two adults and their backpacks, the Stoker feels safe and stable, thanks to the 24-inch wheels that provide a low center of gravity and the powerful Shimano EP8 mid-drive motor that delivers tons of torque and up to 400 percent pedal assistance. The 630-Wh battery goes about 45 miles on a charge (or 60 miles if you ride conservatively), which is a week or two's worth of rides for most people. Just know that you'll need to be taller than 5'6" to comfortably pilot a Stoker. Shorter humans should check out the Xtracycle Swoop ($4,999) , which has the same motor and battery, and many of the same configuration options, but uses a step-through frame and smaller wheels. — Michael Calore

Best Affordable Cargo Bike

The first cargo bike from this leader in competitively priced, direct-to-consumer ebikes is a study in flexibility. Carting the kiddo to school? Add a back seat ($63) and a handrail ($122) to the long rear platform. Blissfully child-free? Install front and rear racks ($70, $159) to haul groceries and garden supplies. The easy-riding step-through frame fits pilots up to 6'3" tall. The Abound’s pedal assistance system uses a rear hub motor with a torque sensor, a design that adds a smooth and even boost based on how hard you’re cranking. In the lowest of the four assistance levels—the power-sipping yet capable Eco mode—you can eke out 50 miles on a charge. Your mileage drops if you load the bike up to its 440-pound capacity, liberally thumb the bar-mounted throttle, or blast around town in Turbo mode at the max speed of 20 mph. Even then, you’ll still get nearly 20 miles out of the 720-watt-hour battery. — Michael Calore

★ Alternative: I have also ridden and like the Lectric XPedition ($1,399) . It's the easiest cargo bike to assemble out of the box that I've experienced; fits a wide variety of riders; and comes with a huge array of proprietary accessories. The only bad part? It's so popular that it constantly goes in and out of stock.

Best Cargo Ebike for Families

The R & M Load used to be my top pick for a bakfiets, a Dutch-style front-box cargo bicycle. However, the Urban Arrow Family ( 8/10, WIRED Recommends ) is cheaper—not by a little—and offers many of the same features that attracted me to the Load, like comfort and maneuverability. It doesn't have suspension, though, so it's best for smoother streets.

I love the Enviolo continuously variable shifters, which allow you to downshift while the bike is at a standstill. Rather than wobbling and terrifying my children as I frantically downshift while pedaling, I can use walk assistance to push the bike to a convenient spot, downshift while standing still, and then pedal upward at the torque and power level of my choice. With this system, I've beaten people uphill who weren't riding cargo bikes. The Bosch Performance motor is currently out of stock, but be sure to check if the version with the more powerful Bosch Cargo Line motor is available.

★ Alternative: I feel obligated to point out here that the bike I use to tote around my own family (and cargo all over Portland ) is the Tern GSD S00 ( 8/10, WIRED Recommends ). The Bosch Cargo Line motor is powerful enough to speedily transport me and two kids to school and back every day, along with all of our backpacks, groceries, and gear, and it's small enough that it takes up only a reasonable amount of space in our garage. I first rode one with my daughter when she was 3, and we can still ride it now that she's 7.

Best Micro Ebike

The next big trend in electric bikes is micro-mobility, which refers to tiny personal vehicles. Tiny bikes are more affordable, easier to transport, and easier to store. And just like mini anything , really, they're completely irresistible.

So far, my favorite micro bike is the JackRabbit ( 7/10, WIRED Recommends ). It weighs an astonishingly light 23 pounds, is simple to assemble out of the box, and can fold down to save even more space. It doesn't have pedals, so you won't hit yourself in the chin with your knees; instead, you toggle a thumb throttle to accelerate. My only caveat is that the tiny battery and motor aren't very powerful. I'm only 115 pounds, and slamming on the throttle only gets me to about 10 mph. Also, the range is around 10 miles, which isn't much compared to our other picks.

The Best Folding Ebike

WIRED reviews editor Julian Chokkattu called the M-E1 “pretty darn close to perfection” in his review ( 9/10, WIRED Recommends ). Folding bikes are great for apartment dwellers, but they're usually tiny. Julian is 6'4" and looks like a happy clown when he valiantly pedals around on most of them.

The M-E1 is full-size and virtually indistinguishable from a non-folding bike. It has solid components from reliable manufacturers, like a Shimano mid-drive motor, a comfortable seat, Shimano hydraulic disc brakes, and all the bells and whistles—integrated lights, fenders, a removable battery, and an easy-to-read display. Most importantly, Julian says, he can ride it around without dying from embarrassment—always a plus.

A More Affordable Folding Bike

WIRED reviews editor Julian Chokkattu sees more Lectric bikes around New York City than he can count. That makes sense, since Lectric has some of the most affordable direct-to-consumer folding ebikes around. The latest update, the Lectric XP 3.0 ( 7/10, WIRED Recommends ), offers more of the same—nice suspension, a solid range, thick fat tires, and a whole suite of solid commuter accessories. It also now has hydraulic brakes, which is a remarkable spec at this price point.

However, it's still very heavy and awkward to fold. Chokkattu also says the charging port is difficult to access when the bike is folded up. More importantly, he's had some quality issues with Lectric bikes (this one had a leaky front tire). However, the price is right. If you live in an apartment where you don't need to carry your bike upstairs, this might be the right pick for you.

Note: Lectric recently issued a voluntary recall for Lectric XP 3.0 on units sold between November 1, 2022, and May 6, 2023. Affected models are the XP 3.0, the XP 3.0 Long-Range, the XP Step-Thru 3.0, and the XP Step-Thru 3.0 Long-Range. The front and rear mechanical disc brake calipers can fail, which can hurt the rider. If you own one of these models, stop riding immediately and click here to file a claim.

The Best Mountain Ebike

There is some tension over the presence of electric bikes on trails. Still, if you love the sport but are getting older, an e-MTB is the best way to keep doing what you love. WIRED reviewer Stephanie Pearson loved Canyon's Spectral:On CFR ( 9/10, WIRED Recommends ).

The Spectral:On CFR is a playful ride, with a larger 29-inch front wheel and a smaller 27.5-inch back wheel on a full-carbon frame with front and rear suspension. You can pick a 720- or a 900-watt-hour battery (the small frame size only comes with the 720); the 720-Wh battery has a quoted range of about 51 miles. Pearson had fast, powerful, and joyful 15- to 25-mile rides on singletrack that left the battery only half-empty. As always, be sure to test out a new electric mountain bike to make sure you know what it feels like before you try an electric assist on any terrain that is super gnarly. It's currently out of stock, but Canyon indicates that more will be coming soon.

★ Alternative: I am seriously considering buying the Trek Fuel EXe ($8.700) for myself. Trek's adaptive assistance is quiet and perfectly calibrated; the motor is quiet and the battery invisible. When I climbed, it just looked and felt like I was … a little bit more in shape than I actually am. It's the perfect bike if you don't want to buzz cross-country trails, but just need a little assistance to get to the top without falling down.

Best Tricycle

If balancing upright is your top priority , you might want to consider a tricycle. SixThreeZero's bike keeps you in a comfortable, upright position without having to balance on a leg to keep it upright. It has a 250-watt motor with 40 miles on a charge and a top speed of up to 15 mph when you use the throttle. A big rear basket fits a load of groceries or even your puppy. However, it does weigh over 70 pounds and is pretty bulky; you'll need a garage to store it. As our reviewer Stephanie Pearson says, three wheels can be almost as fun as two.

★ Alternative: WIRED reviewer Julian Chokkattu says the Lectric Trike ($1,499) ( 6/10, WIRED Review ) is not for anyone living in a walk-up. It's heavy and bulky, and even though it folds, it's difficult to manage. But if you have a garage, it's an affordable way for someone who can't handle a two-wheeler to get out on the road. Trikes have their own set of challenges, but the Lectric has great range, enough power, and strong brakes. Plus it comes with racks, and even a support seat.

Honorable Mentions

We've tried a lot of bikes over the past few years. Here are the ones that didn't get their own spot above but deserve a mention:

• Heybike Tyson for $1,700 : You get a lot of stuff for not very much money with this fat-tire, folding ebike ( 6/10, WIRED Review ), including suspension, blinkers, a throttle, and one of the most obnoxious horns I've ever heard. The components are not super-high-quality, but it's an affordable, comfortable way to dip your toes into ebike waters.
• Cowboy Cruiser for $2,999 : We liked the all-in-one, sleek Cowboy bike when we first tested it. Reviewer Chris Haslam currently has the latest iteration. He finds it heavy and worries that it might be easy to steal. But it's incredibly comfortable and can get you where you're going, as long as you're not in a hurry.
• Wing Freedom X for $1,298 : My colleague Matt Jancer says the Wing Freedom X ( 7/10, WIRED Recommends ) is a light, powerful, and very affordable commuter bike.
• The Gocycle G4I+ for $6,999 : Gocycle's high-end, fast-folding luxury bikes are designed by a former McLaren engineer. This quieter, lighter iteration has better torque, a new carbon-fiber front fork, and an even more painful price.
• The Bunch Original Electric Cargo Bike for $4,965 : I didn't care for the Bunch, but my family did . It's a standard if slightly expensive, box bike as you might see in Europe. It'll work well if you live in a flat area and don't have to go very fast.
• Brompton Electric Folding Bike for $3,420 : The Brompton is the most compact folding bike on the market ( 6/10, WIRED Review ), with a clever, detachable, front-mounted battery system that makes it perfect for flying. The drivetrain is designed by a Formula One racing team, but it's not as powerful or as comfortable to ride as our other picks. (You can, however, shred a 70-mile gravel ride without a motor if you like.)

Electric Bikes We Dislike

We love to try new bikes. Unfortunately, the bikes don't always like us.

• Niu Electric Bike BQi-C3 Pro for $2,199 : Commerce director Martin Cizmar tested this bike and had a litany of complaints. The riding position is too aggressive, and the bike frame doesn't fit common components like a water bottle and his pannier. The disc brakes weren't suited to stopping it from 28 mph.
• The Civilized Cycle ($4,999) : This bike can carry a full-grown person on the back and is a good option for people who want a Vespa-like style without having to get a scooter license ( 7/10, WIRED Review ). However, it doesn't fit anyone shorter than 5' 10". Ooohkay .
• The Harley Serial 1 ($5,599) : Our reviewer Matt Jancer said the Serial 1 was “ just adequate ” and didn't justify the price.
• The Retrospec Jax Rev ($1,100) : We wanted to love this sleek, stylish folding bike , but we couldn't help worrying about its durability.

It Costs What Now? 

Whenever I talk to anyone about a possible ebike purchase, the biggest deterrent is usually the price. We're currently working on a guide to more affordable ebikes, but we think of them as vehicles, not toys. When you're carrying kids to school or flying down a hill at 25 mph with only a helmet for protection, you don't want to skimp on brakes.

Reasonable auto financing options are the only reason a $2,000 electric bike can feel prohibitively expensive while a $6,000 beater gas-powered car has easy monthly payments. Many states now offer incentive programs that offer rebates or tax credits for ebike purchases. Some bike manufacturers and retailers offer financing through companies like Affirm or PayPal. Your bank might cover ebikes under its vehicle loan program, and I also recommend looking at eBay locally , Craigslist, or local Facebook groups. You probably have more options than you think.

Advice to Consider

You've seen the bikes around your neighborhood. They look like so much fun! You want one! But ebikes have so many different specs and price points. Here's what I would consider, in your position.

Can I build my own bike?

Many affordable bikes now come direct-to-consumer—meaning that they are pre-tuned or partially assembled in a box. As Peter Flax recently noted in Bicycling magazine, these bikes do not get nearly the testing or vetting that bikes from a bigger manufacturer get. Unless you're not riding much or for many miles, or are experienced with modifying your own bike, I recommend working with an established manufacturer that has a dealer network. I also do not recommend a smart ebike. As we can see with VanMoof's recent implosion , you may have difficulty getting your smart ebike repaired if the company folds.

Why do some bikes cost more?

They have higher-end components. Batteries and motors from high-end brands like Bosch and Shimano often are more powerful and cover more distance, with a 90- or 120-mile range, as compared to the 15-20 mile ranges you'll see on more affordable bikes. However, this may not matter if you have a short commute.

What terrain do you live on?

If you live in a flat area, you're probably fine with a 250-watt motor, which is the European speed standard. However, if you live near hills or haul a lot of stuff, you might want to consider a 500-watt or 750-watt motor and a few extras, like hydraulic disc brakes , which will help prevent you from skidding into traffic.

I would also look for a mid-drive motor instead of a hub-drive motor. Mid-drive motors are located in the center of your bike and feel more natural. A hub drive is on your rear axle and shifts your center of gravity backward, which takes some getting used to. It can throw you off balance when you're going up steep hills.

Follow some basic safety tips.

Not sure where to start? The biking advocacy group PeopleForBikes recently released their safety education program, E-Bike Smart , which they created in collaboration with the League of American Bicyclists and Bicycle Colorado. Do not leave your bike battery charging overnight, and do not let your children ride your bike unsupervised. An 80-pound child should not be piloting a 65-pound bike, even if the motor makes it possible for them to do so.

Ebike Classifications and Rules

Before you buy your electric bike, make sure you can actually use it! Many cities and states have laws regulating when and where you can ride an ebike. Check out our guide on the three classes of ebikes . At least 22 states now use this three-class system , and they may restrict when and where different classes of ebikes are used, depending on whether they have a throttle or can assist above 20 mph. Cities may also have laws about whether mountain ebikes are allowed on single-track trails.

If your state classifies ebikes under the same laws governing motorcycles and mopeds, you may need a license to ride one. And no matter what, always wear a helmet . You know that.

Scott Gilbertson

Nena Farrell

Martin Cizmar

WIRED COUPONS

Save up to $58 Off TurboTax Online

$50 off in-person tax prep when you switch from TurboTax or another tax provider | H&R Block coupon

$25 off your first 3 orders with Exclusive Instacart Promo Code

1st Order: 25% Off DoorDash Promo Code ($15 minimum)

Get $15 Off $75+ using Afterpay - Finish Line Promo Code

Groupon coupon: Extra 25% off sitewide

15 Best Electric Bikes, Tested for Every Type of Rider

Including mountain, step-through and folding e-bikes.

We've been independently researching and testing products for over 120 years. If you buy through our links, we may earn a commission. Learn more about our review process.

But with the multitude of options available in online bicycle stores , finding the right e-bike for your lifestyle can be overwhelming. That's why we've curated this list of the best electric bikes of 2023 .

Our top picks:

Best Overall Electric Bike

Best Value Electric Bike

Lectric xp lite.

Best Electric Bike for the City

Priority bicycles current e-bike.

Best Electric Beach Cruiser

Sixthreezero evryjourney new 500w.

Best Electric Mountain Bike

Aventon aventure.

Most Comfortable Electric Bike

Electra townie go 7d step-thru.

Best Lightweight Electric Bike

Gt egrade current 700c e-bike.

Best Foldable Electric Bike

Gocycle g4 matte black.

Best Medium Cargo Electric Bike

Rad power radcity 5 plus.

Best Step-Through Electric Bike

Charge comfort electric bike.

At the Good Housekeeping Institute , our analysts, engineers and experts thoroughly test all kinds of workout equipment , including under-desk ellipticals and exercise bikes . In our recent evaluation of e-bikes, we rigorously tested nearly two dozen models , assessing their performance, ride quality, safety and stability, ease of use and comfort. While electric bikes can be a significant investment, we have included options at every price point from reputable brands that also get positive feedback from online reviewers.

"Pedal-assist e-bikes are remarkable and practical machines that offer unmatched flexibility, allowing you to adjust to the desired level of fitness or efficiency required in any given situation," says GH Institute Chief Technologist Rachel Rothman , who oversaw our testing process. As you explore our recommendations, please remember that wearing a bike helmet (like the ABUS helmet that received positive feedback from our testers) is essential for cycling safety, especially since some e-bikes can reach top speeds of up to 28 mph.

At the end of this guide, you'll find more information on our testing process for electric bikes, along with helpful tips for shopping and a comprehensive breakdown of the different types of e-bikes.

Over the years, we have extensively tested various models of VanMoof electric bikes and consistently find ourselves drawn back to the brand. While our previous best overall pick, VanMoof's X3 , is now permanently sold out, we feel confident that the newer A5 model is just as impressive. Although it comes with a higher price tag, this e-bike is packed with cutting-edge tech features designed to enhance your riding experience, whether you're navigating city streets or exploring off-road trails.

One standout feature is the handlebars, which are equipped with an LED display that conveniently shows battery life and speed at eye-level, allowing you to keep your focus on the road — a safety detail that we deeply appreciate. Moreover, the VanMoof app enables you to charge your smartphone and track your riding stats. For iPhone users, the bike can be located using Apple's Find My network, adding an extra layer of security.

The bike's user-friendly and security-conscious design choices don't end there, either. A kick lock system allows you to effortlessly secure your bike with a tap of your toe. We're also impressed by the integrated security system, which includes an alarm and an automatic bike shut-off function, deterring theft attempts. Additionally, VanMoof offers optional accessories such as front and rear racks for optimal storage (although it's worth noting that some of the other bikes on our list already include these storage solutions at no additional cost). With its low-maintenance design, this high-tech e-bike is an investment, but one that can potentially save you significant money on repairs in the long run.

Battery: 463 Wh | Motor: 250 W | Top speed: 20 mph | Maximum estimated range: 34 to 87 miles | Weight: 48.5 lbs.

The Lectric XP Lite stands out as one of the most affordable electric bikes on the market — nearly half the cost of most e-bikes — and its performance did not disappoint, either. "The Lectric offers relatively smooth transitions, comfortable handlebars and an overall pleasant ride," says Rothman. Our testers appreciated features like its large, clear display, a removable 48V lithium ion battery, five levels of pedal assist and a throttle for those moments when an extra boost is needed. But we especially loved its compactness, as it can easily fold up to a smaller size, making storage in crowded garages or small apartments a breeze .

That said, some of our staffers thought the Lectric did not provide the same level of seamless performance and stability as some of the other e-bikes we tested. "The bike exhibited jerky acceleration when using the throttle, and the single gear setup resulted in awkward transitions between the powerful electronic component and manual pedaling," says GH Lab Assistant Nikolas Greenwald .

Although we would have preferred the inclusion of gear shifting, we think this versatile bike is user-friendly, convenient and suitable for riders of varying heights. If you're looking for an e-bike that offers a budget-friendly price point and a solid riding experience, the Lectric XP Lite is a worthy choice.

Battery: 375 Wh | Motor: 720 W | Top speed: 20 mph | Maximum estimated range: 40 miles | Weight: 46 lbs.

Available in two styles, three sizes and two colors, Priority's Current e-bike is a no-frills option that is straightforward to operate according to our testers, but it lacks some of the flashy features found in other bikes within the same price range.

That said, our staffers who recently took this model out for a spin gave it a perfect score for its performance on smooth surfaces like pavement; it also earned high scores for tackling hills. Testers reported that it was easy to shift gears and make turns , and that the bell was clear and loud — an important feature when riding amidst city traffic alongside cars, motorcycles, trucks and pedestrians.

While our testers felt secure and stable riding the bike, they did say that they found it to be somewhat cumbersome to transport. Although it's one of the lighter models in our list, one tester did find that "The bike is a bit heavy when carrying it up and down the stairs to the front door of my building." They appreciated the front and rear lights for urban cycling and the smooth pedal assist. "This bike has more subtle levels of pedal assist, which I find great, especially for city riding where you don't want the bike to suddenly surge forward or when you want to fine-tune the assistance level based on different situations in the bike lane," commented the same tester.

Battery: 500 Wh | Motor: 500 W | Top speed: 28 mph | Maximum estimated range: 20 to 50 miles | Weight: Varies by size

If you're looking for a beach cruiser that offers easy accessibility, the EVRYjourney e-cruiser is not only stylish but also incredibly user-friendly . "I would recommend this bike to anyone living by the water," says GH analyst Emma Seymour . "It's so gorgeous and felt easy to ride with or without the electric features." She applauds the bike for its intuitive features and comfortable seat, noting that it provided a game-changing experience by alleviating the usual sore butt she experiences after biking.

While some testers mentioned that the bike felt slightly bulky, making sharp turns more challenging, the majority of riders found their journeys to be smooth and enjoyable. In terms of the cruiser's brakes, GH editor Jacqueline Saguin points out that "you need to apply a bit more pressure on the brake controls to slow down or stop." She suggests using the bike for lighter adventures in calm parks or along beach boardwalks rather than busy roads. Similarly, Rothman discovered that the cruiser performed best on flat surfaces, noting that she felt "the acceleration was jerky and overly responsive." Nevertheless, the cruiser remains a low-maintenance and beginner-friendly e-bike. "It has an aesthetically pleasing design with its pastel colors, faux-leather details and vintage-inspired shape," says Saguin. "The wide, cushy seat provided exceptional comfort while riding, and I didn't feel the need to hunch over the handlebars."

Battery: 500 Wh | Motor: 500 W | Top speed: 28 mph | Maximum estimated range: 20 to 40 miles | Weight: 64.8 lbs.

Looking for a powerful e-bike that can conquer rugged roads, rain or shine? Look no further than the Aventon Aventure. Whether you reside in a bustling city or a rural area, this e-bike is designed to handle it all. With its 4-inch fat tire wheels, this bike effortlessly cruised over potholes, gravel and uneven terrain in our tests . That's because it's equipped with a suspension fork that helps absorb some of the shock when encountering road imperfections. "It provided the sensation of a motorcycle while embodying the true essence of a bicycle," said one tester. "The throttle kick-up was amazing, and I felt secure while riding."

Although most testers acknowledged that the bike felt heavy and would be challenging to use if the battery died, they still recommend it. "The ride was remarkably smooth and comfortable, and the bike exhibited exceptional stability," shared one tester. Just keep in mind that the Aventure requires ample storage space and may not easily fit into tight corners. However, its removable battery does make charging more convenient.

Battery: 720 Wh | Motor: 750 W | Top speed: 28 mph | Maximum estimated range: 45 miles | Weight: 73 lbs.

Available in five vibrant colors and boasting a charming, classic design, this e-bike is perfect for cruising around town . Our testers were delighted by how easy it was to mount the bike, and the wide, supportive seat cushion provided exceptional comfort. While we initially desired a more elaborate display, we soon came to appreciate the bike's simplicity. We found the small controller attached to the handlebar provided all the information we needed, such as battery life and pedal assist level.

"Although it had fewer pedal assist settings than others, the assistance was still extremely helpful," shares GH Test Engineer Alec Scherma . "I found the bike was user-friendly — just a simple press of a button for more pedal assist. Shifting gears was also pretty easy." Every aspect of the Townie Go! felt instinctive, and our experts regarded this modestly priced e-bike as an excellent choice for beginners or anyone seeking a straightforward and comfortable ride.

Battery: 250 Wh | Motor: 250 W | Top speed: 20 mph | Maximum estimated range: 16 to 40 miles | Weight: 44 lbs.

For dedicated cyclists seeking a high-quality, no-frills e-bike, we think the GT Grade Current is an excellent option. With its classic appearance and impressively lightweight design, it offers a delightful riding experience (even though it lacks a throttle). While adjusting the pedal assist levels may not be as intuitive as other models, it becomes second nature once you become accustomed to switching between the green, orange and red-colored assist levels using a button on the frame.

"I'm generally not a fan of e-bikes, particularly the ones that immediately accelerate as soon as you start pedaling or have a throttle that doesn't require any pedaling at all," shares one tester, who commutes 20 miles daily via bike to the office. "This bike felt like an e-bike for cyclists. It's remarkably lightweight and the motor seamlessly kicked in only when I needed it going uphill. If I were in the market for an e-bike, I would seriously consider something like this, which doesn't interfere with the cycling experience itself and just makes some of the tougher climbs a bit easier."

While the GT Grade Current may not have the most extensive range of features on the market, it resonated with most of our testers as a quality choice for those seeking an e-bike that stays true to its traditional nature without adding unnecessary weight. Plus, if you're looking for the e-bike with the most range, you can almost double the GT's estimated range of 45 miles by purchasing a 208 wH water bottle battery range extender that plugs into the charging port.

Battery: 250 Wh | Motor: 250 W | Top speed: 20 mph | Maximum estimated range: 45 miles | Weight: 33 lbs.

The Gocycle G4 is a sleek option for those that prefer a foldable design. Testers were impressed with the bike's responsive pedal assist, which they found smoothly kicked in when pedaling harder without any sudden jolts forward. While you have to adjust the pedal assist through the Gocycle app before riding, we didn't really mind that you can't adjust the settings on the bike itself — especially considering the unexpectedly powerful throttle that provided assistance when we didn't want to pedal.

“I really liked how fast and compact this bike was," says Greenwald."Despite the unconventional sizing with its low-step frame and small wheels, the bike felt lightweight enough for commuting, whether taking it on a train or packing it into a car." The quick three-hour charging time is another plus for commuters, along with the bike's easy folding and unfolding mechanism . Some of our taller testers did note that the maximum seat height still felt relatively low, while one mentioned that reaching the brake handles was a bit challenging and led to fatigue over time. However, despite these minor drawbacks, our rides on the G4 were smooth, fast and enjoyable overall, even with the bike's smaller wheels.

Battery: 300 Wh | Motor: 500 W | Top speed: 20 mph | Maximum estimated range: 40 miles | Weight: 38.8 lbs.

Rad Power bikes are known for their powerful motors, attractive designs, affordable prices and customizable options . While the RadCity model may not be as budget-friendly as the brand's RadRunner 2 or offer the same rear weight capacity (120 pounds) as the larger cargo RadWagon , it serves as a great middle ground. It's ideal for those seeking a fast bike for transportation or carrying a few items weighing up to 60 pounds. Unlike the RadRunner, the RadCity offers seven gearing options, a choice between a step-through or high-step frame, an upgraded motor and brakes and slightly more range.

Once our testers got going, they found their rides on the RadCity to be smooth and secure. "I liked how easy it was to accelerate and use the pedal assist," says GH analyst Jamie Spain . "The acceleration was really nice because I was able to move around without pedaling at all." However, she also notes that she avoided cycling without the pedal assist, because the bike felt unsteady when not moving fast enough. As a result, she says she wouldn't feel comfortable taking a child on it and recommends the RadCity for bigger, taller or more experienced riders.

Overall, we appreciated the responsive brakes, fenders that kept mud and dirt off their backs and the integrated lights for nighttime rides. However, we would prefer a single central display like the one found on the RadWagon, as the secondary pedal assist display can be difficult to see in bright sunlight.

Battery: 589 to 672 Wh | Motor: 750 W | Top speed: 20 mph | Maximum estimated range: 28 to 50 miles | Weight: 65 lbs.

The Comfort Bike lives up to its name by providing a fast, comfortable and stylish riding experience . While the battery located above the rear wheel is large, it is removable which allows for convenient charging. It's also accompanied by a rack that provides a useful space for transporting items like backpacks or purses. This e-bike also features a small attached display that indicates one of five pedal assist levels and shows the remaining battery power.

In terms of design, the Comfort Bike is visually appealing, and we appreciated the inclusion of fenders to keep riders drier on rainy days. The integrated front and rear lights add an extra layer of safety for riding during darker hours. While the bike is easy to mount and get started using the thumb throttle, we think a seat handle for easy height adjustment would be a convenient addition.

Battery: 418 Wh | Motor: 250 W | Top speed: 20 mph | Maximum estimated range: 50 miles | Weight: 51 lbs.

Brompton Electric C Line

The Brompton e-bike stands out among the options we tested, not only because of its electric orange color but also because of its unique design.

Unlike other e-bikes, the Brompton features smaller wheels and a removable battery pack bag that can be easily detached with a simple click . It's also foldable, making it an ideal choice for urban dwellers who have shorter commutes. One of our testers, who is a long-time Brompton owner, was impressed by this bike's acceleration, stating that the three levels of pedal assist offer flexibility for various riding conditions. "The kick was very impressive without being startling, as is often the case on assisted bikes," the tester observed. "It was especially noticeable when starting and hills graded up."Another tester noted that the brakes were more responsive than expected but found the bike slightly clunkier and heavier compared to standard Bromptons, which could be a drawback when quickly entering and exiting buildings.

We also observed that the battery pack's placement reduces the available storage space on the bike, requiring commuters to carry their backpacks on their backs. Some testers found the bike less comfortable and stable compared to other e-bikes, but overall, we appreciated the adjustable seat height, accommodating a wide range of riders. While the Brompton may not be suitable for extremely rough terrains or slippery conditions, we think it's worth the investment for those seeking a compact and foldable e-bike.

Battery: 300 Wh | Motor: 250 W | Top speed: 15.5 mph | Maximum estimated range: 20 to 45 miles | Weight: 38.4 lbs.

Propella 7S

If you're in need of a reliable and nimble road bike for short commutes , the Propella 7S is a fantastic lightweight option that offers great value for your money. While the standard frame may pose some challenges for petite riders when mounting the bike, once you're on it, you'll experience a sense of speed and easy maneuverability. The bike is also equipped with an easy-to-read display, which testers said enhanced their riding experience.

"I would recommend it for inner-city rides because of the quick acceleration," says one tester, who praised the bike's agility but also mentioned an incident where they nearly lost control on an all-terrain section of their ride. "The bike's tires are very thin, which helped with speed but made it unstable on anything other than perfectly flat surfaces."

Nevertheless, if your main goal is to get around quickly and you plan to do so on paved roads, this is a reliable road bike that will provide the assistance you need. Another noteworthy feature is the removable battery that weighs just 3.5 pounds, which makes the Propella 7S one of the lightest e-bikes we tested when the battery is detached.

Battery: 250 Wh | Motor: 400 W | Top speed: 19 mph | Maximum estimated range: 20 to 40 miles | Weight: 37 lbs.

The Flyer L885 is an impressive longtail e-bike that commands attention with its sleek design, despite its large size. With a remarkable weight capacity of 400 pounds, this bike can effortlessly transport up to 150 pounds on the rear rack alone, making it an ideal choice for carrying children or heavy groceries . We were particularly delighted by the rear rack's compatibility with various accessories, including versatile kid and cargo carrier baskets or a Thule Yepp child seat .

While our testers found the dual-leg kickstand cumbersome to use (it required lifting the bike to put it down), and noted that the bike is a bit more challenging to maneuver compared to lighter e-bikes, we still valued the integrated lights, twist throttle and small display. "The pedal assist was super easy to use and provided a substantial boost," says Scherma. "The bike's large wheels contributed to a stable ride, and adjusting the gears, throttle and pedal assist settings was easy."

While the Flyer has an impressive estimated range for a bike of its size, keep in mind that charging times are longer, taking up to 10 hours according to the manufacturer. Nonetheless, if you're seeking a robust e-bike with substantial carrying capacity and a stable ride, we think the Flyer L885 is a standout option.

Battery: 720 Wh | Motor: 500 W | Top speed: 20 mph | Maximum estimated range: 30 to 50+ miles | Weight: 73 lbs.

Denago City Model 1 Step-Thru

Reaching over 25 mph in our tests, the Denago e-bike is a thrilling ride that certainly doesn't lack in speed . Equipped with sensitive controls and a responsive pedal assist, this bike propels you forward with the slightest touch, rendering the throttle almost unnecessary. While speed enthusiasts will revel in the Denago's performance, we recommend it for more experienced bikers.

"You can really feel the speed on this bike, which can be both exhilarating and challenging," remarks Saguin. "At times, I reached 20 mph in a quick jump. Just a single pedal stroke can launch you forward." Despite its rapid acceleration, our testers found the Denago easy to maneuver in crowded areas, both while riding and while dismounted. They also praised its comfortable braking system. "It felt exceptionally smooth on pavement and navigated easily around other cyclists," adds Saguin. "While the speed controls were sensitive, I found the brake control to be excellent."

Additionally, we appreciated the large and easily readable display on the e-bike, as well as the quick adjustability of the seat height.

Battery: 652.8 Wh | Motor: 500 W | Top speed: 28 mph | Maximum estimated range: 20 to 45 miles | Weight: 53 lbs.

Cannondale Treadwell Neo 2 Remixte

While the Cannondale's design and number of color options could be more enticing, this e-bike stood out as one of the least intimidating models we tested.

It has a "comfy, ergonomic design," as noted by Rothman, who had no trouble riding the bike even after its battery died. Testers also appreciated the familiar Cannondale feel and control when it came to turning and overall traction. In fact, this e-bike resembles a conventional bicycle more than an e-bike, particularly with its built-in battery, offering a sense of security, reliability and comfort on the road.

One tester did mention that the controls were less intuitive to operate compared to other e-bikes, saying that they were "almost too vague to understand." (The display consists of only three buttons, and the pedal assist level is indicated by color.) However, overall, our testers found the Cannondale to be an accessible, no-frills e-bike that's an ideal choice for someone seeking a trustworthy brand without the need for aggressive pedal assist or a throttle — just the occasional extra push when required.

Battery: 250 Wh | Motor: 250 W | Top speed: 20 mph | Maximum estimated range: 37 miles | Weight: 38.8 lbs.

How we test e-bikes

Our team of analysts and engineers at the Good Housekeeping Institute conducted comprehensive testing of over 20 electric bicycles in Central Park for this article. Extensive evaluations were carried out, with each bike being ridden multiple times over several weeks.

We assessed various aspects of each ride, including overall quality, maneuverability, handling of sharp turns and the bike's performance on different terrains such as smooth, paved streets, uneven rocky paths and inclines. We also assessed how quickly and smoothly each bicycle responded to acceleration, either with the aid of pedal assist or the throttle.

To gather additional insights, we also invited consumer testers to join us in Central Park and provide feedback on each e-bike's ease of use, comfort and build. We evaluated the intuitiveness of turning the e-bike on, ease of mounting and dismounting and assessed the adjustability of the seat height. The design of each e-bike was scored for quality and attractiveness, while the comfort and cushioning of the seats and the overall frame construction (including handlebar positioning, brake handle placement, button accessibility, etc.) were thoroughly examined.

Key criteria such as maximum estimated range, battery power (measured in watts per hour), estimated charging time and motor performance were carefully considered to determine the quality and range of each bike. We took storage convenience into account as well as whether the battery was removable or built-in for easy charging. Finally, we tested the safety features of each e-bike, including the responsiveness of the brakes, frame stability and the presence of a loud, clear bell or integrated lights.

What to look for when shopping for an electric bike

According to Chris Nolte , the founder of Propel, a prominent e-bike dealer with locations in Brooklyn, NY and Long Beach, CA, it's crucial to first determine your specific needs and reasons for purchasing an e-bike. "Bikes are built for different purposes," he says. "If you’re commuting to work, consider a bike with fenders, lights and racks. If you’re riding leisurely or not carrying around cargo, get a simpler model to save on cost and complexity."

In addition to these considerations, the bicycle experts we spoke to identified several other essential factors that should be taken into account to ensure a well-informed decision:

✔️ Battery: When purchasing an electric bike, take note of the type of battery it comes with. "Most batteries are lithium-ion and will be specific to the bike," says Jonathan Perry, a lead mechanic, rider support technician and certified bike fitter at Velofix . One important factor to consider is if the battery is removable or built-in . Removable batteries offer convenience when locking up an e-bike outside, as they can be detached and taken with you to prevent theft. It's also important to note that larger batteries may add several pounds to the overall weight of the bike, so take that into account if you want a lightweight model. Charging time is another aspect to consider, as some e-bikes require more time to fully charge compared to others. Finally, keep in mind that, similar to a cell phone's battery, the power capacity of every e-bike battery will diminish over time.

✔️ Estimated range: Additionally, when deciding on battery size, Nolte advises considering your desired range and power usage. The distance you plan to ride will determine the necessary battery capacity. Watt-hours (wH) are used to measure the energy supplied by an e-bike battery in one hour. For instance, a bike with a 250W motor and a 250wH battery can run solely on battery power for one hour before depletion. (Most batteries have a minimum capacity of 400 watt-hours.) The actual battery consumption depends on factors such as the motor power (wattage) and usage. Heavy pedal assist and throttle use will reduce the range more than occasional boosts. If you want to maximize the range of your e-bike, Perry advises relying on your own leg power more to avoid consuming a significant amount of battery power. " Full pedal-assist or full throttle all the time use lots of watts," he says. To optimize your range, he suggests selecting a battery that aligns with your specific range requirements. Additionally, he recommends purchasing a second battery that you can keep charged and easily replace with the depleted one, ensuring uninterrupted rides when needed.

✔️ Motor: “The main difference between a $2,000 to $4,000 e-bike is the type of motor,” says Perry. There are two main types of motors commonly found in e-bikes: Hub-type motors tend to provide a rougher ride experience. Therefore, Perry advises choosing an e-bike brand with a reputation for excellent customer service and a warranty that ensures prompt assistance in case of any issues. On the other hand, crank-based motors are considered the more premium option. "Established brands like Shimano and Bosch are known for manufacturing good products with these motors," says Perry. Crank-based motors are positioned low and at the center of gravity on the bike, which contributes to better weight distribution and generally results in a smoother overall riding experience.

✔️ Weight : E-bikes can be quite heavy — some of the ones we tested weighed close to 80 pounds! Before making a purchase, it's crucial to assess whether the bike is easy to navigate up and down stairs or move around as needed. “E-bikes are inherently heavy," says Perry. "The motors are heavy. The batteries are heavy. To keep the cost low on the bikes and to keep them sturdy, they’re often made of steel and sometimes aluminum, which are both heavier materials." He advises consumers handle the bike and gauge its maneuverability, particularly when not actively riding it, before buying. If the bike feels challenging to handle, he suggests opting for a lighter model to minimize concerns about stability and ease of lifting.

✔️ Pedal assist: Pedal assist involves receiving assistance from the motor when you pedal, and you can adjust the level of assistance on a scale of 0 to 5. Nolte emphasizes that not all pedal assist systems are the same and the experiences can vary. "Some give you predictable and smoother experiences, whereas some are not as intuitive," he says. "Some systems replace your pedaling while some augment your pedaling. The difference is the sensors and how they work." There are various methods to activate pedal assist, the simplest being a cadence sensor , which detects the speed at which you pedal. However, this approach can sometimes result in a jerky motion. A more sophisticated option is a torque sensor , which senses the force you exert while pedaling. For instance, when riding downhill, you may pedal quickly without requiring much power. On the other hand, when climbing uphill, you want the bike to provide additional power. A torque sensor is better suited for adjusting the assistance based on your pedaling output in different situations.

✔️ Throttle: Certain e-bikes are equipped with a throttle that enables the motor to propel the bike without the need for pedaling. Whether you require a throttle or not depends on personal preference and the type of bike you're riding. Perry suggests that individuals seeking a cargo bike to transport children or heavy loads should consider an e-bike with a throttle. The throttle can be particularly helpful for getting the bike moving with ease. Additionally, it proves useful for riders who prefer not to pedal immediately after a complete stop, especially when dealing with a heavier bike.

✔️ Gears: E-bikes come with different gear options, ranging from seven gears to three or even just one. "If you’re an active rider, you'll want some gears on your e-bike," suggests Nolte. "A bike with no gears will either pedal too fast or too slow." It's crucial to test ride bikes on different terrains to determine the ideal number of gears for your needs. This way, you can ensure a comfortable and efficient riding experience.

✔️ Tires: Thin tires are typically lighter and most suitable for riding on paved, smooth streets. However, in areas with rougher terrain, wider tires and suspension are recommended for enhanced traction and comfort, even if they slightly decrease speed. Perry suggests visiting a local bike shop for assistance in choosing the appropriate tires based on your specific location and riding conditions. If you ride frequently, it's also worth considering puncture-resistant tires to minimize the risk of flats and ensure a smoother riding experience.

✔️ Suspension fork: "Front suspension forks provide some shock dampening," says Perry. "When you hit something rough in the road, they compress and almost bounce up." That said, if you don’t intend on taking the bike onto off-road paths, gravel dirt roads or hiking trails, you'll want to avoid a suspension fork. "It adds weight to the bike,” says Perry. However, if you anticipate encountering bumps or potholes during your rides, a suspension fork can significantly enhance comfort by absorbing the shocks and providing a smoother experience.

✔️ Brakes: E-bikes are typically equipped with mechanical or hydraulic brakes, explains Perry. In general, mechanical brakes are more affordable and require less maintenance, but they may sacrifice some performance. They rely on the strength of your hands to apply braking force. On the other hand, hydraulic brakes provide a smoother and more responsive braking experience, placing less strain on your hands. However, it's worth noting that hydraulic brakes may require more frequent maintenance compared to mechanical brakes.

✔️ Extra features: While it may be considered the least important aspect, it's still worth considering the extra features that come with your e-bike. Take note of the display and its readability — is it large enough and are the buttons easy to adjust? Assess whether the bike provides ample storage options such as a front or rear basket, or additional compartments for carrying items like a purse, backpack or groceries. Check if the bike includes a bell and integrated lights for added safety. Consider whether fenders are included to protect you when riding over puddles or wet surfaces. Since each e-bike is unique, prioritize the features that are essential to you and take note of the ones that would enhance your overall riding experience.

What the classes of electric bikes?

In the U.S., e-bikes are categorized into three distinct classes based on their capabilities and speed:

✔️ Class 1 e-bikes can reach speeds of “up to 20 mph with pedal assist," says Perry. "They can go faster than that when going downhill, but the electric motor will stop giving you any kind of assistance once you’re at 20 mph."

✔️ Class 2 e-bikes also have a maximum speed of 20 mph, but they come with a throttle that allows you to reach this speed without continuous pedaling, says Perry.

✔️ C lass 3 e-bikes have a top speed of 28 mph. While most class 3 e-bikes are equipped with a throttle, it is not always the case. It's important to note that these e-bikes are generally not permitted on bike paths and trails. "Check your local laws regarding the use of class 3 e-bikes," advises Perry.

Are e-bikes safe?

Any type of biking carries inherent risks — and e-bikes introduce even more speed into that equation. While you always want to wear a properly fitting helmet, there are several other key considerations to keep in mind to ensure your safety when riding an e-bike:

✔️ Size and comfort: Choose an e-bike that fits you well and provides a comfortable riding experience. Consider factors like frame type (step-through or high-step), ideal ride position and overall comfort. Step-through frames are oftentimes the easiest to get on, and useful for days when you’re wearing a skirt or dress. High-step or step-over frames are a bit trickier to get on and less comfortable, especially for petite riders. As for ride position, Nolte recommends an upright position for better safety, comfort and visibility.

✔️ Pedal assist safety: When coming to a stop, turn off the pedal assist or set it to zero to prevent accidental throttle activation. Keep your hands on the brakes when at a standstill, similar to how you would with a car at a red light. Additionally, you can check if your e-bike's battery has Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 2849 certification for fire safety.

✔️ Assembly and maintenance: It's crucial to have your e-bike assembled and checked by a professional. Contact your local bike shop for assistance. While they may not handle electrical components, they can still ensure the overall bike is properly assembled. Services like Velofix are available for e-bike owners who require servicing or repairs, even at their homes.

Are electric bikes worth it?

If you're a frequent cyclist, a commuter, or looking for a convenient alternative to driving for short trips, buying an e-bike can be worth it. E-bikes offer numerous benefits, such as faster transportation, environmental friendliness and an opportunity to stay active.

However, it's important to note that e-bikes come with certain considerations. They tend to be heavier, pricier and require comparable (if not additional) maintenance compared to traditional bicycles, which can result in higher long-term costs. Therefore, selecting an e-bike from a reputable brand with reliable customer service is essential. Before making a purchase, check with your local bike store about their e-bike servicing options and take any opportunity to test ride the bike to ensure it suits your needs and preferences.

Olivia (she/her) is a media and tech product reviews analyst at the Good Housekeeping Institute , covering tech, home, auto, health and more. She has more than five years of experience writing about tech trends and innovation and, prior to joining GH in 2021, was a writer for Android Central, Lifewire and other media outlets. Olivia is a graduate of George Washington University, with a bachelor's degree in journalism, political science and French, and she holds a master’s degree in communications from Sciences Po Paris.

@media(max-width: 64rem){.css-o9j0dn:before{margin-bottom:0.5rem;margin-right:0.625rem;color:#ffffff;width:1.25rem;bottom:-0.2rem;height:1.25rem;content:'_';display:inline-block;position:relative;line-height:1;background-repeat:no-repeat;}.loaded .css-o9j0dn:before{background-image:url(/_assets/design-tokens/goodhousekeeping/static/images/Clover.5c7a1a0.svg);}}@media(min-width: 48rem){.loaded .css-o9j0dn:before{background-image:url(/_assets/design-tokens/goodhousekeeping/static/images/Clover.5c7a1a0.svg);}} Product Reviews

The Best Period Swimsuits

The 10 Best At-Home Laser Hair Removal Devices

The 5 Best Treadmills for Your Home Gym

The Best Electric Composters

The Best Mineral Sunscreens

The Best Gifts for 4-Year-Olds

The Best Cheap Vacuum Cleaners Under $150

The Best Matcha Powders

The Best At-Home Red Light Therapy Devices

The Best Innerspring Mattresses

The Best Cooling Pajamas

Best electric mountain bike: join the e-bike revolution!

• Danny Milner
• January 26, 2024

Electric mountain bikes (e-bikes) let you go further and faster in the same time as a regular mountain bike, which makes them perfect for the hectic pace of modern life.

This guide will arm you with all the knowledge you need when shopping for the best electric mountain bike. There’s insight on battery and motor technology, a breakdown of different power/weight categories, and all of our recommended models on sale now. Every single one of the bikes in this list has been thoroughly tested by our team of experts, and only the top-scoring bikes make the cut. So, don’t put it off any longer, because with one of the top eMTB models at your disposal, you could be having the best riding experience of your life right now!

On a limited budget? Check out our buyer’s guide to the best cheap electric mountain bikes . And if you want to keep it traditional, there’s our buyer’s guide to the best mountain bike , whatever your budget or discipline.

Specialized has been building e-bikes for longer than most, and its Turbo Levo is proof that experience counts.

1. Specialized Turbo Levo Comp Carbon

The best shop-bought electric mountain bike.

Frame: FACT 11m Carbon, 150mm travel | Motor: Specialized/Brose 2.2 90Nm, 565W peak power | Battery: Specialized 700Wh | Weight: 22.43kg | Rating: 9/10

Reasons to buy:

• Excellent chassis
• A blast to ride
• Great value at the discounted price

Reasons to avoid:

• Cost-cutting drivetrain and fork

In a hotly contested shoot-out, the Specialized Turbo Levo emerged as our best Shop-Bought E-Bike of 2023. There are loads of reasons why it won – a smooth silent motor, comprehensive size range, aggressive, adaptable frame geometry, fun handling, neat integration, and a battery that’s easy to remove – but the real clincher for the Turbo Levo is that it it’s just such a blast to ride.

Yes, Specialized has cut a few corners with the components, but most are consumables that can be upgraded when they wear out. And out-of-the-box it managed to be the easiest bike to throw around, which meant you could either bank that energy and ride for longer, or release it with maximum abandon on the descents. It’s a package that’s hard to fault.

Read the full review of the Specialized Turbo Levo Comp Carbon

The Canyon Spectral:ON impressed us with its dynamic handling.

2. Canyon Spectral:ON CF 9

The best direct sales electric mountain bike.

Frame: Carbon, 155mm travel | Motor: Shimano STEPS EP8 85Nm, 500W peak power | Battery: Canyon 720Wh | Weight: 23.34kg | Rating: 9/10

• Dynamic handling
• Choose either 720Wh or 900Wh battery
• Brakes lack bite
• Maxxis Assegai EXO casing tyres aren’t tough enough
• Tall head tube

In the direct-sales category of our E-Bike of the Year test 2023 it was the Canyon Spectral:ON CF 9 that walked away with the top prize. And considering it’s a bike that was unashamedly inspired by the Specialized Turbo Levo – from the battery access to the geometry – that should come as no surprise.

The handling is sublime. As agile as a motorised gazelle, with a front end that can be played with like putty in your hands, the mullet-wheel Spectral:ON dispels the opinion that e-bikes are inert. And even with the optional 900Wh battery fitted, Canyon seems to have defied the laws of physics with a dynamic ride that puts most other e-bikes to shame.

Read the full review of the Canyon Spectral:ON CF 9

Vitus E-Mythique LT VRX

3. Vitus E-Mythique LT VRX

Best budget e-bike.

Frame:  6061 T6 alloy, 160mm travel  | Motor:  Bafang M510, 95Nm  | Battery:  Bafang 630Wh | Weight: 25.2kg | Rating:  N/A

• Sublime suspension and killer geometry make for a standout ride.
• Clear display.
• Decent power and range. Generous overrun
• Spoke mounted speed sensor.
• Key needed for battery removal.
• Motor rattle similar to Bosch and Shimano

With the E-Mythique LT range, Vitus set out to build the best performing e-bike at a realistic price. And by realistic, the entry-level model comes in at £3,299 while this range-topping VRX is £4,399 – the price at which most e-bike ranges struggle to even start at.

But while the headline here is the price, it’s not the whole story, because Vitus has not compromised on performance. The alloy frame gets contemporary geometry, mullet wheels (29in up front and 27.5in out back), and there’s enough travel to shred the rowdiest descents. The Bafang motor has oodles of power, fully customisable modes, and a decent size 630Wh battery.

Vitus is always pushing the boundaries when it comes to price versus performance. Normally it’s a balancing act, where one facet falls as the other rises, but the Mythique LT manages to lift both sides of the scales simultaneously.

Read our full test review of the Vitus E-Mythique VRX

The Pivot Shuttle SL blends the best of analogue bikes and e-bikes into an intoxicating experience.

4. Pivot Shuttle SL 29 Team XTR

The best lightweight electric mountain bike.

Frame:  Carbon Hollow Core, 132mm travel |  Motor:  Fazua Ride 60 60Nm/450W |  Battery: Fazua Energy 430Wh |  Weight:  18.47kg |  Rating:  9/10

• Very dynamic handling
• Low resistance, high power Fazua motor feels great on or off
• Integrated 430Wh battery boosts range
• Shimano XTR drivetrain and brakes reduces weight without compromising performance
• Sag indicator is really useful
• EXO casing tyres are too thin for a bike this capable
• Can’t remove the battery for charging
• Slight delay in the motor when reengaging after overrun is complete
• Handlebar mounted controller feels fragile

Pivot was one of the first brands to release a lightweight trail bike with the latest Fazua Ride 60 motor, and it set the bar very high. So high we awarded it our 2023 E-Bike of the Year award in the Lightweight category. Key to winning that accolade is the infectious ride quality, that encourages skilled riders to extract the maximum fun from every trail. There’s no slack in the system – with minimal travel you have to be on your best game – but the Shuttle SL amplifies every ride.

Fazua’s Ride 60 system feels punchy in the top Rocket mode, but still delivers the best range of all the lightweight motors we tested. Over 1,000m of climbing in Rocket. So the lack of a range extender isn’t really a problem, even though it’ll be tough turning down one more run when the red light starts blinking.

Read the full review for the Pivot Shuttle SL 29 Team XTR

The YT Decoy’s extra battery capacity creates a subtle belly, but keeps the weight low and centred.

5. YT Decoy

Most dynamic long-travel e-bike.

Frame: Carbon, 165mm travel | Motor: Shimano STEPS EP8 85Nm, 500W peak power  | Battery: SMP YT 720Wh | Weight: 23.32kg | Rating: 8/10

• Big travel and dynamic handling
• Top spec for the money
• Finally the staying power to match the thrills
• Very limited bottle capacity

The YT Decoy has been around for a while now, but it still rides as superbly as it did when we first tested it over three years ago. There’s a stack of travel, but it manages to fly in the face of that depth, with a dexterity and reactivity that turns every trail into a playground. And being direct-sales means the Decoy is exceptionally well-dressed for the money.

Our main complaint with the Decoy was the small battery, but YT has now fixed that with a larger capacity unit that comes as standard. So now you don’t have to limp home for an early bath while all your mates go for an extra lap.

Read our full test review of the YT Decoy

The latest Nukeproof Carbon Megawatt is an absolute bomber.

7. Nukeproof Megawatt Carbon

Best e-bike for technology.

Frame: Carbon, 170mm travel | Motor: SRAM Powertrain, 90Nm, 680W peak power | Battery:  SRAM 720Wh | Weight: 24.1kg | Rating: N/A

Reasons to buy: 

• Good geometry and sizing.
• Increased range, power and tranquillity from the SRAM motor
• Auto Shift clearly has merit
• AXS wireless controls give an ultra-clean cockpit

Reasons to avoid: 

• Only two power modes
• SRAM Powertrain and Auto Shift tech drives the price up
• No geometry adjustment

Nukeproof is one of the first brands to release a bike with the latest SRAM Powertrain wireless motor and transmission system. It’s similar to the motor in the Specialized Turbo Levo – so whisper-quiet and ultra smooth – bit comes with even more power and total wireless control for an ultra clean cockpit. It also has Auto Shift capability, which allows you to focus on the trail ahead and leave the gears to the computer.

That’s all well and good, but the motor is also mounted to one of the best handling chassis on the market. Nukeproof’s new carbon frame saves a bit of weight, while the handling blends the immovable force of a sledgehammer with the precision of a scalpel. Mega by name, mega by nature.

Read our full review of the Nukeproof Megawatt Carbon RS 297

8. Specialized  S-Works Turbo Levo SL

Lightest mid-power e-bike.

Frame: Fact 11m carbon, carbon shock extension, 150mm travel | Motor: Specialized SL 1.2, 50Nm, 320W peak power  | Battery: Specialized SL 320Wh | Weight: 17.65kg | Rating: N/A

• More sizes and more adjustability,
• More power and more torque than before
• Lightweight
• Rear suspension isn’t as plush as before
• It’s a ton of money

Specialized has brought the original lightweight Turbo Levo SL up to date and then some. This second generation version gets more power and torque, better sizing and geometry, and some of the most impressive built-in adjustability on the market. Which means you can play tinker with the handling by playing with the head angle, BB height and chainstay length, or sling in a bigger back wheel (it’s sold standard in an MX configuration) if you want better rollover.

Adding power and torque has helped on the climbs, but range has taken a hit. Thankfully there’s also a range extender available to ensure you don’t get left by the trailside with empty tanks. And while most ‘lightweight’ e-bikes seem to stretch that description on the scales, the Turbo Levo SL actually deserves its SL moniker with a weight that’s not far off some analogue bikes with similar travel.

Read our test review of the Specialized S-Works Turbo Levo SL

The Whyte E-Lyte 150 Works has the best handling of any lightweight e-bike we’ve ridden.

9. Whyte E-Lyte 150 Works

Best handling mid-power e-bike.

Frame: Carbon, 140mm travel | Motor: Bosch Performance SX, 55Nm, 600W peak power | Battery: Bosch 400Wh | Weight: 19.7kg | Rating: N/A

• Great handling, combined with stacks of power and battery capacity
• Range extender is in the right place and comes with the bike
• Hope Tech4 V4 brakes and Pro 5 hubs are both first rate
• Not really that light
• Shredders and avid hill climbers will both want a better rear tyre
• Premium price

Whyte’s latest e-bike is also its lightest ever, and marks the return of carbon frames to the brand’s range. It’s also one of the first new e-bikes with the lightweight Bosch SX motor with it’s eye-catching 600w peak power figure. Yes, you have to pump your legs like a washing machine on spin cycle to get the power, but it’s almost double the power you get from the Turbo Levo SL and on par with Bosch’s claims for the Performance CX unit.

What makes the Whyte really special, though, is the ride. It’s first class. While the weight may seem high on paper, the mass dissolves as soon as you start riding, and the E-Lyte can turn on a micro-dot. The suspension is also superlative, with a fluttery sensitivity backed up by steely support.

Read our test review of the Whyte E-Lyte 150 Works

Dropping in on the YT Decoy!

Which electric mountain bike is right for you?

As e-bikes are making up an increasing market share of new bike sales, so they are starting to diversify in order to meet varying consumer demands. At one end of the scale are the bike park bombers, with massive travel, coil-sprung suspension and even dual-crown forks. Also emerging slowly are the lightweight, ‘diet’ e-bikes with less power and smaller batteries. While in the middle are the all-purpose ‘trail’ e-bikes with air suspension, versatile geometry and around 150mm of travel.

A new breed of eMTBs has started emerging as of 2023, and that’s ones with a similar motor output, but with a lighter weight by using a smaller or more efficient battery.

Want to know the different parts of an eMTB? Check out our guide to the anatomy of an e-bike. 

The Forestal Cyon Halo is a lightweight e-bike with packed with impressive tech.

What is a lightweight/diet e-bike?

With most e-bikes weighing between 22-25kg, small weight differences between different models are barely perceptible. Suspension performance, sizing, component choice and geometry play a far greater role in defining the handling of an e-bike.

That was until Lapierre brought out the eZesty weighing an impressive 17.9kg, and e-bikes took a huge leap closer to their non-assisted cousins. The Lapierre uses a Fazua motor, with reduced power, torque and battery capacity, so you have to do a larger share of the work, but it takes much less effort to turn, jump, accelerate and decelerate. Because you put more energy in, the range is similar to full-power e-bikes with double the battery capacity, and with no extra friction in the system, it still responds to pedal efforts above the motor’s legal cut-off of 25kph. You can even remove the whole battery and motor to make a 15.6kg enduro bike.

Since then, Specialized has released the Turbo Levo SL  and Kenevo SL, newcomer Forestal the innovative Siryon and Cyon, Trek has launched the Fuel EXe, Pivot came out with the Shuttle SL, and Orbea has the Rise. There are also options from Scott (the Lumen), Transition (the Relay) and BMC. If you like the thought of a boost on the climbs, but want to retain the lively handling and pure response of a regular bike, a diet e-bike could be the best of both worlds.

The Canyon Torque:ON is so moto it even comes with a gas tank (for water!)

Can you get downhill-specific e-bikes?

Haibike was probably the first mainstream brand to start designing long travel e-bikes and equipping them with dual crown forks, but the spotlight really swivelled onto this category of bike with the introduction of the Specialized Kenevo. With coil-sprung suspension, heavy-duty tyres, four-piston brakes and masses of travel, it was part shuttle vehicle, part downhill bike.

More recently, Cannondale has joined the party with the Moterra SE, while Specialized has pushed the boat out even further with the outlandish new Kenevo, and more recently we’ve seen the Canyon Torque:ON (above).

The Specialized Turbo Levo is a hoot to throw around.

Are trail-focussed e-bikes the most versatile?

Most full-suspension e-bikes fit the ‘trail’ category and typically they run around 150mm of travel, but fitted with burlier forks up front, compared to their analogue cousins, to cope with the extra weight and leverage of the frame.

Four-piston brakes are common, again to decelerate the additional mass, and they usually have slacker head angles and slightly smaller sizing – the extra weight adding stability that non-assisted bikes make up for in length.

Although there are models with 29in wheels and 27.5in wheels, you’ll see plenty of bikes mixing the two into what’s called a mullet configuration. The 29in wheel up front giving good rollover while the smaller 27.5in wheel at the back increasing agility. Usually this is paired with a large volume 2.6in or 2.8in rear tyre that stretches the footprint and increases traction on steep or loose climbs. The most popular motors are built by Bosch, Brose and Shimano, with most battery capacities ranging from 500Wh to 700Wh.

Power-assisted hardtails are simpler, but struggle on rough terrain.

Are e-hardtails a good choice for mountain biking?

If you’re riding consists solely of tow paths, fire roads and country tracks, then e-hardtails make a lot of sense, since they can be cheaper and there’s less to go wrong. But for hitting proper singletrack, bike parks and trail centres, we wouldn’t recommend one.

The reasons are simple. You remain seated far more on an e-bike than an analogue bike – mostly because the motor prefers a high cadence, and the up-down piston motion of your legs when standing up doesn’t mesh well with the smooth, consistent power delivery of the motor. So without any rear suspension you’re in for a punishing ride on anything but billiard-table smooth trails.

E-bikes let you ride up climbs you wouldn’t dream of on a regular bike, but if you can’t get traction – because the rear wheel is bouncing over bumps and roots – you’ll be off and pushing. Finally, on fast, rough or technical descents, it’s much harder to get an e-bike off the ground, so rear suspension not only helps reduce the impact at the wheel, it also helps you pop the bike over square-edge hits. Which is why most e-hardtails we’ve seen on technical trails are being pushed – with a flat back tyre.

Cleaning an electric mountain bike is fine, as long as you take care and leave the jetwash in the garage.

Everything you need to know about electric mountain bikes

Got a question about riding, setting up or caring for your e-bike? Check out the essential info below, and you’ll also want to take a look at our answers to the most popular eMTB questions.

Are e-bikes worth it?

Do you want to ride much further and climb much faster in the same amount of time as you can on a regular bike, then the answer is absolutely YES! E-bikes allow you to cram in two or three times as much climbing (and descending) into a typical two hour ride as you can on an analogue bike, and with everyone juggling busier lives than ever, that’s an attractive prospect.

Of course there’s no such thing as a free ride, and in the case of e-bikes you’ll have to consider the high initial price, the extra wear and tear on components and the additional weight of the bikes themselves before deciding whether they are right for you. If you’re an experienced rider, it will take some time to adapt your riding style to that extra weight, but after the initial adjustment period, you’ll be addicted to the extra runs you can get in.

And, while it’s possible to let the engine take the strain, you can still get a great workout by toning down the power or not stopping for a breather at the top of every climb. And if you’re just starting out, those intimidating climbs will no longer be such an obstacle to exploring the countryside.

Bosch PowerTube battery can be charged on or off the bike

How long do e-bike batteries last?

Although there are plenty of online range finder tools, there are so many variables in play that they can only ever be considered a rough guide.

The best way of finding out how far your new e-bike will go on a single charge is experience. Record your rides and make a note of the trail conditions, power levels used and the battery remaining, so you can cross reference it against the distance covered and elevation gained. Once you’ve built up a data bank of rides, you’ll have a much better idea of your range when you go somewhere new.

To give you an idea of what to expect in the real world, for a rider weighing 70-75kg with dry trail conditions, we get around 1,800m of climbing from a 600-700Wh battery in a middle power setting. Why metres climbed instead of distance traveled? Well, the motor puts a much higher drain on the battery when climbing, and theoretically the battery would last forever if you rode along the flat above the speed limiter.

Should I charge my e-bike outdoors?

In a perfect world, you should always charge your e-bike’s battery indoors at room temperature (between 10-20°C, out of direct sunlight). If your battery is not removable, try your best to charge the whole bike in the house. Always only use the recommended charger that came supplied with the bike and don’t leave it charging unattended or overnight.

Why does my motor still turn when I stop pedaling?

Some motors, most notably the Brose, continue to give assistance briefly when you stop pedalling. Usually this is most obvious in full-power mode, and can be useful to get up stepped climbs, rock gardens or over patches of roots where you need to coast in order to prevent pedal strikes. Officially under EU law this assistance cannot last for more than 2m, although we’ve experienced considerably more than that in the real world.

The new Bosch CX Race motor gives a noticebly powerfull overrun, which is designed to help racers up the technical ascents that are a feature of e-enduro racing.

Battery display built in the to top tube on the Turbo Levo.

What’s the lifespan of my battery?

This varies by manufacturer. Giant says you should have 80 per cent capacity left after 1,000 full charge cycles (equivalent to a big ride almost every day for three years). Shimano guarantees 60 per cent battery capacity after 1,000 full charge cycles. Specialized promises 60 per cent after 500 full cycles.

What frame size should I go for?

Because all that low-down weight means e-bikes are so much more stable than their naturally-aspirated counterparts, it’s less important to search for stability through frame length and slack geometry. That’s not to say you should get the smallest bike you can, but if you’re between sizes, it’s worth considering the smaller option. As always, the best course of action is to try before you buy, so find out about demo days and shop fleets before you commit.

Is it OK to wash my e-bike?

According to advice from Bosch, you should wash your e-bike as frequently as you’d wash an analogue bike (ideally after every ride), but you should never use a jet wash. This is because the high-pressure water can get past seals and into delicate electronics, as well as into non-serviceable areas such as the bottom bracket.

Equally, avoid degreasers and bike shampoos – use water from a garden hose, or bucket, and a range of brushes to get into those awkward areas around the chainset and the motor. Advice varies around what to do with the battery – Specialized recommends leaving it in-situ, but Bosch suggests removing it, then replacing the battery cover. Either way, we’d remove any displays (or cover with a plastic bag), dry the bike immediately after washing, particularly battery terminals, and then switch the bike on to check everything’s working.

E-bike climbing skills with the trials master: Chris Akrigg.

Where should I store my battery?

Keep your battery stored between 10-20°C and out of direct sunlight. If that’s not possible, consider getting a thermal blanket – basically an insulated sleeve – to store it in. If you drive to go riding, keep the battery in this sleeve en route, as it will maintain a more optimal temperature. If you’re not planning on riding for a while, remove the battery from the bike, and store in the house with around 60 per cent charge (the exact amount varies between brands). Charge fully before use.

Do I need e-bike specific components?

As e-bikes have become more popular, so brands have reacted quickly to develop specific products to fit them. In some cases they’re a waste of time, in others they’re well worth considering if not fitted as standard to your e-bike.

For example, Fox’s e-bike specific 36 forks use a thicker steerer tube and stanchion tubes to better resist the increased loads. SRAM’s Guide RE e-bike brakes use a simple lever with four-piston calipers for additional braking power.

Canyon’s SD:ON saddle has a flat nose and broad, kicked-up tail to give you something to push against on steep climbs. Also think about reinforced casing tyres, bigger brake rotors, stronger wheels, more robust freehub internals. Look for components that offer the best value and durability rather than weight saving or bling factor, as e-bikes tend to chew through consumables much faster than analogue bikes.

What happens if my motor stops working out of warranty?

Good news! Now you’re no longer left with a hefty bill for a new motor, because several businesses have popped up specialising in refurbishing, repairing, and servicing motors from all the top brands. Click here to read our story about where to get your e-bike motor fixed .

Looking for something a little less pricy? You can still get a brilliant budget electric mountain bike for less money that still offers amazing performance. 

Join Eric Church, Lainey Wilson, Lynyrd Skynyrd & Riley Green at the F&S Music Fest in South Carolina. Tickets on Sale Now!

FIELD & STREAM+

• Join 1871 Club

The Best Electric Bikes (2024 Review)

These are the best options for going with electronic pedal assist this year

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

While electric bikes seemed like a fad at first, it’s safe to say they are here to stay. And for good reason. Once you use an e-bike, it’s hard to go back to a more traditional style. They’re efficient, versatile, and just downright fun to ride. Plus, hunters and anglers have found fun and innovative ways to use e-bikes to access hard-to-reach honey holes.

However, stores and online retailers have become over-saturated with different brands and styles of electric bikes. Wading through dozens of options can be time-consuming and more than a little frustrating. Trust me, I’ve done it myself. That’s why we’re here to help. We’ve done all the research and the testing required to help point you in the right direction. Which includes riding a number of bikes from the most popular manufacturers. We tested them in all types of terrain so you can find the right bike for hunting, fishing, or off-road riding. Here are the best electric bikes being made today.

• Best Overall: Aventon Aventure.2
• Best Value: Lectric XP Step-Thru 3.0
• Fastest: Engwe X24
• Best For Hunting: Quiet Kat Ranger
• Most Sporty: Heybike Ranger S
• Best Commuter: Rad Bikes RadRover 6
• Best Budget Folder: Ecotric 500-Watt Folding

How We Chose the Best Electric Bikes

I’ve tested a number of e-bikes on a variety of terrain—from paved roads to dirt jumps—over the last three years. And this in-the-field experience has helped me differentiate useful features from pointless gimmicks. Many of the e-bikes you’re about to see were tested specifically for this review.

My testing process consisted of riding at least 50 miles on each bike while also evaluating speed and battery life. I also took notes on assembly, maintenance, and user-friendliness. Toward the end of my test and comparisons, I was able to categorize each bike into a best-case scenario, which you will see below. I also considered the following factors in my selection:

• Off-Road Capabilities: Can this bike seamlessly transition from dirt to pavement? Or is it strictly a city bike?
• Power: What is the bike’s top speed? How much effort does it take to get the pedal assist to engage? Can it haul a heavy load?
• Comfort: What features does the bike have to smooth out the ride? Is the stock seat comfortable?
• Accessories: What sort of add-ons does the manufacturer offer? Is the price point fair for these additional items?
• Value: Is the price point fair for the style and features of the bike? Does this bike require a ton of upgrades for an optimal ride?

Best Electric Bikes: Reviews and Recommendations

• Price: $1,799
• Motor: 750-Watt Brushless
• Brakes: Hydraulic disc
• Tires: 26” Fat Tire
• Weight: 77 Pounds
• Torque sensor pedal assist is super smooth
• Excellent price point for this style of bike
• Great battery life
• Turn signals and brake lights
• Stock seat is extremely hard

The Aventure.2 has quickly become one of my favorite electric bikes for its smooth ride and excellent build quality. My only real complaint is that the stock seat is a little hard for my liking. But I rode this bike 45 miles on the first battery charge with ease. And I believe I lost a little range on the back end as the temperature dropped, decreasing the battery life. I’m anxious to see what it does in warm weather. The torque sensor makes for a smooth ride that also provides a great workout. The Aventure.2 has a gradual take-up of speed on both assist and throttle that’s safer and won’t jerk the rider around like other bikes.

The grips have a tiny bit of tact that makes them extremely comfortable for longer rides. The throttle is on the left side, but I found it quite natural and intuitive to operate even though I’m right handed. And I found the bright display screen is super easy to read in any lighting conditions.

I got this bike up to 26 miles per hour going downhill, which felt plenty fast enough for a bike of this size and weight. The beefy construction gives it a lot of strength, which meant I felt comfortable taking it for short, off-road jaunts. The front suspension fork has a nice amount of travel that I found helped soak up some of the worst speed bumps in my neighborhood.

The Aventure.2 was also shockingly easy to assemble because of the great fit and finish of the build. Nothing on this bike feels cheap or out of place. And nothing feels forced either. Considering Aventon recently dropped the price point to $1,800 permanently, it’s an incredible deal for a bike with these features and capability.

• Price: $1,199
• Motor: 500-Watt hub with a 1,000-Watt peak
• Tires: 20” Fat Tire
• Weight: 64 Pounds
• Exceptional good looks
• Great range
• Tons of available accessories
• Terrible key placement
• Pedal assist level one is not useful

Lectric is one of the most popular e-bike brands, and it’s easy to understand why after riding one. My parents bought a couple of these bikes because they fold in half and are easy to stow in their van while on camping trips. I topped this bike out at 21 miles per hour during testing. It is capable of light off-roading thanks to a generous front oil suspension fork. The range is also solid. And because the bike is geared well enough to ride without assist, one doesn’t need to worry as much about the battery running out.

Pedal assist level one is not as useful as I’d like. It doesn’t provide much of a boost when compared to pedaling without. This isn’t a deal breaker in my mind though. It just means the bike needs to be ran on level two or above. I spent most of my time in level three during testing. That seems to be the sweet spot for performance with this bike. The $1,200 price point also makes this bike an incredible value for the money. In my opinion, it’s the best 20-inch folder out there right now.

• Price: $1,699
• Motor: 1,200-Watt Peak High-Speed Brushless
• Brakes: Hydraulic Disc
• Tires: 24” Fat Tire
• Weight: 96 Pounds
• Extremely fast
• Aggressive suspension
• Dual batteries provide great range
• Extremely heavy

The X24 is the fastest electric bike I tested. It topped out at 29 miles per hour on a paved downhill road. While I tried my best to get it over 30, it just wouldn’t break that threshold. The Engwe is ideal for off-roading because it has three points of suspension that really soak up the ruts and bumps. This is a bike that riders can be aggressive with and take on off-road trails. It is the closest thing to a mountain bike I found of all of the models I tested.

The aluminum alloy frame of the X24 is extremely robust. I’ve never seen a folder this rugged before. But the frame needs to be exceptionally strong because Engwe gave this bike not one, but two batteries. There’s a 19.2-amp hour battery and a 10-amp hour battery. A simple press of the button allows the rider to turn the extra one on or off, depending on your needs. Engwe advertises a 62-mile range for the X24, but I got about 50 miles off a full charge of both batteries. However, I was also testing in 50-degree temperatures, so I came away rather impressed by that battery performance.

My only real complaint is the extra battery adds about 20-30 pounds to the bike. At 92 pounds, it’s not impossible to pick up, but it is tough to wrangle into a smaller vehicle. But the $1,699 price point, solid range, and ruggedness of the build are all standouts.

Best for Hunting: Quiet Kat Ranger

• Price: $3,599
• Motor: 1,000-Watt Hub Drive
• Brakes: Tektro 2-Piston Hydraulic
• Weight: 65 Pounds
• Nearly bulletproof
• Great suspension
• Surprisingly lightweight
• Shorter range

Quiet Kat remains one of the most impressive electric bikes I’ve ever pedaled. The smooth handling and rugged open frame of the bike make it capable of tackling terrain that would break other models. I took one of these Rangers over some serious jumps during a test ride last year. The suspension soaks up the impact and the aggressive tread on the tires helps it dig in and out of corners like a motorbike. The 1,000-watt hub motor gives the bike a ton of torque and capability that’s hard to match for other bikes of this size.

These bikes are a popular choice for hunters who need something to handle the elements. One of my former co-workers completely submerged one of these bikes in a massive puddle on a turkey hunt in Illinois. The Quiet Kat shrugged it off and kept on running. Pair that with a 325-pound load capacity, and you’ve got a bike that will not only get you to that big buck, but will pull it out for you too.

The aggressive motor does mean these bikes have a slightly shorter range than some of the others on this list. They are also very expensive, but you’ll be hard pressed to find a tougher bike capable of going deep in the backcountry. It’s a serious hunting bike for the most dedicated hunters out there.

• Price: $1,399
• Weight: 72 Pounds
• Extremely peppy assist and throttle
• Complete package is stock
• Great brakes
• Tough to assemble
• Plastic fenders

“Spunky” is a very appropriate description of the Ranger S. It’s peppy with a surprising amount of torque for a dead start using both the throttle and the assist. I wouldn’t recommend it for kids, but it’s a super fun ride for adults (it wheelies quite easily). And I topped this bike out at about 22 miles per hour, but it feels faster than that.

I didn’t think I was going to like this bike after a tough assembly. Many of the nuts, bolts, and parts had a difficult fit. I can normally assemble an electric bike in under an hour. This one took two. However, this bike grew on me quickly in the first 50 miles I put on it. It has a very smooth ride, and surprisingly enough, the stock seat is one of the better ones I’ve seen on an electric bike.

Another thing I like about the Ranger S is just how complete the standard package is compared to similar-priced bikes. This model comes with full lighting, turn signals, an LCD display screen, and even an electronic horn. I got about 28 miles off the first charge with this bike. But keep in mind it was rather cold during my testing. I expect it will come much closer to the advertised 55-mile range once warm weather returns. The folding mechanisms also lock down securely. It was a breeze to take down and throw in the back of my van. This is a solid, complete package for anyone looking for a folder in the $1,500 range.

• Weight: 73.4 Pounds
• Extremely comfortable ride
• Excellent suspension
• Transitions well between on and off-road
• Replacement parts are an issue

Coupled with an improved saddle, the RadPower offers an incredibly cushy ride—perfect for commuting. It is one of the most comfortable bikes I tested, both on and off-road. I cruised around small town streets for hours on this bike and even took it down some infrequently used dirt paths. It only used up a small portion of the battery each time.

This RadRover 6 has a cadence sensor, but it’s one of the better ones I’ve seen on this style of electronic bicycle. The pedal assist isn’t overwhelming either and feels rather close to a torque sensor. This is a solid option if you want to actively shift between the gears.

One of the biggest issues a friend of mine has had with his RadRover is finding secondary market replacement parts. That means he’s been forced to buy more expensive parts directly from Rad Power. Still, Rad Power has recently dropped the price point of this bike, making it incredibly affordable from where it was a few years ago.

• Price: $619 – $699
• Motor: 500-Watt Brushless
• Brakes: Mechanical Disc
• Extremely affordable
• Excellent folding mechanisms
• Rugged frame
• No suspension
• Mushy brakes

The Ecotric was my first electric bike has yet to let me down. It’s a rather simple design that’s great for anyone on a budget. The price has dropped since I first bought mine during Covid. It was originally $880, but is now $699. And it’s a very solid bike for that price. I’ve taken this bike off-road, through bumpy cornfields, and over muddy trails. It will handle anything you throw at it.

You do feel the bumps while riding this bike due to the lack of a front suspension fork, but it isn’t horrible. My only other complaint is that the mechanical disc brakes are mushy, and not nearly as smooth as hydraulic ones. This bike will easily do 20 – 22 miles per hour, depending on the terrain, conditions, and battery. While the motor is only 500 watts, it’s surprisingly sporty. It takes off in a hurry with a twist of the throttle.

I highly recommend paying extra to get the LCD screen display. One of my biggest regrets was going with the LED light display. It’s functional, but also hard to tell exactly how much battery life is left due to voltage sag when the motor is assisting. Overall, this is a tough little bike packed full of great features that normally can’t be found at this price point. In fact, I’m not even sure how Ecotric makes money on these things for the prices they offer.

What to Consider When Choosing an Electric Bike

With electronic bikes, most people are concerned about range and price. But you need to take the advertised range with a small grain of salt because most manufacturers list the mileage for the lowest assist settings. This is fine, but I know a few e-bike users who actually ride at level one, including myself.

External factors like throttle use and ambient temperature can also affect how quickly the battery drains. About half of my testing for this article took place in temperatures reaching into the 40s and 50s. I know I wasn’t getting the maximum performance of these bikes in those conditions. That’s just the way these batteries work.

As far as price point goes, the adage of “you get what you pay for,” tends to ring true. Although I’ve tested plenty of bikes in the $1,000 to $1,500 price range that are perfect for most riders who want a simple bike for cruising and commuting. I recommend budgeting around $1,000 at a minimum for one.

Pedal Sensor

It’s not often discussed, but the type of sensor used to kick on the pedal assist affects how a bike will ride. The two main types used today are cadence sensors and torque sensors. Cadence sensors are much more common because they’re cheaper. Basically, a cadence sensor registers whenever a rider puts pressure on the pedals and signals the motor to kick in at whatever assist level the bike is set at. On some bikes, this results in an immediate small jolt as the motor kicks into gear.

A torque sensor is more sensitive and expensive because they don’t just register the pedals in motion. These sensors actively measure how hard the pedals are being turned and then translate that into an appropriate amount of assistance. The harder you pedal, the more the bike will help, and the faster it will travel.

It’s been my experience that cadence sensor bikes are much easier to ride because they immediately take off to a pre-determined speed setting. This type of sensor is great for anyone who wants minimal effort. However, a torque sensor is a much smoother ride that feels closer to a standard bicycle. That means more effort is involved to get the bike moving and keep it moving at speed. I would recommend a torque sensor bike for anyone who wants a bike for exercise.

The large, lithium-ion batteries required to run e-bikes are heavy. Which means it requires a much beefier frame to support the battery. This all adds to the weight. It’s not unusual for a bike with 20-inch tires to weigh 55 to 70 pounds. A bike with 24 or 26-inch tires can weigh 65 to 95 pounds. Thus, it’s worth taking the weight into consideration when choosing a bike.

Standard e-bikes have a horizontal tube or construction that usually rides high on the bike. This style of frame offers great strength and durability. But a step-through frame drops the horizontal portion at an angle that makes it easier to hop on and off the bike. This can come at the cost of strength, but many bikes are being built extremely beefy these days, so it’s less of a concern.

Frame choice is largely becoming more of a personal decision than anything else. Although a step-through is significantly easier for older riders or anyone with hip or leg problems. Simply because the rider doesn’t need to lift their leg as high to get on the bike.

Seats and Accessories

Almost every manufacturer now offers a bevy of accessories for their electronic bikes. Cargo racks and bags , rearview mirrors, locks, and more are now bonus offerings often sold directly by the manufacturer. Sometimes, these accessories are offered in bundle packages that can save the buyer a lot of money.

One of the more frustrating things I’ve encountered with e-bikes is uncomfortable stock saddles. Many manufacturers put hard seats on their stock bikes. Then they sell much nicer, cushier seats as part of a “comfort” package. It’s refreshing to see a few bikes like the Ranger S and the Engwe x24 have a decent saddle straight from the factory. But until that’s standard across the industry, it’s my recommendation to budget for a better saddle when deciding on a bike.

Q: What are the three types of electric bikes?

There are three different legal classifications that most electric bikes fall under. Class one bikes have motors that kick in only while the user is pushing the pedals. Class two bikes have a throttle and can operate via pedal assist or by a throttle. Class three e-bikes operate via throttle or pedal assist but top out at faster speeds, closer to 28 miles per hour. Each state has differing laws regarding age limits and other legalities with each class of bike.

Q: How long do e-bike batteries last?

It depends on the bike, the type of battery, and how it is maintained. I have one bike with a battery that’s three years old and still going. For some bikes, that might be the maximum age before it’s time to buy a new one. Other bikes might have batteries that last closer to five or six years. Read the instruction manual carefully for battery care tips specific to your e-bike’s battery.

Q: How much should I expect to pay for an electric bike?

Because of the cost of lithium-ion batteries, and the brushless motors that power these bikes, anywhere from $800 – $4,000 is a realistic price. Although I’ve found a fair number of good bikes in the $1,000 – $2,000 price range. This style of bike is not cheap, but they are worth the price of admission.

Best Electric Bikes: Final Thoughts

The Aveton Aventure.2 continues to impress me with the comfort and smoothness of its ride no matter the terrain. It’s hard to find a bike that rides this well for under $2,000. It is also versatile enough to transition from a commuter bike to an off-road machine rather seamlessly. Add in the slick good looks, and this bike is the total package.

Why Trust Us

For more than 125 years, Field & Stream has been providing readers with honest and authentic coverage of outdoor gear. Our writers and editors eat, sleep, and breathe the outdoors, and that passion comes through in our product reviews. You can count on F&S to keep you up to date on the best new gear. And when we write about a product—whether it’s a bass lure or a backpack—we cover the good and the bad, so you know exactly what to expect before you decide to make a purchase.

Travis Smola is a Staff Writer with Field & Stream. He spent eight years writing about all things outdoors with Wide Open Spaces before looking for a new challenge with Field & Stream in 2023. Contact the author here.

Want More of the Great Outdoors?

Stay adventure-ready with outdoor news that keeps you informed, not spammed.

Best electric bikes 2024 for every kind of rider

We select our favourite electric bikes to help you choose the right one for you

• Sign up to our newsletter Newsletter

• E-HYBRID BIKES
• 1. Best overall
• 2. Best value
• E-FOLDING BIKES
• 3. Best overall
• 4. Best lightweight
• E-ROAD & E-GRAVEL BIKES
• 5. Best for off-road
• 6. Best road e-bike
• E-bike buying advice

Meet the testers

Best electric bikes 2024: Jump Menu

The list in brief ↴ 1. Best hybrid e-bike overall 2. Best value hybrid e-bike 3. Best folding e-bike 4. Best lightweight folding e-bike 5. Best e-bike for off-road riding 6. Best lightweight e-bike for road riding Advice How to choose

The growth in popularity of electric bikes means there are now more than ever to choose from. There are lightweight e-road bikes that don’t look too dissimilar from their acoustic counterparts, flat bar electric hybrids for leisure riding and commuting, and even electric folding bikes for those who lack space or undertake journeys that involve train and bus travel.

All of which makes choosing the right bike for you less than straightforward. To help you out, we've reviewed bikes from these three categories, with our testing involving a range of routes and ride lengths. 

If you’re looking to go electric while keeping the cost down, we’ve also a dedicated guide to the   best budget electric bikes . Likewise if off-road adventures are more your thing, we’ve also got a guide to the   best electric gravel bikes . Otherwise, read on for reviews of our favorites e-bikes and a guide on what to look for when you start your shopping.

Best electric hybrid bike overall

Fitted with fenders and a rear rack and equipped with suspension forks and wide tires, the Turbo Vado is designed to handle the rigours of the daily commute with ease.

Read more below

Best electric hybrid bike for value

Ribble's Hybrid AL e delivers plenty of bang for your buck thanks to a quality Mahle rear hub motor, fitted fenders and rear rack and a reliable SRAM drivechain.

Best electric folding bike overall

The 20" wheels and rear suspension result in a smooth ride, while the decent range, clever folding design and lightweight frame mean it's fit for purpose. 

Best lightweight electric folding bike

The front hub motor and 'battery in a bag' allows for Brompton's classic design to remain. The result is the same  folding mechanism that's at the heart of the brand's popularity.

Best electric bike for off-road riding

Combines Cannondale's signature suspension front and rear suspension systems with a mid-drive Bosch motor for bags of fun, both on and off-road.

Best lightweight electric road bike

The Cento1 Hybrid uses a rear hub motor to keep the weight down, helping to create an e-road bike that looks and rides much like a regular road bike.

Our pick of the best electric bikes

You can trust Cycling Weekly. Our team of experts put in hard miles testing cycling tech and will always share honest, unbiased advice to help you choose. Find out more about how we test.

Best Electric Hybrid bikes

Electric hybrid bikes are the fastest selling style. Their flat bars, usually wide tyre, and commute friendly fittings - such as mudguard mounts and rack mounts - make them extremely practical machines. 

The motor can be housed in the rear hub, or at the cranks, and the torque will vary - low torque models offer a natural pedalling assistance, but high torque versions will move off the lights more quickly.

The best hybrid e-bike overall

The Turbo Vado is commute ready thanks to fenders and a rear rack

Specialized Turbo Vado 4.0

Our expert review:

Specifications

Reasons to buy, reasons to avoid.

A fun ride that’s great in urban environments but also provides a confidence-inspiring ride on rougher terrain is what the Specialized Turbo Vado is all about. 

If you're after a bike that is fully integrated with lights, fenders and rack (27kg capacity) as well as security (on the App & removable battery using a key), then this represents a straight forward choice. Only the weight, and to a lesser degree cost, need consideration.

We found the 70Nm/250W custom-tuned motor applies power seamlessly and powerfully as soon as you push down on the pedals. Range is excellent too -  95-130km / 60-80 miles should be easily attainable using the default settings of "Sport' and '50% power'. There is an Eco mode as well as Turbo, so if you're careful you can expect much greater range.

It is a heavy machine at 60lbs/ 27kg, so not easy to lift, so anyone needing to navigate steps in or out of the bike's storage place will need to take this into consideration, but aside from that we found the Specialized Vado Turbo to be a joy to ride.

Read more: Specialized Turbo Vado 4.0 electric bike review

The best value hybrid e-bike

Ribble Hybrid AL e looks just like a regular hybrid

Ribble Hybrid AL e

The Ribble Hybrid AL e is a road-going hybrid bike that’s equally at home on gravel paths and trails, with a comfortable and confidence-inspiring upright riding position, so great for returning or newbie riders.

For us, we think the bike is one of the best looking hybrids we've ever come across, with the design hiding away the motor incredibly well, although we were a little sad that adjusting the seat post left behind scratch marks. The fully loaded package includes fenders (mudguards), lights and a rear rack making it perfect as a daily commuter or for ditching the car when going to the store, although we did find these a little rattily on test.

The Ebikemotion motor delivers its power smoothly and efficiently and offers long-range in between charges, making the Ribble far more than just an A to B bike. 

Understandably it doesn't perform in the same way as the Canyon Grail:ON in terms of fast and tight torque, but tap along and it will tick over nicely, taking the top off any strenuous rides. 

With all the added extras as standard and classy looks, the Ribble Hybrid AL e is a great electric bike for the money.

Read more: Ribble Hybrid AL e electric bike full review

Ride1Up Roadster V2 is ready for the city streets

Ride1Up Roadster V2

We absolutely loved zooming around on the speedy Ride1Up Roadster V2 with its five levels of power assist. If you're anything like us and are more used to training and racing on standard road bikes it can easily become your guilty pleasure - it's fantastic fun to ride. 

The bike was so quiet, even on level 5, convincing onlookers that our tester had to be some kind of super hero to ride so fast up 15 per cent climbs. The only downside - in common with other e-bikes that only assist when you're pedalling - was where there was a requirement for a hill start, the cranks had to be turned over in order to get the motor to engage, creating a pregnant pause at the lights, before vavavooming off.

The claimed 24mph maximum assisted speed (in the US) needs input from the pedals to reach on the flats, but without a doubt it's noticeable downhill, where other bikes, such as the Wilier Cento1Hy Ultegra Di2 e-bike auto assist would cut out and slow you down. 

This extra speed also puts the bike into a class 3 e-bike, meaning that it doesn't meet EAPC rules in the UK , but that's by the by as US brand Ride1Up doesn't currently ship there. 

If you are in a country lucky enough to be shipped to: the US, Canada and Mexico, then it's a great option and one that has a very high fun-to-dollar ratio. 

Ride1Up is a direct-to-consumer brand - check out the Roadster V2 on its website here .

Read more: Ride1Up Roadster V2 full review

Canyon Precede:ON CF 9 ST boasts automatic gear changes

Canyon Precede:ON CF 9 ST electric bike

The   Canyon Precede:ON is an efficient automatic transmission city bike that performs well in multi-terrain settings whether for utility or for leisure purposes thanks to a powerful motor and control panel. 

With built-in accessories such as lights, mudguards, rack and kickstand all the trappings are there to make for a comfortable ride with style straight out the box.  All these add ons however do make it one of the heaviest e-bikes on the market, even heavier than the Specialized Turbo Vado. 

We really loved the Canyon Grail: On and it's great to see the Precede:ON also be kitted with the Bosch Performance Line CX motor, although ideally we would love to see a little more juice in the battery to support the other impressive spec. 

With everything you need straight out the box, including navigation system and lights, it's the easiest way to swap driving/ public transport for a bike, but it is at the higher end price tag wise.  There are a couple of models to choose from, which also takes the cost down a touch, but with a six year guarantee, it could be a savvy investment. 

The only other point to note is that Canyon has a direct sales model, so you'll have to buy directly from the brand here . 

Read more: Canyon Precede:ON CF 9 ST electric bike full review

Giant FastRoad E+ Pro 2 electric bike

The Giant Fastroad E+ Pro is another road-going hybrid bike with flat handlebars to promote a comfortable ride position for even the rustiest of riders, in fact we enjoyed riding this great electric hybrid road bike so much we gave it a Cycling Weekly Editor's Choice Award. 

The tires provide plenty of squish and the ability to go lightly off-road. However on test we found the aluminium frame and fork quite stiff, which will suit those used to a traditional road bike’s feel and riders looking for a speedy commute, but worth bearing in mind if you’re used to a softer hybrid feel.

We really liked the bike's integration of the battery, which can often be a design factor forgotten about on hybrid bikes. We were also really impressed to see the spec on the FastRoad, with hydraulic disc brakes and quality Shimano shifting, with a compact chainset and wide range cassette at the rear to provide plenty of gears for the hills all making an appearance. 

All in all, we think it's a great electric hybrid bike for a fair price that will have a lot of appeal to lots of different riders.  

Read more: Giant FastRoad E+ Pro 2 electric bike full review

Best Electric Folding Bikes

Folding electric bikes are practical if you have a train journey forming part of your trip or are low on space. Being small, the battery and motor can represent a large percentage of the weight, so the focus is often on reducing this as much as possible. 

Mileage on folding bikes is often low, since they're typically used to ride to and from train stations, so battery range isn't always a major consideration. 

If you are considering going for a folder, you might find our buying guide page dedicated to helping you find the best folding bikes a useful read. 

The best electric folding bike overall

Gocycle G4 folding e-bike is easily portable once folded

Gocycle G4i Folding Electric Bike

The G4i is a solid choice for a commuter, with the option to add many accessories such as mudguards (fenders), a front and rear pannier rack, integrated lights, lock holster and a travel case. 

The design folds in half, so that you can push it on its wheels rather than needing to carry it, or you can fully fold it into a compact package. There's built-in rear suspension, concealed cabling and a fully enclosed drivetrain.

It features a discreetly integrated USB port on the handlebar, enabling owners to charge their phone or other small devices from the bike’s battery when not in use - although we found the quality of the integrated phone mount didn't quite match that of the bike itself. The same goes for the LED display, which we found to be rather basic - although the information it provides is useful.

It's also likely to be pretty low-maintenance given that the drivetrain is completely enclosed. This makes sense, given that commuting year round usually means cycling in the wet at some point. The G4i utilizes a Shimano Nexus 3 speed internally geared hub. With 1” of elastomer suspension and 2.35” wide tires, it is one of the more comfortable small wheelers. Single-sided wheel attachment means you don’t even have to remove the wheel, should you puncture one of the 20” wheels.

The 500W (250W in the UK/EU) G4 electric motor and 375Wh Lithium-ion battery is claimed to provide a range of up to 80km (50mi), but the most we managed to get out of it was just 44km (27mi). To be fair, that was in one of the more 'assisted' modes and we always had the daytime running lights on - and the city of Bath is well known for its brutally steep hills.

The bike is available from 17.6kg / 38.8lbs. However, as the weight is centred low on the frame, this at least makes the ride more stable. The folding mechanism has been improved since previous versions and can be quickly collapsed into a small package - Gocycle says this can be done in as little as ten seconds; we found it was closer to 20.

Read more: Gocycle G4i electric folding bike full review

Tern  Vektron S10 electric folding bike has built-in racks as standard

Tern Vektron electric folding bike

Tern has numerous folding bike options, with the electric model options also growing in the fleet. The Tern Vektron S10 features 20-inch wheels and a 400-watt battery that can power you for 40 to 90 miles, depending on how much you use the assist.

We haven't tested this version, but highly rated the non-electric Tern Verge X11 and believe that you won't be disappointed in this electric cargo model. 

To help the rider find the perfect fit, the stem and saddle are adjustable, making it a good interchangeable option for the whole family, from 4'10" to 6'5". Coming with an integrated rack, compatibility with child seats is a breeze as no additional adaptors are required.

Its integrated rack will be fantastically useful, but will add to the already quite large folded down package size, so if it's stowaway capabilities you're after, you might be better off with the Brompton Electric Folding bike option. 

The bike boasts dynamo powered lights, alongside hydraulic disc brakes and highly regarded Shimano Deore groupset. The high spec does push the price up though, and weighing 22.5kg /48.7Ibs makes it a fairly hefty folder, and a limited one at that. 

The best lightweight electric folding bike

The Brompton Electric P Line has a titanium rear triangle to save weight

Brompton Electric P Line

Brompton has had the Electric C Line in its range for a while. The Electric P Line takes the same electric drive tech, but packages it in a lighter weight model thanks to the titanium rear triangle in place of steel, dropping the weight to a claimed 34lb. 

The removeable battery pack in a backpack makes the bike easier to carry than that headline weight would suggest as well. It's easy to clip it back onto the frame when you're ready to roll but, as with the standard Brompton, the high foldability remains, making the Electric P Line easy to store.

The Electric P Line has Brompton's clever four-speed gearing system. It comes with an ingenious two-piece derailleur which has been designed to fit inside the narrow fold - one part has a spring mechanism with one jockey wheel that is mounted and tucked under the chain stay, and the second part is a fixed chain tensioner that’s mounted below the rear drop out. 

We did find however that the rear derailleur was a little fiddly to adjust and we'd have liked a smaller bottom gear, but both are relatively minor issues.

Best Electric Road and Gravel Bikes

The best electric road bikes will favour low weight. The expectation is that at times you might exceed the 25kph legal e-bike limit stipulated by many countries, and at that point, you'll want a lightweight bike. The motor will often be low torque, which makes the assistance feel more natural. 

Hub based motors are becoming increasingly common in this category. They keep the weight low, and also allow the chassis to look almost identical to a non-assisted bike. 

Ribble's Endurance SL E tips the scales at under 27lbs

Ribble Endurance SL e

With geometry matching that of the Ribble Endurance SL Disc , the Ribble Endurance SL e gains a motor and battery, making it a great option for riders looking for subtle performance enhancement.

As with its non-electric equivalent, the Ribble Endurance SL e was also awarded a Cycling Weekly Editor's Choice award, mostly due to its low overall weight, spec and incredibly subtle integration of the motor and battery. 

On hills the bike was fantastic at giving us a much needed boost in a natural and smooth linear delivery, but on the flat the legal e-bike speed limit of 15mph for the UK (where the bike was tested) did hold this otherwise great electronic bike back.

We felt that the location of the charge point on top of the bottom bracket was a little vulnerable, so it's important to double check it's covered up, particularly in wet conditions 

The other slight gripe was the position of the power on button on the top tube. Once it's on it's on, but trying to locate it does mean taking your eyes off the road for a couple of seconds, which isn't ideal. 

With a similar profile to the Wilier Cento1HY Ultegra Di2 e-bike, but kitted out with the lower price point, yet highly respected, Shimano 105 groupset, the Ribble Endurance SL e could save you half the money. 

Read more: Ribble Endurance SL e full review

Specialized S-Works Turbo Creole SL benefits from a full acrbon frameset

Specialized S-Works Turbo Creo SL

The Specialized S-works Turbo Creo is the brand's first venture into the world of road e-bikes and it is not a disappointing one. If you're able to look past the eye-watering price tag, you will be getting all the pros of a road bike but with a bit of, as Specialized puts it, 'oomph'.

This beautiful bike gets the same FACT 11r frame as the S-Works Roubaix , which means it already has a naturally racy feel, and thanks to its super lightweight construction, means that it's happy to be ridden without any assistance at all. 

When taking advantage of the power, Specialized's own SL1.1 motor delivers smooth assistance to your ride and doesn't have the surges of acceleration you may find in some other e-bikes. That and its impressive battery life, which we found to be one of the longest on test, means that you do get a truly excellent e-bike. 

It's a bit like the F1 of e-bikes as it comes with a lot of technical integration, such as the ability to connect to its own app and dial in the motor for your style of riding. This is really helpful when using the bike to help with training and ensuring that the motor only kicked in once the tester was at a certain speed/ wattage. 

The good news is that there is a spectrum of the Specialized Turbo Creo with the SL Comp E5 available for nearly a third of the price. You do lose some of the spec of course, but both are still great options. 

Read more: Specialized S-Works Turbo Creo SL full review

The best electric bike for off-road riding

The Cannondale Topstone Neo Carbon 3 and its signature Lefty fork

Cannondale Topstone Neo Lefty 3

The   Cannondale Topstone Neo Lefty 3 is an electric gravel bike - that means it blends drop handlebars with burly tires and suspension, so it's designed for on and off-road riding. 

Running on 650b wheels keeps the rear end tight and nimble for almost any terrain, although this is an area where you might consider a future upgrade as the WTB ST i23 rims don't quite match the capability of the rest of the bike. It'll still shock you with its power delivery (hold on to your hats), but the looks are best described as an acquired taste.

It'll leave you in a similar giggly mess as the Canyon Grail:On CF 8 eTap does, just pure grin inducing fun on any ride. In fact, on test it proved to be a bit of a handful, and possibly provides too wild a ride for a lot of riders. If you can learn to love the looks, and tame the beast of the torque you honestly will struggle for more fun on two wheels.  

This bike is unrivalled in its class in terms of motor performance while the suspension adds another layer of capability to the package and blurs the gravel/MTB divide even further.

Read more: Cannondale Topstone Neo Lefty 3 full review

The best lightweight e-bike for road riding

Wilier Cento1 Hybrid Ultegra Road E-Bike has a concealed battery and hub motor

Wilier Cento1 Hybrid Ultegra Di2 e-bike

Gaining a much-deserved Editor's Choice award, the Wilier Cento1 Hybrid  is the e-bike for the road riders who still want the feel of a race bike. The Cento1 Hybrid is a good looking lightweight machine, which will assist you up those tough climbs, with plenty of power on tap.

On test, we found the supporting ebikemotion system, which is smartphone and PC app friendly, a doddle to use, with automatic syncing to Strava . 

Some riders will love the automatic assistance, as it will immediately kick in when the going gets tough. However, this can be a pro or a con, depending on your ride assistance preference. If you would rather be the master of your own electrical deployment, then you might find the auto-assist a tad frustrating and just a little over torqued. 

It's not the cheapest of bikes by any stretch, and the Ribble SL e could almost go toe to toe, but the Wilier is the no compromise option, which is reflected in the price tag.

Read more: Wilier Cento1 Hybrid Ultegra Di2 e-bike full review

Electric bike buying advice

Why would you buy an electric bike.

There are a whole host of reasons why you might want to invest in one of  the best electric bikes.

Perhaps you have to travel with lots of cargo, and the added power can mean the difference between using a car or still spinning your two legs.

Or maybe you want to start commuting to work, and an electric hybrid could be a great option for helping you cover the miles, without turning up at work in a sweaty mess and in need of a shower.

The benefit is obvious: less effort = less sweat. Hauling heavy luggage is an option, and you can often even keep pace and feel more comfortable in traffic. A hybrid e-bike with a rack and fenders and you've got a seriously practical bike that can replace many a car trip or having to use public transport.

You might be recovering from injury or illness and the added boost of a motor might help you get back out there again. Or it might simply be the case that you're not as young as you once were.

It is absolute hearsay that electric bikes don't provide an exercise benefit, you do still get a workout when riding an electric bike .

Scott's Hybrid uses a mid-drive motor

Are electric bikes legal?

The biggest difference between an electric bike and a motorbike is that the e-bike can only assist its rider, its motor cannot be the sole source of power for the bike. To clarify, in order for an electric bike to be legal , in many countries it can only assist a rider up to 25km/h (that's roughly 15.5mph). This applies to most of Europe and Australia — if you live in the US, keep reading.

Outside the US the motor inside the bike can only be a maximum of 250w and cannot be operated by a throttle like you'd find on a motorbike. Which does mean you'll have to use your legs!

The rules in the US are a bit more difficult to follow as the laws can vary state to state, and federal law surrounding e-bikes may say something different again.

The Bicycle Product Suppliers Association has sought to clear up some of the confusion, slotting e-bikes into a three-class system, all of which are limited to 750-watt motors.

The laws surrounding where and who can ride which class of e-bikes also varies state to state, but the TL:DR version is class 1 and 2 are permitted anywhere bikes are allowed, and class 3 are okay on roads and in bike lanes, but not multi-use paths, and have rules surrounding helmet use and minimum rider age. Thankfully the lovely folks over at People for Bikes have a handy guide that breaks the rules up by state.

• Class 1: the motor only kicks in when the rider is pedalling and is limited to 20mph
• Class 2: The motor is limited to 20mph and can provide assistance whether or not the rider is pedalling
• Class 3: the motor provides pedal assist, is limited to 28mph and must be equipped with a speedometer.

What types of electric bike are available?

Most e-bikes come in the form of a Pedelec or pedal-assist, which monitors the input of a rider and assists as much as possible up to the region-specific top speed.

Less common are Twist-n-Go models, which allow riders to operate the input of the motor from a switch (or even a throttle). Most places classify these as a moped and you may need a licence, insurance, and a full helmet to ride them.

A hub mounted motor

What are power and torque?

The peak output of an electric bike is normally expressed in two measures.

The power output of the motor is measured in watts. Most electric bikes have a maximum continuously rated output of 250 watts, as that's the power that regulations allow in many countries. Their peak power may be higher than this - think power required to get you started from a standing start.

Torque is the turning effort that the motor can add to your own pedalling. It's measured in Newton-metres (Nm). 

Torque output varies considerably between motors. Lower priced electric hybrid bikes and many folders may have a torque output of around 40Nm. That's also the power output of the motors on some electric road bikes, where the motor is designed to add extra power to assist a fitter rider rather than o pull you up a hill.

Mid-range motors, such as are found on many electric city hybrids, and some electric road bikes typically have outputs of 50Nm to 65Nm. Electric mountain bikes and some electric gravel bikes may have torque outputs of 90Nm or more to give plenty of grunt when climbing steep off-road inclines.

Where should the motor be placed on the best electric bike?

There are really only three options for e-bike motor placement: either on the front wheel, the back wheel or the cranks.

Placing the motor at the cranks offers much better weight distribution, which makes the bike more stable — a key consideration for both road and mountain bikes.

Hub based motors, found in the rear wheel, are usually lighter, so you're more likely to find them on electric road bikes. Motors in the front wheel are a lot less common, but you may find them on some hybrid e-bikes and folders.

Most motors are now placed around the bottom bracket for a better distribution of weight

How far do the best electric bikes go?

Another consideration worth thinking about is electric bike batteries .

Generally speaking, like motors, you get what you pay for. No battery will have infinite power, or be totally invisible, even on the best electric bike - but the more you spend the longer the range/ the more subtle its placement.

Battery capacity is measured in both watts (watt-hours, Wh) or amps (amp-hours, Ah). In most cases, an e-bike's battery capacity lies between 250Wh-600Wh or 7-10Ah.

Typically, you should get around 800 charge cycles from the best electric bike lithium-ion battery before you'll need to replace it.

How far you can go on a single charge depends on range of factors, including the terrain, but a rule of thumb you can expect a riding range of anywhere between 25 and 75 miles of run time on a full charge. Although be warned, the more assistance the bike gives, the more power it will draw from the battery.

Here, a 9ah battery is hidden in the seat

What components do the best electric bikes have?

E-bikes do have slightly different components to standard bikes, the obvious ones are the battery and motor.

In terms of motors, the big names are Bosch and Shimano. Shimano Steps was the first e-bike specific groupset from the Japanese giant and it features a mid-drive electric motor, as well as integrated electric shifters and a torque sensor to smooth out the ride a little. 

Bosch is becoming a big name in the e-bike world

Bosch has really embraced the electric bike market and its range of eleven different motors offers a variety of power assistance depending on how much you're willing to spend and the type of riding you're doing. Its models have motors geared to more leisurely riding, more performance-oriented cycling or cargo moving applications.

Other brands such as Fazua, TQ and Mahle ebikemotion are common on lightweight e-road bikes, and these systems have done well when reviewed, so come recommended.  Budget electric bikes often use Bafang motors.

Most electric road bikes will come with a normal groupset

The best electric bikes are likely to come specced with some form of hydraulic disc brakes. The added speed and weight of an e-bike will definitely warrant the extra stopping power.

Other areas that can differ are tires, which tend to be fatter, even on the road bike options, anywhere between 32mm and 40mm of rubber is most common on the hybrid options. The extra wide tires will help absorb the impacts of the heavier frame as well as providing more grip and stopping power to balance the extra weight and speed.

The more expensive, lightweight carbon road electric bikes do now come with leaner 28m tires, perfect for keeping up on the club run.

Paul started writing for Cycling Weekly in 2015 and since then he’s reviewed hundreds of bikes and thousands of other pieces of cycling equipment. He’s been cycling for a lot longer than that though and his travels by bike have taken him all around Europe and to California. He’s been riding gravel since before gravel bikes existed too, riding a cyclocross bike through the Chilterns and along the South Downs.

Paul reviews both bikes and equipment for Cycling Weekly and has 40 years of riding under his belt across a variety of disciplines including road riding, commuting, a self-supported Land's End to John o' Groats trip, XC mountain biking and several Polaris Challenge two-day events. Naturally for a reviewer he loves bike and kit design and has even fillet brazed a couple of framesets himself.

How we test

Where we've been able to link to a review, it means that we've put the bike through its paces. This means that we've ridden it over varying terrain and distances to assess it's performance across a range of factors. For e-bikes this typically means that we'll have considered the quality of the motor and battery, from ease of use to charging time and range, while with regards to folding e-bikes we'll have also tested the folding mechanism for ease of use as well as the general suitability of the bike for commuting purposes. 

Like regular bikes, we'll also consider the ride quality and the choice of components and how they impact key areas such as comfort, gear range and braking.

Where we haven't yet had the chance to review an item, we're still confident in recommending it as one of the best, because we either know the brand really well, and have probably tested another product or the previous version and can still happily recommend it as one of the best. 

Brompton's P Line features a titanium rear triangle, and is offered as a lighter sub-10kg option to the original all steel Brompton, now called the C line, which will weigh in between 24.7 and 26.6lbs /11.2 and 12.1kg. During our testing we really noticed the difference, and while 22lbs / 10kg is still a fair amount to carry around for longer periods, the reduction in weight did make the P Line altogether easier to pick up and take with us.

Like all Bromptons it's nicely put together with umpteen clever little design hacks. We really liked the saddle up, roll-ability, not offered on previous P Lines, that allowed us to easily wheel it around a station concourse via the saddle and maneuver it around commuters during the rush to the train.

The four-speed gearing system is just as clever. It comes with an ingenious own brand two-piece derailleur which has been designed to fit inside the narrow fold - one part has a spring mechanism with one jockey wheel that is mounted and tucked under the chain stay, and the second part is a fixed chain tensioner that’s mounted below the rear drop out. We did find however that the rear derailleur was a little fiddly to adjust and we'd have liked a smaller bottom gear, but both are relatively minor issues.

All told, we found the new P Line to be more practical, more 'pickupable', more maneuverable than before, which truly makes it one of the best folding bikes out there. 

Get The Leadout Newsletter

The latest race content, interviews, features, reviews and expert buying guides, direct to your inbox!

Hannah is Cycling Weekly’s longest-serving tech writer, having started with the magazine back in 2011. She has covered all things technical for both print and digital over multiple seasons representing CW at spring Classics, and Grand Tours and all races in between.

Hannah was a successful road and track racer herself, competing in UCI races all over Europe as well as in China, Pakistan and New Zealand.

For fun, she's ridden LEJOG unaided, a lap of Majorca in a day, won a 24-hour mountain bike race and tackled famous mountain passes in the French Alps, Pyrenees, Dolomites and Himalayas. 

She lives just outside the Peak District National Park near Manchester UK with her partner, daughter and a small but beautifully formed bike collection. 

All that glitters may not be gold, but silver doesn't half look good on a bike

By James Shrubsall Published 10 April 24

Patrick Casey got his chance to ride the Hell of the North after going through the Red Bull Junior Brothers programme

By Adam Becket Published 10 April 24

How do electric bikes work and do you have to pedal one?

By Paul Norman Last updated 26 May 23

Useful links

• Tour de France
• Giro d'Italia
• Vuelta a España

Buyer's Guides

• Best road bikes
• Best gravel bikes
• Best smart turbo trainers
• Best cycling computers
• Editor's Choice
• Bike Reviews
• Component Reviews
• Clothing Reviews
• Contact Future's experts
• Terms and conditions
• Privacy policy
• Cookies policy
• Advertise with us

Cycling Weekly is part of Future plc, an international media group and leading digital publisher. Visit our corporate site . © Future Publishing Limited Quay House, The Ambury, Bath BA1 1UA. All rights reserved. England and Wales company registration number 2008885.

The best e-mountainbike of 2023 – The biggest group test yet:⁠ 30 e-mountainbikes head-to-head

30 hot and trendy e-mountainbikes, 26 brands and 12 motor systems go head-to-head in our biggest e-mountainbike group test yet. Our search for the best e-mountainbike of 2023 held many surprises, providing exciting insights and an unprecedented market overview. We cover everything you need to know about buying an ebike and finding out which is the best e-mountainbike for you.

Table of content

What must the best e-mountainbike of 2023 be capable of, what type of e-mountainbiker are you, our expansive e-mountainbike test field: 30 of the most exciting e-mountainbikes on the market, the motor systems of the e-mountainbikes on test, their features, and functions at a glance.

• How and where did we test the e-mountainbikes?

Our e-mountainbike group test in numbers

What should you look for when buying an e-mountainbike.

• Tops and flops from our 2023 e-mountainbike group test

An overview of all e-mountainbikes in our huge 2023 group test

The best emtb of 2023: the orbea wild, our best buy tip: the radon deft, more exciting recommendations.

Have you ever thought about the countless dials and gauges in the cockpit of an aircraft when you last flew away on holiday? The current e-mountainbike market is similarly complex with its sheer mass of products, misleading promises and supposed innovations. Before you know it, you’ll have lost your bearings, and making the right purchase decision is almost impossible – if you make one at all. Finding the right e-mountainbike to suit your needs is more challenging than ever. And nothing is more frustrating than investing your hard-earned money in the wrong bike, which may look good or seem like a bargain but doesn’t meet your own demands and intended use, or simply doesn’t perform reliably.

Long story short: we literally worked our a**** off for months on end to conduct and compile the biggest and most diverse e-mountainbike group test ever. The result is a comprehensive and detailed market overview containing all the most important information, exciting insights and, above all, clear buyer’s advice. As you read these lines, we’re not just toasting on the completion of this huge project – spanning 202 A4 pages – but also celebrating our 10th anniversary as E-MOUNTAINBIKE magazine. And if we’ve learned one thing during these last 10 years, then it’s the fact that data from spec sheets and geometry tables can’t be taken at face value, revealing little about the overall performance and functionality of the bike. Ultimately, it is the cohesive performance of the bike as a whole that really counts out on the trail.

For this group test, we had a clear goal in mind: to create an all-encompassing market overview and comprehensive buyer’s guide, not just to make comparisons of similar models, but also to open the doors to a broad classification. To this end, we had 30 e-mountainbikes with 12 different motor systems compete against each other, once again demonstrating the variety and vast number of combination possibilities offered by today’s eMTB market. Different battery concepts, range extenders, custom software solutions and specially developed apps, accessory integration, myriad geometries and components… we could go on forever. But instead, we’ll focus on the essentials and tell you what to look for when buying an e-mountainbike, what really counts, and how to find the right bike for you.

There are many misconceptions, false assumptions, and misunderstandings about what makes a good e-mountainbike. Those who aren’t properly equipped with the right information will shop according to criteria like the best motor, the largest battery, and fall for seductive marketing hype without asking themselves what it is they actually need. In our annual reader survey – which is considered the largest and most representative survey in the e-mountainbike industry – over 12,000 loyal readers answer up to 90 questions, providing us with hard facts and figures about what it is that you really want. Thanks to this data, we don’t just know how, what, and how long you ride, but also what your experiences have been, what you’re interested in, and what makes you tick. This allows us to tailor our test field as well as our test criteria perfectly to your needs. By the way, it just so happens to be time for our 2023 reader survey and we would appreciate your feedback very much! It allows us to continue driving the industry forward and not just know exactly what you want to read, but also ride in the future.

The best e-mountainbike is made up of a combination of good components, geometry, and kinematics, with a suitable motor and software ecosystem. A chain is only as strong as its weakest link – and this also applies to e-mountainbikes. It’s not isolated parameters but the harmonious interaction of all components that matters. Of course, the design, practical accessories, available service network, and detailed solutions also play a key role. Many reviewers will judge a bike based on a short test ride or on spec sheets and geometry tables. But not us, which is why the future of our jobs is secure: AI can’t test bikes and fit them into the overall context – or have you seen ChatGPT ride the trails?

The best e-mountainbike of 2023 can cater to supposedly contradicting use cases and needs, making it the ultimate all-rounder for every type of trail and riding style. It must excel on the trails with intuitive handling, providing a balanced combination of agility and composure, while being a blast to ride. It must perform equally well on epic rides and long climbs, providing sufficient long-distance comfort, efficient yet comfortable suspension, as well as easy-to-modulate yet powerful electronic assistance. The best all-rounder also provides a pleasant user experience with high-quality details. This includes a wide range of software and connectivity solutions, and guided help with the setup or service. Variable battery concepts and the option of configuring the motor output to your needs also provides obvious advantages. Does it sound utopian to combine all this into one bike? It does. Fortunately, however, there are a few e-mountainbikes that can do all this, making them great investments that we wouldn’t hesitate to recommend to our best friends. It also goes without saying that while the best overall e-mountainbike of 2023 is the best choice for the majority of our readers, some of you have very specific requirements, which is why you might be better off with one of the specialists in our test field. Not to worry, though, thanks to our holistic approach and personalised buyer’s guide everyone will find a bike that suits them and their requirements in this group test.

Before we dive into this group test in Turbo mode, it’s important to know what you need and demand. If you need help with that, you should check out our interactive buyer’s guide . By answering a few simple questions, it will help you make the right decision, providing you with specific bike recommendations along with a selection of other articles that you might find interesting and helpful.

As part of our mega group test, we had 30 current e-mountainbikes from 26 different brands compete head-to-head in a direct comparison. The test field includes as many as 12 different motor systems, some of which provide double the torque compared to other candidates – at least on paper ;). We’ve got everything from 40 to 95 Nm, packaged in vastly different concepts. But don’t fall for the trap of being blinded by the figures. There are enormous differences between how the power is delivered, in which situations, and whether all the power can be transferred to the trail! The differences in battery capacity are just as big, ranging from just 250 Wh to a whopping 800 Wh. However, more capacity doesn’t automatically mean more range. As with EVs, different motors consume electricity at different rates and their respective efficiency must also be considered, which in turn depends on the rider, their riding style, and cadence. Among the 30 e-mountainbikes, we also included 9 of the latest generation Light-eMTBs to shake up the field. This also explains the massive weight difference of over 11 kg between the heaviest and lightest bike on test. The lightest ones tip the scales at just 16 kg, but whether they perform well on the trail is a different matter.

The brands aren’t shy about charging for the rapid pace of e-mountainbike development with the most expensive bike on the test costing a staggering € 15,999. That’s easily the same as a new compact car. Therefore, it’s all the more important to know whether you’re investing your money in the right place. But don’t worry, the test field includes a wide price range, starting at € 6,699. The best part is that certain bikes are on par with more expensive models in terms of riding fun and performance, though some cost twice as much. However, if you find the prices are still too high, don’t stop reading, because most findings and tips are universally applicable and we’re already back on the trails, conducting our budget eMTB group test, which will be coming soon.

Isolated specs and figures say little about the character and stand-out traits of an e-mountainbike. As such, we’ll give you a brief introduction to every bike in this group test along with the table above, providing a rough overview of our test field. Let’s start with a classic among e-mountainbikes: The Specialized Turbo Levo Expert is undoubtedly one of the most popular e-mountainbikes on the market, pioneering integration and holistic development since the first generation was introduced in 2015. This hasn’t changed with the latest generation, which was launched in 2021. Specialized consider the bike as whole, not just developing a frame, but also their own motor and software to go with it, which offers clear advantages in their interaction. That said, the competition doesn’t sleep. The young and still relatively unknown boutique brand Forestal have a similarly holistic approach to development. If you haven’t heard of the Andorran brand, you’ll know what’s up the moment you catch a glimpse of the futuristic looking Forestal Siryon Diōde at the latest. The Light-eMTB relies on a custom BAFANG EonDrive motor and in-house software. On top of that, they’ve integrated a touch display – yes, you read that right – into the top tube. Is this what the future of e-mountainbikes looks like?

The test field includes numerous e-mountainbikes featuring exclusive or unique motor systems. GIANT also rely on their own GIANT SyncDrive Pro 2 motor for the Trance X Advanced E+ LTD , which is based on the Yamaha PW-X3 and combined with an 800 Wh battery – the largest in the test field. Moreover, GIANT resort to the electronic FOX Live Valve suspension, but does it offer any advantages on an e-mountainbike? Without a doubt, the Berria Mako Hybrid GT LTD is one of the underdogs on test. The golden e-mountainbike of the Spanish brand is the only contestant to rely on the exotic Polini E-P3+ MX motor, producing a hefty 90 Nm of torque and paired with a large display in the top tube. But does the overall concept work and can it transfer all that power to the trail? Only the Panasonic GX Ultimate motor in the FLYER Uproc X 9.50 can put out even more torque with a peak of 95 Nm. In addition, it relies on the so-called FIT system, which offers countless connectivity features. Off to a good start for a good test result?

Most of the e-mountainbikes on test hedge their bets on the proven Bosch Smart System. Bosch don’t just offer one of the world’s best service networks, but they’ve recently also started offering bike companies different combinations of displays, remotes, and batteries. The Orbea WILD M-LTD takes full advantage of this, not just allowing you to customise the componentry spec in Orbea’s MyO configurator, but also letting you choose between two battery sizes. We opted for the smaller 625 Wh version. In addition, the WILD relies on the limited edition CX Race motor, which predominantly offers advantages on technical climbs due to the way it’s tuned. The KTM Macina Prowler Exonic – which is KTMs big hitting e-mountainbike – and the Mondraker Crafty Carbon XR LTD also rely on the more powerful Race motor. Check out the individual reviews to find what advantages this offers, if any, and whether it allows them to pull away from the competition.

While the Moustache Samedi 29 Game 11 relies on the proven Bosch system, the company developed their own shock, promising magical levels of grip and a ride like a flying carpet. The RADON DEFT 10.0 doesn’t claim to be a flying carpet, but it can come right to your front door, nonetheless. At just € 6,799, the direct-to-consumer brand offer a well-specced package that surprised us all in the group test. The UNNO Mith Race will let you stand out from the crowd with its extravagant look. However, it doesn’t just look like a designer piece, the integration of the Bosch system is equally refined. Thanks to the large swingarm and asymmetrical design, the Ibis Oso features an equally striking and unique look. It also comes with practical features such as an integrated light. The Cannondale Moterra Neo Carbon LT1 combines the best of both worlds, specced with a coil shock as well as practical accessories such as lights. The two newly introduced FOCUS siblings, the FOCUS SAM² 6.9 and the FOCUS JAM² 6.9 , also took part in the group test. Besides many similarities such as the removable batteries and integration, they’re targeted at very different use cases due to their geometries and spec. However, being overweight seems to run in the family as they’re both on the heavier end of the spectrum, weighing in at 27.1 and 26 kg respectively. Does that matter?

The two FOCUS representatives have brought light reinforcement, because the German bike brand can fall back on a new Light-eMTB in their portfolio. The slender FOCUS JAM² SL 9.9 weighs 19.3 kg and produces 60 Nm of torque via its FAZUA Ride 60 motor. FOCUS entered the Light-eMTB segment many years ago and are considered pioneers in this field. We found out whether this has resulted in a mature product. The ebike pioneers Haibike also rely on the FAZUA drive system for their new Haibike LYKE CF SE . The popular brand aim to take on the competition with the bike’s sporty look and innovative approach to the integration of the motor. Will they succeed? American brand Pivot have also chosen to integrate the FAZUA system into their Pivot Shuttle SL Pro X01 . In doing so, they weren’t just early to the party, theirs was the first Light-eMTB available on the market with this motor. For our group test, we chose the model configured for trail performance instead of the top-end version. As usual, it relies on the firm DW-Link rear suspension and high-end components.

The Thömus Lightrider E Ultimate isn’t just specced with the weakest motor on test at 40 Nm, but also the smallest battery with a capacity of 250 Wh. But it lives up to its name with a weight of just 16.1 kg, and there’s no denying its cross-country genes. For obvious reasons, the prize for integration goes to the SCOTT Lumen eRIDE 900 SL . It doesn’t break the scales with its featherweight 16 kg, but its € 15,999 price point might just break the bank. This makes it both the lightest and most expensive bike on test, relying on the inconspicuous TQ HPR 50 motor. As the name suggests, the SIMPLON Rapcon Pmax TQ features the same system, but it’s packed into a long travel frame with a focus on the descents. Its analogue sibling has already shown what the platform is capable of, having been crowned the best enduro bike of 2022 by our sister magazine ENDURO. The Trek Fuel EXe 9.9 XX1 AXS also relies on the 50 Nm TQ system, but the EXe is less gravity-oriented than the SIMPLON. The US mega-brand were the exclusive launch partner of the TQ HPR 50 motor, and they were significantly involved in its development. In doing so, Trek have garnered some advantages that the competition has no access to. Does that make it better? As you can see, very different concepts rely on the same motor system. This raises an interesting question: does the motor suit all concepts equally well?

The Orbea Rise M-Team is considered a bridge between the Light- and full-power e-mountainbikes because it has a conventional Shimano EP801 motor that’s been throttled from 85 Nm to 60 Nm, as indicated by the RS suffix. In addition, the Rise has a large 540 Wh internal battery, which you can increase to a whopping 792 Wh with the optional range extender. This is the second largest battery capacity in the entire test field, and that’s in combination with a more economical motor compared to the standard EP8!

All other Shimano powered bikes in the group test come with the standard EP8 model, but Shimano leave it up to the respective brands to decide which battery they want to use, which allows them to take very different approaches. The Pivot Shuttle LT Team XTR subscribes to the “more travel, more battery and more fun” school of thought. With a generous 756 Wh, it has the largest internal battery of the Shimano driven bikes, promising a long range. The ROTWILD R.X735 ULTRA has a slightly smaller yet still big 720 Wh battery, and thanks to their convenient removal system, you can swap it out in the blink of an eye. Does that make it the trail king?

The Santa Cruz Heckler MX X01 AXS RSV features the usual high-quality workmanship, look, and VPP rear end. It promises to be more agile on the trail thanks to the smaller 27.5″ rear wheel. But does it have what it takes to be an all-rounder? The Transition Repeater AXS Carbon and the Yeti 160E T1 are the first e-mountainbikes of the two American brands. Both bikes are designed to perform on the trail and are specced accordingly. Nevertheless, the Yeti was crowned the best all-rounder in last year’s group test. Can it build on that success and defend its title, or will it be toppled from the throne this year? The MERIDA eONE-SIXTY 975 comes factory fitted with a headlight and other practical accessories. Its build spec is very promising and it’s fairly priced, too, so it’s no wonder that it’s already secured several titles in previous group tests. The final opponent to roll into our group test is the BULLS SONIC EVO EN-SL 1 . At € 6,699, it’s the most affordable bike on test, pairing the new EP801 motor with an automatic Shimano XT Di2 drivetrain. We put the setup to the test to find out whether it provides any advantages over conventional shifting.

When buying an e-mountainbike, you don’t just decide on a bike, i.e. the frame, but also on a motor ecosystem and software, which has a significant influence on the performance and handling of your bike. Nevertheless, the drive unit can only be as good as the bike it’s in, and how well it suits your specific requirements. Do you want the battery to be permanently integrated or removable, should it be as big as possible, or would you rather a smaller capacity with the option of an external range extender? Besides that, there are numerous aspects that go far beyond the hardware of the motor, with many systems now providing a vast array of options. These include customisable or progressive support modes, additional features such as digital immobilisers with an alarm, GPS tracking, range-based navigation, assistance that’s linked to your heart rate, or gamified ride data that tracks things like airtime. There are countless options available, and they will continue to grow, so it’s good to have an overview and be aware of what you want from your bike. While newly introduced technologies are state-of-the-art, they often suffer from teething issues. Large established brands usually have a reliable and well-established service network, so you can easily get help when you’ve got trouble with your motor, but they often take fewer risks during development than smaller or more agile players might do. Fortunately, software updates can be used to expand the range of functions or remedy bugs in retrospect, even when the bike’s been in your possession for a long time.

The products offered by large, established brands are usually aimed at the masses, so they don’t necessarily meet your individual requirements. The same applies to custom solutions such as the touch display in the Forestal or the charging port integrations on the Specialized. Practical and individual solutions such as these are usually reserved for bike companies that are involved in the development of the motor instead of sourcing closed systems with technical limitations. However, custom solutions can cause durability issues or lead to difficulty in procuring spare parts. Manufacturers of bikes, components and motors must work hand in hand to offer a complete package. Due to the wide range of systems that are now available on the market, this aspect has improved greatly, increasingly allowing brands to tailor bikes to your individual needs. Nevertheless, the development of an ebike is vastly more complex than that of its analogue counterpart. The large selection of components and rapidly developing industry only serve to complicate matters even more.

That’s why it’s vital to not just consider an e-mountainbikes performance and functionality on the trail, but also its secondary aspects.

Note: with such rapid development, the market is constantly being flooded with new software updates and accessories such as range extenders. Much of it solves problems or extends the field of application. However, as we’ve seen in the past, this can also create new problems. So, we wrote this article for you based on current information as it stands in March 2023.

Below, you will find an overview of all the motor systems featured in this group test.

Smart System and CX Race – The 2023 Bosch Performance Line CX motor system

The Bosch Performance Line CX system is the top dog among the motors in our group test, featured in 10 of the 30 bikes on test. All of them rely on the Smart System, introduced in 2021, which lends the proven Performance Line CX motor a smarter infrastructure and provides a basis for upcoming features and developments. While the motor has remained largely the same, apart from a few minor hardware adjustments, the ecosystem consisting of the remotes and displays has been completely revised and the old wiring harness also gave way to a new, optimised version. Unfortunately, the Smart System upgrade isn’t backwards compatible with your old Bosch motor, though it’s become standard on new bikes.

The motor still produces 85 Nm of torque with a maximum assistance of 340% in TURBO mode. But beware: some of the bikes on test rely on the CX Race motor. It’s the twin brother of the Performance Line CX motor, just with a gym membership. Thanks to adapted software, the CX Race motor provides assistance of up to 400% with the same 85 Nm of torque. But nothing on the hardware has changed, except for slightly optimised internals.

Bosch give manufacturers the option to combine their motor with the new Bosch PowerTube battery with capacities of 750 Wh, 625 Wh or 500 Wh. All the Bosch powered bikes in our group test come with the largest battery – except the Orbea, which you’re free to configure as you please. We opted to go with a 625 Wh battery on our Orbea Wild test bike. Depending on the bike, some of the batteries are more or less easy to remove while others are permanently integrated. At 4.38 Kg, the 750 Wh PowerTube battery is one of the heaviest on test, and pushes up the system’s overall weight despite the rather light 2.79 kg motor.

The Smart System gives bike companies access to new accessories and combination options. Starting with the Bosch LED remote on the left-hand side of the handlebar. It’s quite large and exposed, and it indicates the battery level in comparatively fine 10% increments by means of classy looking illuminated bars. The colour around the Bosch logo indicates the selected support level. The buttons all offer pleasant haptics, but they could be a little bigger or further apart, because it’s easy to push the wrong button while riding.

For brands who opt against the feature-rich LED remote, Bosch offer the System Controller and Mini Remote combination. The Bosch System Controller is an LED display that integrates into the top tube, indicating the battery and support level via illuminated bars and a colourful, illuminated ring, similar to the LED remote. The Mini Remote provides a cleaner cockpit, with functionality limited to the minimum. Thanks to the few large buttons, you can reliably hit the right button, even as you’re ploughing through a rock garden shortly before a punchy climb.

Bosch also have a fitting solution for riders who don’t want to limit communication with their bike to a few LEDs. The high-quality Kiox 300 display can be mounted in different positions next to the stem, and is controlled via one of the two remotes. The new menu navigation is user friendly, and the display is easy to read while riding. There are some additional functions, too, such as navigation or location tracking by means of the Bosch ConnectModule in the motor. However, the only bike on test with the ConnectModule is the KTM Macina Prowler Exonic. Moreover, using it requires a paid subscription. On the other hand, all Bosch Smart System bikes have the eBike Lock function as standard, which allows you to lock all motor functions temporarily via the eBike Flow app as an anti-theft measure.

The Bosch eBike Flow app also provides a good overview of all functions and is intuitive to operate. In addition to a wealth of information about the system, it lets you tune the support modes according to your own preferences. If you want to use the app, you must first create an account, after which connecting it with the bike is easy to do. It gets a little trickier if several users want to access the same bike via the app. Once the bike has been registered with one account, it can no longer be accessed by another account.

Depending on the bike, you’ve got access to different support modes on the trail. With the TOUR and eMTB modes, Bosch have two dynamic modes that adapt the support to match the riding situation on the trail. The TOUR+ mode is the more efficient variant and is great for maximising your range, or as a less aggressive alternative to the eMTB mode for light riders. As you might have guessed, the CX Race variant also has a RACE mode. In general, the Bosch motor is one of the best, most efficient, and most powerful on test despite putting out “just” 85 Nm on paper. Thanks to its smooth characteristics and wide cadence range, it provides a shuttle-like feeling on the climbs and leaves the Shimano EP-8 behind despite also being rated at 85 Nm. The Panasonic, Specialized, and Polini motors can all keep up with the CX motor, but they can’t compete with its big, even more powerful CX Race sibling. On the other hand, Bosch are yet to address the annoying metallic knocking noise that the motor produces. This only occurs when the motor isn’t providing any assistance and the chain isn’t pulling on the chainring – during big compressions or when the chain is bouncing around through a rock garden, for example. While this doesn’t detract from its performance, it can get on your nerves in the long run, especially on rough trails.

The Polini E-P3+ MX motor system

The Polini E-P3+ MX system is an exotic powerhouse. In our test field, the Italian motor features in the no less exotic Berria Mako Hybrid GT, and the list of bikes that Polini supply with their system reads like a guide on the exotic plants of Borneo. With a torque output of 90 Nm, the Italian motor is one of the most powerful in the test field, capable of matching your own input by up to 400%. And all that from a motor that weighs just 2.9 kg. For those who don’t need that much power, Polini offer the 75 Nm E-P3+ motor.

For the Mako Hybrid GT on test, Berria combine the Polini motor with a custom 720 Wh Portapower battery. Polini also have two batteries of their own, one with a capacity of 550 Wh and the other with 880 Wh. Nevertheless, the Italian brand leave it to the bike companies to choose where they want to source their batteries. The integrated Portapower battery in the Berria is secured with a lock and can be easily removed. If you don’t find the battery capacity to be sufficient, you can combine it with Polini’s 252 Wh range extender, which mounts onto the bottle cage bosses. Together with the integrated 720 Wh battery, this gives you a total of 972 Wh! Unfortunately, the range extender wasn’t available for our review.

Despite its impressive power output, the Polini E-P3+ MX doesn’t make a big show of it on the Berria Mako Hybrid GT. The motor is relatively compact and the down tube housing the battery is rather slender for a full-power ebike. Berria decided to do their own thing with the large Polini colour display, integrating it into the top tube instead of attaching it to the handlebar. Although this looks nice at first glance, it’s a little rough around the edges with the two exposed screws and uneven gaps. The display isn’t quite as large as the touch display on the Forestal, though it’s much larger than the mastermind display in the Specialized Levo. Polini tried to take full advantage of the display size and squeezed in as much information as possible. However, displaying the support level, battery level, distance covered, speed, and motor map each with dynamic bars on one screen is slightly too much of a good thing.

Besides this information overload, the menu navigation isn’t the most intuitive. It doesn’t help that Polini offer 3 predefined support modes as well as two customisable modes, each of which are divided into 5 sub-modes – it will leave you scratching your head! In total, that’s 25 support modes to choose from. The custom modes can be tuned in Polini’s E-Bike app, via which you can also access the display information on your smartphone or retrieve all kinds of data about your rides and the motor. To scroll through the different support modes on the bike, you will have to get accustomed to the very peculiar remote, which makes do with just two buttons. On our Berria test bike, it’s mounted between the grip and the dropper remote, pointing downwards. To reach the button on the back, you’ve got to take your index finger from the front brake (rear brake in the UK). This results in unwanted thrills on the trail and even on forest service roads when shifting modes. Even if the remote is mounted pointing upwards, you’ve got the same problem. In general, the operation of the system isn’t exactly user-friendly with its two buttons. To switch between certain menu items, you must push both buttons simultaneously, which requires accurate timing. It’s a good thing that Polini also offer a remote with four buttons.

Riding the bike, the Polini E-P3+ MX motor is a little unpredictable, changing character depending on the support mode. In Touring mode, the motor is very restrained, unleashing its power very predictably and gently. In race mode, the motor flexes its muscles and turns from sensitive to schoolyard bully. It’s very harsh and direct as it kicks in, giving it an unnatural ride feel. The power output is relatively independent of your cadence, always providing plenty of assistance. We were also struck by how loud it is in the higher support modes.

The Panasonic GX Ultimate motor system

The Panasonic GX Ultimate is the bodybuilder amongst the motors in the test field – it’s the undisputed powerhouse of the bunch, with a peak torque output of 95 nm. It only comes specced on the FLYER Uproc X in our test field. Despite its power, the Panasonic motor doesn’t stand out from the crowd of full-power motors in terms of weight, tipping the scales at a mere 2.95 kg. In the FLYER Uproc X, it’s paired with a 750 Wh battery. Panasonic deliberately allow bike companies to use batteries from third-party suppliers.

On our test bike, the Panasonic GX Ultimate motor is controlled via components from the ebike systems suppliers FIT. Compared to most other remotes in the test field, the FIT Basic Remote on the handlebar is rather chunky and the small joystick requires some getting used to. The first time you use it, you could get a little fright from the unusual vibration feedback it provides. You can switch it off, though it certainly doesn’t leave you guessing whether you’ve pushed the button. Alternatively, Panasonic also offer in-house remotes. The Panasonic Side Colour Display Remote has a small display integrated into the remote, as the name suggests. However, this makes it slightly bigger than the not-exactly-dainty FIT Basic Remote. The display on the FLYER is also supplied by FIT and mounted in front of the stem where it’s very exposed. It has a ton of functions and display options, including some more unique features like an inclinometer and an ice warning. In combination with the FIT E-Bike Control app, the display can be adjusted according to your preferences, and even has a navigation function.

When riding the bike, the Panasonic GX Ultimate motor offers four levels of support. In addition to three classic modes, it also has a dynamic Auto mode, which claims to adjust the assistance according to the riding situation. In the highest support mode, the motor provides a good deal of support. Its power output doesn’t decrease significantly at a low cadence, giving you that shuttle feeling on forest road climbs. Due to the sustained assistance, you can easily let it push you over ledges or other obstacles in technical terrain, but it also means you’ve got to brake hard when stopping in a hurry. The Auto mode feels somewhat abrupt and unnatural on level terrain, but it comes into its own on uphill trails. Here, it offers even more precise and sensitive assistance than the highest mode, making it easier to harness its power.

The GIANT SyncDrive Pro 2 motor system

As the name suggests, the Giant SyncDrive Pro 2 motor is exclusive to GIANT and represented by a single bike in the test field, the Giant Trance X Advanced E+ Ltd. Based on the Yamaha PW-X3 motor, the GIANT drive unit delivers 85 Nm of torque with up to 400% support. The 2.75 kg motor is combined with a massive 800 Wh battery – the biggest in our test. If that still isn’t enough for you, there’s the option of a 250 Wh range extender. It mounts to the bottle cage bosses and pushes the total battery capacity to an incredible 1,050 Wh! With an internal battery capacity of 800 Wh, however, we could skip the range extender for the purposes of our review.

The interface between man and machine is taken care of by the Giant RideControl GO control unit in the top tube, paired with the minimalist RideControl Ergo 3 remote on the handlebar. The control unit isn’t a display as such, indicating the support mode as well as the battery level via 5 illuminated bars. GIANT refrain from installing an additional display on the handlebar. The inconspicuous remote sits flush against the left grip, where it’s within easy reach of your thumb. In general, the operation of the Giant SyncDrivePro2 system is quite straightforward. You’ve got three buttons to shift through the 5 support modes from Eco to Power or activate the progressive Smart Assist mode. Due to the minimalist display in the top tube, you don’t get much information, but it also saves you from having to navigate a maze of menus – the pared down functions of the remote are entirely sufficient. Those who want a little more information can access it via GIANT’s Ride Control app. The app also lets you assign the functions of the remote buttons.

On the bike, you immediately get a sense of the Giant SyncDrive Pro 2 motor’s power. While it feels significantly more powerful than the Shimano EP8, it can’t quite match the punch of the Bosch CX. It kicks in very directly in Power mode. This allows you to get back going after coming to a stop on a steep incline, but you’ve got to brace yourself in anticipation of the motor pushing you forward. In general, the drive unit doesn’t hold back and could be described as more of a ruffian amongst motors. The dynamic Smart Assist mode is significantly more hesitant, holding back longer than the comparable eMTB mode from Bosch. As a result, the Giant motor is clearly slower than Bosch powered bikes when using their dynamic modes to pull away at traffic lights, easily leaving you behind. The automatic mode also lacked the necessary grunt for technical climbs, in which case we preferred using Power mode.

The Specialized 2.2 motor system

The Specialized 2.2 system was developed in collaboration with mechatronics specialists Brose, based on the Brose Drive Mag S motor. Compared to most other brands, Specialized have acquired in-depth motor expertise over the years and want full control over the drive system. They pursue a holistic approach, developing as much as possible in house to ensure the best possible interaction of components, a better user experience, and minimal dependence on the motor manufacturers and their development pace or cycles. The Californian company go to great lengths to achieve this, employing a team of around 70 people in Cham, Switzerland, dedicated to their ebike department! Numerous reviews have shown that their efforts pay off, and the Specialized Levo is amongst the lead pack with its 2.2 motor system this year once again, but more on that later. After two years on the market, the system is now considered one of the old-timers of the test, which is particularly noticeable when looking at the proportions of the hardware – especially the area around the bottom bracket, which is relatively bulky. With a torque output of 90 Nm, the motor of the Californian brand is amongst the more powerful on test, trumped only by the 95 Nm Panasonic GX Ultimate. All that power is produced by a unit weighing 2.98 kg. With a capacity of 700 Wh, the removable battery is neither particularly large nor small. To remove it, you must loosen just one screw with the SWAT tool, which is conveniently integrated into the head tube, and you can pull the battery out of the down tube.

Specialized offer an entire ecosystem around the 2.2 motor, providing harmonious integration. The bike’s brain is integrated into the top tube and goes by the name of Mastermind. Specialized were one of the first manufacturers to integrate a display into the top tube, pioneering a whole range of bikes that have now followed suit. The small and slender colour display gives you all the relevant information you need on a ride, as well as a few fun gimmicks like your current elevation, GPS data, or the number of jumps and airtime generated – rather than big stories about your latest heroics, you get the bare facts! The Specialized Mission Control app also lets you customise the layout and data fields of the Mastermind display to suit your own preferences. Furthermore, you’re able to configure the support, maximum power and acceleration of Eco, Trail, and Turbo mode via the app. You can link the Mastermind up to a heart rate monitor or an additional bicycle computer, too. Doing so would allow you to use the Smart Control function, for example, which adjusts the support level based on your heart rate. The app is very clearly structured and using it doesn’t require a degree in computer science. The remote with which you control the system while riding is quite minimalistic, but it has all the functions you need on the trail. It is easy to use with the left thumb and provides good haptic feedback.

As already mentioned, you’ve got three support modes to choose from on the trail: Eco, Trail, and Turbo – all of which you can customise in the app. The Micro Adjust function is super practical, frequently used, and easy to activate, allowing you to fine tune the support in 10% increments. It’s great for saving battery, or keeping your effort at the perfect, sustainable level. On the way to the trailhead, the Specialized 2.2 system feels like an integrated shuttle service with its 90 Nm torque output. The motor is just as powerful as the Bosch CX Race, though a little less punchy. The support doesn’t kick in too brusquely and the power is easy to modulate. It isn’t bothered by fluctuating pedalling cadences and the generous sustained assistance, i.e. the assistance offered after you stop pedalling, is a fantastic help in getting cleanly over ledges and obstacles. This makes easy work of technical climbs. It’s positively inconspicuous on the descents, too, remaining absolutely quiet!

The maxon BIKEDRIVE AIR motor system

The BIKEDRIVE AIR motor system is maxon’s debut to the ebike market. Before the Swiss brand started supplying bike brands with motors, they helped Mars rovers cruise along on the red planet. In our group test back on planet earth, the maxon system can only be found in the Thömus Lightrider E Ultimate Light-eMTB. The relatively light 1.9 kg motor is generally still a rarity, featuring on just a handful of bikes. With a torque output of merely 40 Nm, it’s the weakest motor in the test field. The battery is permanently integrated into the down tube. Depending on your personal preference or requirements, you have the choice between a battery capacity of 250, 360 or 426 Wh. The Thömus Lightrider E Ultimate on test had a 250 Wh battery installed, for which maxon indicate 3.5 hours for a full charge. It can be paired with a 250 Wh range extender, which weighs 1.4 kg and can be mounted in the supplied maxon bottle cage. Unfortunately, it wasn’t available for our test.

The slender battery and compact, lightweight motor allow the system to be integrated relatively inconspicuously. The only thing giving the Lightrider E Ultimate away as an e-mountainbike is the hockey stick silhouette of its downtube. The motor is controlled via a minimalistic aluminium remote that matches the system’s overall look and feel well. It’s beautifully finished and one of the most inconspicuous remotes in the test field. Like the FAZUA Ring Control remote, it’s a ring-shaped control that can be pushed up and down. It’s intuitive to use and fulfils its purpose. The control unit integrated into the top tube, on the other hand, is slightly more striking than the remote. It indicates both the battery level and support mode via illuminated bars, using 8 increments for the battery. It’s not quite as refined as the TQ display, though not as rudimentary as the FAZUA LED HUB either. The control unit also provides an interface for most common bicycle computers and the maxon Connect app via Bluetooth and ANT+ LEV connectivity. This allows you to have information such as the battery level displayed on your bike computer while riding, or customise the three support modes to suit your preferences in the app.

On the bike, you’ve got three support modes to choose from: Cruise, Push, and Blast. They all offer a very natural ride feel and you can quickly forget that you’re even riding an ebike. The motor engages instantaneously as you apply pressure to the pedals, avoiding any unnatural feeling delays. Moreover, the maxon BIKEDRIVE AIR system is virtually silent – all you can hear are cowbells ringing in the distance and the crunch of your tires. Compared to the Eco mode on a full-power e-mountainbike, Blast (maxon’s highest mode) is more like a sparkler than a full-blown firework. Nevertheless, you’ll be surprised at how much assistance the motor provides on steep climbs, especially if you’ve briefly forgotten about it, which is apt to happen. That said, it’s noticeably weaker than the competition from TQ or FAZUA. Don’t think you’ll make the summit without breaking a sweat with the maxon motor – it’s more of a tailwind on steep climbs. As such, it’s really aimed at fit and active riders, not at leisurely weekend warriors with a phobia of sweat.

The TQ HPR 50 system

The TQ HPR 50 is the Bavarian tech company’s first minimal assist motor, though not their first ebike motor, and it relies on their patented harmonic pin-ring technology. It was developed in collaboration with Trek, which gave the bike brand the exclusive right to the motor for 3 months before other manufacturers such as SCOTT and SIMPLON were given the green light. At first glance, it seems like Trek use the same display as the competition, but they developed their own software and app. All HPR 50 motors are capable of putting out 50 Nm of torque with a 300-watt peak, and they’re exclusively compatible with the 360 Wh TQ battery. In the case of Trek, the battery can be removed, whereas all other brands have chosen to keep the 1800 g battery firmly integrated in the frame. Due to the compact design of the battery, bike designers can keep the downtube slender too. As a result, bikes such as the SIMPLON and Trek are difficult to distinguish from their analogue siblings, easily boasting the most discreetly integrated mid-mounted systems on test with the motor equally well hidden in the bottom bracket. If you want more range, you can stick the optional 160 Wh range extender in the bottle cage, upping the total battery capacity to 520 Wh.

The 2″ TQ display is designed to be integrated into the top tube where it is inconspicuous but clearly visible. It uses monochrome dots and rings to indicate the chosen support mode, which isn’t the most intuitive at first. The battery status is displayed via 10 small bars, each representing 10% charge. By double clicking on the button below the display, you can scroll through various data points, or switch the system on/off. You have the following data points to choose from:

• current speed in km/h
• battery level in percen
• remaining range in the current support mode
• current power output of the rider and motor in watts

The system can be controlled via a small remote, which is always attached to the left side of the handlebar. It is very unobtrusive and intuitive to use, with just two buttons. It will let you choose the support mode, activate walk mode, or turn off the assistance altogether. The remote has a pleasant feel and ergonomics due to its rubberised coating, and it provides clear feedback thanks to a distinct click. You can also adjust the motor settings and access more data via the TQ app.

Trek, on the other hand, have integrated these functions into their own app, which, above the regular scope of TQ functions, gives suggestions for the suspension setup, lets you connect to third-party sensors like the TyreWiz via Bluetooth, and has a map-based range calculator. All in one – cool! The display of the Trek is a bit more intuitive, too, showing you the support levels with 3 large bars and the battery level in %. Alternatively, you can switch the view to see your average speed and remaining range, with the range displayed in minutes or kilometres.

You have three support levels to choose from on the trail: ECO, MID and HIGH, and there’s a Walk mode too. The HPR 50 motor is by far the quietest and most natural feeling in the test field. Due to its slightly lower power output and the inconspicuous way it engages and disengages, it feels more like you’re extremely fit rather than being assisted by an electric motor. It’s only when the support is switched off that you become aware of how much help the motor has been. To unleash its full power, the motor requires a relatively high cadence, making it more likely that you’ll break into a sweat, but it suits the motor’s character. This makes it better suited to gravel road climbs than technical singletrack ascents, taking the burden out of the uphills when you ride while still keeping you fit. Compared to the rest of the test field, technical climbs require much more physical effort and conscious gear selection to maintain the required cadence for optimal power delivery. If you’re looking for something that will push you up the mountain without putting in any effort yourself, you won’t like the TQ. However, if you like sweating at least a little on the uphills and want a quiet and natural feeling bike, this might just be the perfect companion. Unfortunately, the display became defective during the test, though it’s super easy for anyone to replace once you can track down a spare.

The FAZUA Ride 60 system

The FAZUA ride 60 motor system is the second minimal assist option to come from the Munich-based company, which was recently acquired by Porsche. While the first generation from 2017 consisted of a single unit made up of the battery and motor, which you could remove from the bike, FAZUA parted ways with that design for the latest iteration, increasing the power output while they were at it. As the name suggests, the new Ride 60 delivers 60 Nm of torque, with a peak output of up to 450 watts. FAZUA also supply their own battery, which can either be permanently integrated or removable. It weighs in at 1960 grams and has a capacity of 430 Wh. While FAZUA have announced a range extender, it wasn’t yet available at the time of the test. Due to the elongated shape of the motor and the fairly wide battery, the down tubes of many of the FAZUA powered bikes on test are shaped like a hockey stick, quickly betraying them as ebikes. Haibike are the only brand that tilt the motor horizontally into the seat tube, allowing for neater integration, though this method also comes with certain compromises.

Like most brands, FAZUA integrate their LED HUB display into the top tube where it’s clearly visible. It indicates the support mode and the battery level via 5 small LEDs. As such, the battery level is divided into 5 large 20% increments, and the different colours of the support modes are difficult to read in direct sunlight. By pulling up the LED HUB you get access to a USB-C charging port.

On the left side of the handlebar, you’ll find FAZUA’s Ring Control remote. Unfortunately, it’s unlabelled, and due to the cheap feel and looks, it isn’t on par with the competition. The different functions can be controlled by pressing up, down, or inwards, towards the stem. This lets you control the support modes and activate the Walk or Boost mode.

To no-one’s surprise, FAZUA also have an app with which you can configure the support modes. They’ve tried to optimise the user experience: after an extensive questionnaire, the app will recommend the ideal support mode settings, tailored specifically to the rider. This is great for ebike beginners and all those who don’t want to waste their time by playing with the settings! If you don’t trust computers or don’t always ride in the same kind of terrain, you can also configure the support modes yourself and save them as pre-sets. You could save them as “the early bird gets the dirt”, “fetch beer” or “power hour”, for example, and call them up as needed.

For trail riding, FAZUA have already taken the creative liberty of naming the three pre-configured support modes: Breeze, River, and Rocket. They’ve also got an afterburner, officially called Boost mode, providing a brief power surge when needed. However, it takes a moment to kick in, and the duration depends on the battery status and the temperature of the motor. In ideal conditions, you’ll get up to 12 seconds of additional thrust to pass your buddies. The motor assists noticeably in Rocket mode, pushing you forward even at low cadence. The FAZUA motor is powerful enough to let you conquer technical climbs, but the Ride 60 system has a software-related issue that needs sorting out, restarting after every time you stop pedalling. So, if you stop pedalling on a climb, you’ll have a brief moment of sustained assistance before coming to a stop, or you’ll be pedalling on your own for about 1-2 seconds thereafter as it restarts. This can quickly throw you off balance in tricky terrain and is very annoying to say the least! If you find this to be a problem, you can use the app to make the motor more dynamic, which makes it kick in rather abruptly but seems to shorten the dip in power. FAZUA are already working on a solution and promise to release a software update that fixes this as soon as possible. The motor is perfectly quiet on the descents, but it is audible when pedalling, similar to the noise level of Shimano EP8 motor. Only the BAFANG motor in the Forestal is louder. The character of the FAZUA Ride 60 is much closer to a full-power system and can make easy work of the climbs. Active riders also get their money’s worth, as long as they don’t spend too much time on technical climbs, in which case the above-mentioned software bug can get frustrating. Besides that issue, we encountered several instances during our tests where the FAZUA bikes didn’t switch on. If that happens, it helps to shake the bike, recharge the battery, unplug it, or wait… Unfortunately, one of the bikes remained defective. We hope that FAZUA will get to grips with these problems soon and issue a software update to fix things. As it stands (March 2023), purchasing a FAZUA powered ebike is a gamble.

The Shimano EP8 system

The Shimano EP8 system from the Japanese component giant has been on the market since 2020 and it features on a whole range of bikes in our group test. With a torque output of 85 Nm, it isn’t the most powerful unit, though it is amongst the lightest with a motor weight of just 2.6 kg. Shimano offer two batteries for the EP8 system: one with a capacity of 504 Wh and one with 630 Wh. However, bike brands are free to work with third-party suppliers. It’s thanks to this that some of the EP8 bikes in the test field come equipped with battery capacities beyond 700 Wh.

In our test field, the EP8 motor is universally combined with Shimano’s compact SC-EM800 display. Clamped to the handlebar next to the stem, the colour display shows the battery level in 20% increments and is easy to read even in direct sunlight. It also visualises the motor’s dynamics via a moving bar, along with the speed and the current support mode. The layout in the display is very tidy with the data fields reduced to the minimum, which is very pleasant. Alternatively, you could also get a small black and white display for the EP8 motor, which is integrated into the somewhat bulky SC-E5003 remote. The solution on our test bikes with the minimalist SW-EM800-L remote is a lot more elegant. This makes for a tidy looking cockpit while offering pleasant ergonomics and haptics. In general, the EP8 motor is also compatible with other display and remote options from the old Shimano steps E8000 ecosystem. However, you might require certain adapters.

The Shimano E-TUBE PROJECT app serves as the interface to the motor. It lets you set up two distinct rider profiles, each allowing you to configure the three Eco, Trail, and Boost support modes individually. For each mode, you can adjust the power, support level and response behaviour. You can then choose your preferred rider profile via the display on the bike. The app is clearly structured and intuitive to use, which makes the adjustments and configurations easy to do. Connecting it to the bike is just as quick and easy.

In practice, the Shimano EP8 motor performs convincingly thanks to its good-natured characteristics. It remains easy to modulate even in Boost mode, whether you’re pulling away or on a steep incline. As a result, it doesn’t feel like you get a kick in the backside as you start pedalling, like with other less sensitive motors. Although it’s technically on par with the Bosch Performance Line CX motor, which also produces 85 Nm, it feels noticeably less powerful in practice. You must provide more input and power of your own to get the peak output and support from the EP8 system. Therefore, it feels less like a shuttle, offering a more sporty and natural riding experience. While it emits a restrained hum on the climbs and isn’t conspicuously loud, that isn’t the case on the descents. Instead, it rattles loudly, especially in rough terrain, making it the loudest motor in the test field when riding downhill. Even though the Shimano EP8 motors we’ve tested have proven to be very reliable for the most part, it’s reassuring to know that you can fall back on an extensive dealer and service network in case you do run into any issues.

The Shimano EP801 and EP801 RS systems

The Shimano EP801 is an EP8 motor with slightly modified hard- and software. With the 01 suffix, the motor is capable of offering support at a wider cadence range and has a FINE TUNE mode to further adapt it to your needs. Apart from that, you get a wider range of remotes, and the possibility of linking the system up with the new XT Di2 groupset, which allows for automatic shifting when touring, as on the BULLS SONIC EVO EN-SL 1. In addition to the EP801, we also got to test the EP801 RS on the Orbea Rise. Contrary to what you might think, however, the RS added by Orbea means that the motor’s power output is limited at 60 Nm instead of producing the usual 85 Nm. As with the EP8, bike companies aren’t limited to Shimano’s two in-house batteries, able to combine the 801 with options from third party suppliers. Orbea take full advantage of this, offering the Rise either with a 360 Wh or a 540 Wh internal battery. Bike brands can also pair the system with range extenders, which wouldn’t be possible with a Bosch system, for example.

Along with the standard options available to the EP8, the Shimano EP 801 can be combined with a wider range of displays and remotes. For the EVO EN-SL 1, BULLS rely on the same combination of the minimalist SW-EM800-L remote and SC-EM800 display as all bikes on test featuring the EP8 motor. Orbea deviate slightly, fitting the Shimano EN-600L remote and no display. It uses an LED to indicate the 3 support modes, Walk mode, or an error code via 5 different colours. A second LED flashes red, green, or lights up permanently to show you the battery status. However, it’s somewhat confusing and thus serves more as an emergency signal. If it flashes red, you know that it’s time to head back. Of course, the remote can also shift the support modes up or down, activate walk mode, and switch the system on or off.

With the E-TUBE PROJECT app from Shimano, you can create different profiles for the Eco, Trail, and Boost modes, just like the EP8. What’s new on the EP801 is FINE TUNE mode. This lets you activate and configure up to 15 different support modes. The app also shows you the battery status in percentage points, in case you need more accurate information than the LED on the remote or the 20% bars in the display.

On the trail, the EP801 lets you select from Eco, Trail, Boost or any of the additionally created support modes, same as the EP801 RS. The basic characteristics of both motors are the same, which doesn’t come as a surprise since the EP 801 RS is the same motor but with a throttled maximum output. They’re both easy to modulate in the highest mode, letting you pull away safely even in difficult conditions. They continue delivering noticeable power at low cadences, proving to have a wider power band compared to the EP8 motor. As such, they will both let you reach the summit in a relaxed manner, even if you must pedal a bit harder with the EP801 RS, especially when things get steep. Technical climbs are a cinch with the power and characteristics of the Shimano EP801, but you will reach your limits noticeably sooner with the throttled RS version. Under partial load, the EP801 emits little noise, but it drowns out the FAZUA under full load. The metallic rattling on the descents is a big shortcoming that still affects the EP801.

The BAFANG EonDrive system

The BAFANG EonDrive motor in the Forestal represents a rather unique solution. It’s manufactured and supplied by BAFANG, but a significant part of its development was carried out by Forestal, who combine it with in-house accessories and software. It’s a daring and impressive achievement when you consider that it’s the debut product of the fledgling Andorran bike brand. The EonDrive motor delivers 60 Nm of torque and is powered by a 360 Wh BAFANG battery. Forestal have announced that they’ll be releasing a 250 Wh range extender, though it was yet to be released at the time of our group test. The Forestal is the only bike on test with a 3.2″ touch display, which is beautifully integrated into the top tube. The display sensitivity can’t keep up with the level of modern smartphones, but it works surprisingly well and is intuitive to use. Just don’t get mud or water on the display, as that seems to confuse it, going back and forth until you wipe it clean. It’s best to lock the display before you ride to prevent that from happening. The display provides an immense wealth of beautifully displayed metrics, such as the battery level percentage, distance travelled, altitude difference and current time. It also has a large navigation map. You can track your rides, too, because the Forestal comes equipped with a GPS antenna disguised as a stem spacer, which doubles as theft protection and works with an integrated eSIM card – cool!

Many of these features require you to connect the bike to the Forestal app, however. This provides additional information about the motor, battery, and your activities. In addition to that, it lets you track your bike and get in touch with Forestal. No other bike on test can match the wealth functions of the Forestal system.

As with most systems, the BAFANG remote can be found on the left-hand side of the handlebar, which has an additional battery indicator in 25% increments. The remote has two buttons to shift between support modes, and a third button to switch the bike on/off or activate walk mode. Unfortunately, the rubber buttons provide zero haptic feedback, and they seem misplaced on the otherwise premium looking Forestal.

On the trail, the BAFANG system has three support modes to choose from, as well as a Walk mode. Unfortunately, the BAFANG proved to be the loudest motor on test, almost whistling like a turbo when put under strain. That said, it’s also the most powerful amongst the Light-eMTB motors, kicking in with quite a lot of force as you pull away. However, the assistance provided is heavily dependent on the cadence. The motor isn’t capable of unleashing much power at cadences below 60 rpm or above 100 rpm. Fortunately, the display shows you your cadence, which takes out the guesswork and helps you stay in the optimal range. In that case, the motor keeps chugging along even on technical climbs, though it feels like the power gradually reduces the longer the climb – you have to increase your own effort as you approach the summit, making the final bit the hardest. The sustained assistance after you stop pedalling is dynamic. This means that the harder you pedal, the longer the sustained assistance. Although this results in a natural ride feel, it can be a hindrance on technical climbs, as you often need the motor to keep pushing even if you’ve only put in a light pedal stroke. The motor is silent on the descents and there’s enough free movement in the cranks to avoid any unwanted thrust. We didn’t run into any issues with the BAFANG system, but the after sales service could be an issue considering the very small production run and the wealth of custom solutions. Also, the BAFANG system has a very high battery consumption, draining the battery noticeably just from being switched on.

How and where did we test the e-mountainbikes

We admit it: this group test didn’t just consist of superlatives (30 hot bikes!), but also of lived dreams, not to mention blood, tired legs, late-night debates, intensive repairs, and charging until the solar grid collapsed and the generator gave up. And what for? For all-day epics, for putting the bikes through the wringer, and simply because it’s fun! For the core of the test session, we spent a full two weeks with ten riders on a secluded finca with a stunning view of the trails, sun, and sea on the horizon. The fact that we didn’t want to kill each other during those 14 days with such a high concentration of testosterone is a miracle on its own, and it’s a testament to the crew – certainly, the daily test rides until sunset and cooking and dining together every evening also helped. If we didn’t test bikes full-time, we could probably open a restaurant – yum!

If you’re wondering where we were: about an hour’s drive northeast of Barcelona, in Santa Coloma de Farners, where we found the perfect conditions to conduct a group test as big as this. The town has a huge and still rather unknown trail centre – at least in the international scene – with countless trails. Dry, sandy, and peppered with rock slabs and roots, it was the perfect place to push the bikes to their limits. Our chosen test track – a combination of “Dragon Khan” and “La Llosa” – features rock slabs with a sandpaper like surface, roots, flowing berms, and loose, sandy corners. The climb to the trailhead almost had a bit of everything you can possibly expect: wide gravel paths with potholes that would almost catapult you over the bars if you weren’t alert because your caffeine level had dropped. Flowing sections alternating with rough and sandy routes, to technical climbs that our bikes only just got up. So, if you feel like going somewhere other than Italy for a change and are looking for fine trails without shuttles, you will find everything your heart desires at Santa Coloma de Farners.

Our e-mountainbike test crew

Although numbers don’t have feelings, they can give you a good feeling for tendencies and trends. Here are some exciting, interesting, and fun facts, figures, and statistics.

Things that broke during our tests:

• 1 derailleur hanger torn off
• 1 display broke
• 3 chains snapped
• 3 tires punctured
• 1 Shimano brake lever broke
• 3 FAZUA bikes had difficulties starting up
• 1 FAZUA bike was defective
• 1 Shimano bike was defective
• 1 TQ display gave up
• 3 skid plates broke
• 1 aluminium crank bent
• 1 brake lever broke
• 5 charging ports torn off
• 2 grips broke

The e-mountainbikes on test:

• 30 bikes in the test field
• € 15,999: the most expensive bike on test, the SCOTT Lumen eRide 900 SL
• € 6,699: the most affordable bike on test, the BULLS SONIC EVO EN-SL1
• 23 of the bikes roll on 29″ wheels
• 7 of the bikes roll on 29″/27.5″ mullet wheels
• the bikes weigh 22.1 kg on average
• the lightest bike weighs 16.0 kg, and it’s also the most expensive bike
• the heaviest bike weighs 27.1 kg
• the smallest battery is 250 Wh
• the biggest battery is 800 Wh
• the weakest motor produces 40 Nm of torque
• the most powerful motor puts out 95 Nm

Before you splash out your hard-earned cash on a new e-mountainbike only to realise that you made the wrong choice, you should ask yourself a few basic questions. Most bikes can only live up to their full potential if they’re used as intended and, by default, you’ll only be happy if you find a bike that suits your needs and riding style.

It all comes down to the overall concept

Many prospective buyers want to know which is the right e-mountainbike or the best motor, but this is just like the 29” vs 27.5” wheel size debate (just slightly more complex): the best motor is only as good as the e-mountainbike it is part of. Conversely, an e-mountainbike is only as good as the way the motor supports and complements the bike’s character. Compared to analogue mountain bikes, this makes matters much more complex, because manufacturers have to take into account more factors, like the integration of the battery and motor, and the weight distribution of heavy components, which must harmonise with one another in order to offer a coherent package with supposedly contradictory characteristics.

New possibilities on the horizon

Spending all day in nature? Exploring new areas and trails? Tired after a long day at the office? Or simply want to take your kids for a spin in the trailer without spitting out your lungs on the first climb? An e-mountainbike might be exactly what you’re looking for, and at the same time ensures top riding fun on the trail.

A massive battery doesn’t necessarily mean more range!

Just because an e-mountainbike has a big battery, it doesn’t mean that it will take you further than one with a smaller battery. Battery capacity must always be considered in relation to the motor’s power, and as such its power consumption. You may get just as far or even further from a less powerful bike with a smaller battery, though with less support, so it’ll take longer or require more effort on your part.

More torque ≠ more power on the trail!

While many of the e-mountainbikes in this test field share similar torque values, they’re totally different on the trail in terms of power delivery. Simply put, an e-mountainbike is far more than sheer numbers and torque values, which, unfortunately, say very little about a bike’s performance when considered in isolation. The Bosch Performance Line CX-Race is the perfect example, showing how much difference a simple software tweak can make on the trail. While technically it’s almost identical to the conventional Performance Line CX motor, churning out 85 Nm torque, the tweaked software ensures a stronger, more abrupt power delivery, transferring more power to the ground at lower and lighter rider inputs. The Shimano EP8 motor also has 85 Nm torque, but can’t keep up with either version of the Bosch CX motor despite sharing the same values on paper. The same goes for the limited Shimano EP801 RS, FAZUA Ride 60 and Bafang EonDrive, all of which deliver 60 Nm of torque, but behave completely differently on the trail. The optimal cadence range – i.e. the range at which the motor delivers its power most efficiently – varies enormously from drive to drive, and on top of that many of the motors in this test don’t cope well with pedalling cadences below 60 rpm, at which they deliver very little power while at the same time consuming huge amounts of energy. As you can see, there’s much more to e-mountainbikes than sheer numbers, and the overall performance can only be determined on the trail.

What questions should you ask yourself before buying an emountainbike?

How much battery capacity do you really need?

If you tend to go for short rides with minimal support, big batteries only mean extra weight, which usually comes at the cost of trail performance. Furthermore, lightweight riders consume significantly less battery, and the topography of the trail also has a major influence on range. On the other hand, if you love to pile up the miles and vertical metres, you’ll probably do well with a big battery capacity. Tackling technical climbs, pedalling with high support modes and at low cadences drains the battery quicker too. Fortunately, some manufacturers offer their bikes with different battery options: with the Orbea Wild, for example, you can choose between a 625 Wh and 750 Wh battery to suit your needs and preferences. Moreover, most manufacturers offer range extenders, allowing you to adjust the capacity depending on the planned route. Removable batteries, such as those found on the FOCUS and Rotwild are an option, too. You’ll just have to budget for the cost of a spare battery, and go back to the car to switch out batteries.

How hard do you have to work?

This depends entirely on the support level you choose and the goals you set yourself. With modern full-fat e-mountainbikes, it takes a massive ride to drain the battery in the lowest support mode, and you’ll still have a fairly relaxed time, because many full-power e-mountainbikes cope well with low pedalling cadences, pushing you up the mountain willingly without requiring too much effort from your side. However, it’s a whole different story with Light-eMTBs, which require a relatively high cadence, calling for considerably more input from the rider, even in the lowest support modes – which can be exhausting in the long run. That said, many manufactures allow you to customise the motor settings and adjust the support level to your needs and preferences, basically allowing you to decide for yourself how hard you want to work.

What additional features should an e-mountainbike have?

In a nutshell, the possibilities are endless! Most manufacturers offer countless options for displays and remotes as well as accessories at the time of purchase. But what do you really need? What is helpful and what is simply superfluous? The good thing is that you can retrofit most accessories at a later stage and there’s a constant stream of software updates and extensions entering the market. Before buying, however, you should still have an idea of what you want from your display, whether you need a navigation function or you’re happy with a flashing LED. An integrated light or GPS tracker doesn’t hurt and doesn’t limit the bike’s performance on the trail, but keeps you and your bike a whole lot safer, regardless of whether that’s on your daily commute to and from work or after a post-ride pint in Finale. So, when buying, be aware of what you need or might want to retrofit in the future and find out about compatible options.

Are you planning to use your e-mountainbike for everyday riding?

If you already know that you’ll be using your new e-mountainbike for everyday riding, for example to commute to work, there are a few things to consider. First and foremost, you should look for a high level of touring comfort if you don’t want to end up pedalling to work in an aggressive pedalling position, looking like Lance Armstrong crossing the finish line at the Tour de France. Moreover, it’s a great idea to look for a bike that comes standard with a navigation function and integrated light set that draws its power directly from the bike’s main battery. Both bring huge advantages in everyday riding scenarios without getting in your way on leisurely weekend rides. Another key criterion is the charging infrastructures you have at your disposal. Is there a plug in the garage or bike storage room at work, or do you have to constantly remove the battery – or possibly even have to lock the battery inside the bike frame? Needless to say, the battery capacity also plays a crucial role, because if you can’t charge it at work you might run out of juice half way when pedalling home after a strenuous day at the office. However, if your commute doesn’t exceed 20-30 km, you should be fine with most bikes in this test, which should achieve that sort of range even when riding in the highest support level.

What should you consider when handling an e-mountainbike?

When developing e-mountainbikes, manufacturers often have to make compromises in order to create a bike that is as light, clean and slender as possible. While this isn’t necessarily a bad thing, it can make things tricky for you depending on the situation. For example, if you don’t have a power outlet where you park your bike, you’ll want to be able to remove the battery for external charging. Or imagine you take your e-mountainbike on a cycling holiday only to find out that there’s no plug in the garage – and what now? Conversely, it can be annoying if you have to remove the battery after each ride to charge it, even though you’ve got a plug right there. The trend of routing the cables through the headset ensures a clean look but also makes servicing a whole lot more frustrating. Inexperienced or impatient mechanics should get a bike with classic internal cable routing with cable ports in the top or down tube or, better yet, good old external cable routing.

What should you consider regarding the components of a Light-eMTB?

While it’s true that there’s no such thing as the perfect, one-size-fits-all build, some components have a much greater influence on a bike’s trail performance and, above all, on your safety. Big brake rotors, for example, are only marginally heavier but ensure a more reliable, powerful braking performance. In this regard, the following applies: big brake rotors are far better than lightweight top-of-the-range brakes. The suspension has a huge influence on your bike’s trail performance as well as on its long-distance comfort and climbing efficiency. You don’t need the fancy Kashima coating on your fork, and should rather pay attention to the damping technology it uses. We recommend the GRIP2 damper for FOX forks, or the Charger 2.1 and Charger 3.0 dampers for RockShox models. With the shock, a piggy-back reservoir is a useful feature to get the best performance from the rear end. At the risk of repeating ourselves, we must emphasise that any component can only work as well as it does in combination with the bike as a whole.

Do most of your riding buddies ride full-fat eMTB all-rounders?

If that’s the case, a powerful motor with plenty of torque is a decisive factor. You don’t want to be that guy holding everyone up! As a rule of thumb, the highest support mode of a Light-eMTB corresponds to roughly the intermediate support mode of a full-power ebike. If your mates with full-power e-mountainbikes ride primarily in the weakest support mode, you can still keep up with a Light-eMTB in one of the higher support levels. But remember: more power also consumes more battery. However, if you want to play it safe, you should opt for a full-fat eMTB all-rounder.

Do you ride lots in groups with analogue mountain bikes

Then pretty much every Light-eMTB or motor system is suitable for you because you can always go slower. In most cases, you can fine-tune the weakest eco mode and adjust the amount of support according to your needs – or turn off assistance altogether. The range shouldn’t be a limiting factor either when using minimal support and if you have extremely fit colleagues, most Light-eMTBs have the option of a range extender. From our experience, you should easily keep up in the lowest and medium support modes and still have enough reserves for the occasional overtaking manoeuvre. With full-fat e-mountainbikes, on the other hand, you’ll have an easy life, because even the weakest ECO mode gives you a huge advantage over your analogue mates – sometimes you might even get bored!

Tops and flops from our 2023 e-mountainbike group test.

Berria Mako Hybrid GT LTD

The Berria Mako GT LTD is guaranteed to turn heads outside the pub when you stop for a well deserved post-ride pint. The eye-catching look and countless fancy components are topped off by an exotic Polini E-P3+ MX motor, which employs a big display integrated into the top tube. On the trail, however, the Berria doesn’t do justice to its tremendous looks, revealing several weaknesses. On steep, technical climbs, it struggles to transfer the motor’s massive power onto the trail, while downhill, it’s slowed down by its inconsistent spec. That said, the Berria is a comfortable and powerful tourer that doesn’t shy away from the occasional trail stint.

BULLS SONIC EVO EN-SL 1

Despite being the cheapest bike in the entire test field, the BULLS SONIC EVO EN-SL 1 is the only contestant to feature Shimano’s automatic Di2 drivetrain. While the feature in itself is extremely exciting, it doesn’t bring any advantages on technical climbs. However, the clever mix of everyday features and good touring comfort makes the BULLS a great option for the price conscious rider who rarely turns off the beaten track. Offroad, it’s strongly limited by its nervous character.

FLYER Uproc X 9.50

The FLYER Uproc X 9.50 is a great companion for extended peak expeditions with tricky climbing sections. The Uproc plays out its strengths on long tours with plenty of elevation gain, where it takes the edge off technical climbs with the strongest motor in the entire test field, the Panasonic GX Ultimate. In addition, it offers FIT system integration and shines with strong connectivity features. Downhill, however, it shows some weaknesses and quickly reaches its limits, especially in the hands of experienced riders.

FOCUS SAM² 6.9

With its imposing frame silhouette and aggressive-looking coil shock, the FOCUS SAM² 6.9 looks as if it eats rock gardens for breakfast, which makes it the undisputed daredevil in FOCUS’ e-mountainbike lineup. While tours and moderate climbs are only a means to an end, the SAM² still manages them fairly easily. Downhill, it shines with stoic composure and potent suspension. Tipping the scales at a very proud 27 kg, it’s the heaviest bike in the entire test field. Overall, the FOCUS SAM² 6.9 comes with a great spec at a reasonable price.

FOCUS JAM² 6.9

By contrast, its slimmer sibling, the FOCUS JAM² 6.9 , is far more relaxed. In FOCUS’ portfolio, it stands right between the JAM² SL Light-eMTB and the corpulent SAM². It impresses with beginner-friendly handling both on tours and as a do-it-all bike, without standing out for anything in particular – neither in a good nor a bad way. Only on rough trails, we wish it could feel a bit more like the SAM². That said, the two bikes are similar in terms of weight: The FOCUS JAM² 6.9 tips the scales at a considerable 26 kilograms, which becomes evident on the trail.

FOCUS Jam² SL 9.9

Not only is the FOCUS JAM² SL 9.9 extremely understated with its black paint finish, but also rather unspectacular on the trail. However, this is by no means a bad thing, because the JAM² SL is just a discreet all-rounder for sporty riders which combines strong trail performance with comfortable touring characteristics. The rock-solid spec, potent suspension and predictable handling make it a workhorse for beginners and experts alike.

Forestal Siryon Diōde

The Forestal Siryon Diōde is without a doubt one of the most futuristic looking e-mountainbikes in the entire test field. The young Andorran manufacturer has knocked it out of the park with their very first bike, showing a level of development competence that even some of the most established bike brands struggle to achieve – chapeau! In other words, Forestal are showing in which direction the future of ebikes could be heading. The motor system is the result of a close collaboration between BAFANG and the Andorran bike manufacturer, and is complemented by a well-functioning in-house touch display neatly integrated into the top tube and a comprehensive app, which includes a hidden GPS antenna for theft protection. In addition, the Siryon shows how it’s done on the trail, proving one of the most potent bikes in this test. Unfortunately, the battery drains quickly, the motor is annoyingly loud and the service resources are still a big question mark.

GIANT Trance X Advance E+ LTD

If you’re fond of simplicity, the GIANT Trance X Advanced E+ LTD might not be the bike for you. The high-tech Taiwanese steed features plenty of electronic gimmicks, including FOX Live Valve, which controls the suspension fully automatically. However, to fully exploit the wide range of functions you’ll have to manage three separate apps on your smartphone. In our 2023 group test, the Giant is the only bike that employs the powerful GIANT SyncDrivePro2 motor, which is paired with a huge 800 Wh battery – the biggest one in this test! While the peculiar geometry with a very low front-end doesn’t really work downhill, the Giant convinces as a true climbing monster, combining tons of traction, good directional stability and a massive battery.

Haibike LYKE CF SE

German ebike pioneers Haibike have taken their time to release a Light-eMTB and weren’t all that present in the more aggressive mountain bike sector until now. However, with the LYKE CF SE , they’ve made a great Light-eMTB debut featuring some clever solutions. They’re the only manufacturer to integrate the FAZUA Ride 60 motor vertically into the frame, cleverly hiding it in the seat tube. Unfortunately, the innovative concept comes at the expense of the seat post’s insertion depth. Despite its aggressive look, the LYKE struggles to deliver on the trail. Unlike the better competitors in this test, it’s difficult to control on technical trails and quickly feels overwhelmed.

Californian cult brand IBIS has finally overcome its e-scepticism and joined the electric party with their green shredding machine, the Ibis Oso . With its striking, self-assured design language, it appears to love every minute of its eMTB debut, heading straight to the dance floor. Except for the extravagant look, however, Ibis played it safe, employing a proven Bosch CX Performance Line motor and their classic DW-Link suspension design, which has been tweaked and fine-tuned over many years. At fancy dress parties, the Oso would always turn up in the same costume, because it’s only available in one spec variant. On the dance floor, however, it’s incredibly versatile, boogying away in great style. Only when the John Travoltas among e-mountainbikes hit the dance floor, such as…, the Oso starts sweating a little.

KTM Macina Prowler Exonic

Issued in a limited edition with a savage Bosch CX-Race motor and 180 mm travel at the front, the KTM Macina Prowler Exonic is the Austrian manufacturer’s e-mountainbike for the rough stuff. On the trail however, it doesn’t do justice to its beefy, confident appearance, quickly reaching its limits with its nervous, vague handling – partly due to some major inconsistencies in the spec. Uphill, it’s significantly more difficult to control than the other competitors with Bosch’s CX Race motor. On the other hand, the KTM cuts a fine figure as a monster truck for touring and everyday use. Cool feature: The Bosch Connect tracking module.

MERIDA eONE-SIXTY 975

As the proud winner of our 2022 budget e-mountainbike group test under € 6,500, the MERIDA eONE-SIXTY 975 takes on a test field that includes bikes more than twice as expensive. While the current model retails at € 7,249, the eONE-SIXTY 975 hasn’t changed in its essence. At first glance, the plain alloy silhouette is rather unexciting but upon closer inspection you’ll come across several clever features at a very fair price. On the trail, the MERIDA keeps up with most of its pricey competitors and impressed several of our test riders, delivering a solid riding performance with predictable, intuitive handling. Clever features such as the standard headlight broaden its range of applications enormously and make it a strong all-rounder in all situations, from cheeky trail sessions to everyday use. If you’re looking for a bike with a consistent spec and a fair price, the MERIDA might be exactly what you’re looking for.

Mondraker Crafty Carbon XR LTD

Straight, elongated lines, sharp edges and confident branding: it’s got to be a Spaniard! The Mondraker Crafty Carbon XR LTD is well aware of its roots, proudly rocking Mondraker’s distinctive frame silhouette and a Bosch CX Race motor. Add the fancy spec including bling Öhlins suspension, and you’re guaranteed a very coherent overall package. On the trail, the Spanish stallion rides as if on rails – provided you shred your way back into the valley in a straight line. If you like to stuff yourself with tapas, we’ve got good news: the Crafty Carbon XR LTD has the highest permissible total weight in the entire test field – go on then, knock yourself out!

Moustache Samedi 29 Game 11

The Moustache Samedi 29 Game 11 enters the race with an old-school look and high-quality spec. The French manufacturer has fully committed itself to the electric cause. The undisputed highlight of their top spec model is the in-house Magic Grip Control shock, which didn’t quite manage to deliver the performance we hoped for in this test. In a nutshell, the rear suspension lacks support and feels rather spongy downhill, struggling to negotiate fast consecutive hits. In return, the Moustache cuts a fine figure as a touring companion, where the powerful Bosch motor and comfortable rear suspension work a treat.

Pivot Shuttle SL Pro X01

The Pivot Shuttle SL Pro X01 was the first Light-eMTB with FAZUA Ride 60 motor available on the market. In typical Pivot fashion, the firm DW-Link rear suspension ensures an excellent riding performance, both up and downhill, while the poppy rear end provides shed-loads of fun, especially on flowing trails. The precise steering behaviour and fast-looking paint finish ensure a nerve-tickling BMX sensation. Technical trails, however, call for decent riding skills to keep the Shuttle SL under control.

Pivot Shuttle LT Team XTR

The third iteration of the Pivot Shuttle LT Team XTR drifts into our group test with the “more travel, more battery, more fun” mantra. With a whopping 756 Wh capacity, it has the biggest Shimano battery in the entire test field, while the comfortable pedalling position and efficient suspension ensure excellent touring qualities. Downhill, it’s reassuringly intuitive to ride and only falls slightly behind the best bikes in this test field, proving one of the best all-rounders on review.

ROTWILD R.X735 ULTRA

As one of the models in the German manufacturer’s “Aggressive Series”, the ROTWILD R.X735 ULTRA is aimed primarily at sporty riders. Its orientation is underlined by the sleek frame silhouette and clever detail solutions, like the battery’s quick-release function. The latter makes the Rotwild the bike with the fastest and most intuitive battery removal system! The agile, nimble handling slaps a massive grin on the face of experienced riders, but the somewhat inconsistent spec holds the Rotwild back on technical trails. As soon as you leave the trail to embark on longer rides, the pedalling position is a tad too aggressive, making the Rotwild less suitable for touring.

Santa Cruz Heckler MX X01 AXS RSV

The Santa Cruz Heckler MX X01 AXS RSV came all the way from sunny California to no less sunny Cataluña to take part in our huge group test, promising to be lots of fun with its small rear wheel. And indeed, the Heckler keeps its promise on the trail, providing balanced handling and excellent support. At the same time, it inspires huge amounts of confidence, even when riding at high speeds, while the sensitive rear suspension makes you feel as if you were constantly gliding through a freshly-built trail. Not only is the Santa Cruz an excellent all-rounder, but also a comfortable tourer, albeit with some weaknesses on technical climbs.

SCOTT Lumen eRIDE 900 SL

The SCOTT Lumen eRIDE 900 SL features a TQ HPR 50 motor and is the undisputed master of integration in our 2023 e-mountainbike group test. Not only did the Swiss development team conceal the motor and shock inside the frame, but also integrated countless features and tools in places you wouldn’t think of. In harmony with its XC genes and streamlined appearance, the Lumen grinds its way up the mountain without batting an eyelid and yet delivers an impressive performance downhill. That said, the eye-watering € 15,999 price tag only makes it an option for a handful of people and on top of that, the field of application is extremely narrow considering the price.

Specialized Turbo Levo Expert

Already in its third iteration, the Specialized Turbo Levo Expert remains one of the most popular e-mountainbikes on the market. Thanks to Specialized’s unique do-it-all approach, developing both the motor and software around the bike, the Levo caused a stir right from its first generation and still goes strong after several years, holding up rather well against a test field of modern and rather shrewd competitors. Both the display integration and battery removal system are cleverly implemented into the overall concept and have effectively served as a benchmark for many competitors. On the trail, the Levo impresses with great versatility and intuitive handling, which ensure excellent all rounder qualities and make it suitable for both beginners and seasoned shredders.

Transition Repeater AXS Carbon

With the Transition Repeater AXS Carbon , the Bellingham-based manufacturer has finally jumped on the electric wagon. For their eMTB debut, Transition rely on proven (albeit slightly unexciting) Shimano motor integration and a sleek paint finish, delivering an excellent overall concept with a spec that perfectly suits its intended use. As a result, the Repeater encourages you to take your finger off the brakes and take full advantage of its extraordinary downhill potential. When descending, it inspires huge amounts of confidence and impresses with supportive suspension, which makes it one of the best and most discreet trail rippers in the entire test field.

Thömus Lightrider E Ultimate

While the Thömus Lightrider E Ultimate is the epitome of Helvetic pride, it’s far from being the Swiss army knife among e-mountainbikes. In our 2023 e-mountainbike test field, it combines the smallest battery (250 Wh) and weakest motor, which churns out a rather conservative 40 Nm torque. That said, the mellow character of the motor fits in well with the bike’s XC genes. As a result, the Thömus Lightrider requires more physical effort to get to the trailhead, but at the same time ensures a very natural riding experience. In keeping with its strong XC DNA, the Lightrider places you in a sporty, stretched pedalling position that isn’t overly comfortable on climbs. Downhill, the Thömus is held back by its own spec, though this can be customised using Thömus’ online configurator. Unfortunately, we didn’t get the chance to personalise our test bike.

Trek Fuel EXe 9.9 XX1 AXS

The Trek Fuel EXe 9.9 XX1 AXS has a clear edge over the other TQ competitors in this test. The motor was developed in close collaboration with the American bike manufacturer and relies on Trek’s proprietary software and app, which brings several practical advantages. These include more intuitive display operation and a wider range of functions in Trek’s in-house app – although the latter only offers added value off the trails. On the trail, the Fuel EXe 9.9 XX1 AXS is capable of pretty much everything but doesn’t excel at anything in particular, discreetly cruising along the rest of the test field with beginner-friendly handling.

UNNO Mith Race

Radical and extravagant are perhaps the best words to describe the UNNO Mith Race . With its striking seat dome and metallic paint finish with golden accents, the Catalan steed is a real head turner, both on the trail and outside the pub. Upon closer inspection, you’ll come across countless captivating details, including the seamless Bosch system integration and elegant design features – the elaborate chain and seat stay protector being just one of them. Unfortunately, the peculiar frame design with enclosed shock makes it hard to set up the suspension. On the trail, the UNNO provides tons of support and impresses with direct, precise handling, but also requires an experienced rider who knows how to handle the direct feedback. Overall, the UNNO cuts a fine figure both in your living room and on the trail, where it proves a mean downhill machine for trail veterans.

Yeti 160E T1

Not only is the Yeti 160E T1 the Colorado-based cult brand’s eMTB debut, but also the defending champion in this group test. It employs Yeti’s proprietary and rather fascinating six-bar suspension system, which knocks it out of the park on the trail and is rounded off by a top-notch spec. Needless to say, all of this comes at a rather eye-watering price. Although the electric snow monster can’t secure victory for the second year in a row, it still delivers a mind boggling trail performance for all types of riders and in a huge range of applications.

The Orbea WILD M-LTD 2023 is the Basque manufacturer’s e-mountainbike for the rough stuff. It comes equipped with a new Bosch Performance Line CX Race motor, which can be configured with either a 625 Wh or 750 Wh battery and customised down to the smallest detail using Orbea’s MyO online configurator. Orbea’s € 11,299 eMTB turns the volume to eleven on the trail and at the same time convinces with excellent all-round qualities.

Hit the link for the full review

With the RADON DEFT 10.0 750 2023, the German direct-to-consumer brand entered the competition with a thoroughbred eMTB bruiser, which generates a whopping 170 mm of travel and retails at € 6,799. The Bosch Performance CX Smart System and 750 Wh battery are neatly packed into a carbon frame with alloy swingarm. Together with the high-quality spec, this makes the DEFT an very interesting option, not only for its reasonable price.

Both our test winner and Best Buy tip, the Orbea WILD M-LTD and Radon Deft 10.0 750, have secured their titles for a reason and should be the ideal companion for most eMTBers. That said, every rider has their own needs and requirements, so depending on your situation, you might be better off buying a touring or Light-eMTB. Here are some recommendations from our editorial team, which should include a suitable bike for everyone.

The best touring and everyday e-mountainbike in our group test: Cannondale Moterra Neo Carbon LT1

The Cannondale Moterra Neo Carbon LT1 wants to strike the optimal balance between trail artist and everyday hero, but fails to achieve its goal. However, this isn’t all that bad, because if you shift your focus slightly, the Moterra convinces as a strong tourer and an awesome everyday companion. The excellent riding comfort and countless everyday features, like the battery lock and lighting system, make it the best tourer in the entire test field – and at a fair price! Unfortunately, sporty riders who are looking for trail performance won’t cope well with its passive, sluggish character.

The best Light-eMTB in our huge 2023 group test: SIMPLON Rapcon Pmax TQ

Winning genes? Indeed! The SIMPLON Rapcon PMAX TQ is based on its analogue counterpart, which already secured the “Best enduro bike” title two years ago. Now the Austrian brand has seamlessly integrated the TQ motor into the frame, putting together a tremendous overall package. The bike’s character suits the motor to a tee and despite its low power output, the Rapcon pulls away from most of its competitors thanks to its efficient rear suspension. The SIMPLON begs you to get rowdy downhill and encourages you to push your limits with its predictable handling, stoic composure, and unmatched suspension while inspiring tons of confidence in the process. The SIMPLON Rapcon PMAX TQ is without a doubt the best Light-eMTB of 2023!

Full-fat or Light-eMTB? Or both? Orbea Rise M-Team

With the new Orbea Rise M-LTD , you can customise both the spec and look of your new bike using Orbea’s extensive MyO online configurator. Furthermore, the Basque manufacturer lets you choose between a 360 Wh and 540 Wh battery, which is permanently integrated into the downtube regardless of the size. If you add the optional range extender, the Rise has more capacity than most full-power eMTB all rounders. Speaking of power: the Shimano EP801 is tuned to reduce the maximum torque provided from 85 to 60 Nm and therefore uses less power than other Shimano motors – which translates into even more range! However, the Rise is a strong climber despite the limited motor and cuts a fine figure downhill, where it convinces with intuitive, predictable handling. The perfect compromise between Light-eMTBs and full-fat all rounders.

Did you enjoy this article? If so, we would be stoked if you decide to support us with a monthly contribution. By becoming a supporter of E-MOUNTAINBIKE, you will help secure a sustainable future for high-quality cycling journalism. Click here to learn more .

Words: Peter Walker, Felix Rauch Photos: Peter Walker, Mike Hunger

You may also like

New 2025 FOX dampers on test – GRIP X2, GRIP X and GRIP SL

Light eMTB or just a lighter eMTB? The new Mondraker Dune Carbon in review

New Propain Sresh CF 2024 on test – An eMTB for all occasions?

Ebiking in Patagonia – Everything has an end – but the world has 13.

2024 e-bike trends – the most important findings from our big e-mountainbike test

GASGAS ECC 6 – In our huge 2024 e-mountainbike test

Best electric mountain bikes 2024 – the top-rated e-MTBs we've tested

With a motor between the cranks, the best e-MTBs unlock huge potential for increasing your riding range and powering up the climbs. Here's our expert pick...

1. Best overall

2. best full power, 3. best lightweight, 4. best all-rounder, 5. best long travel, 6. best agile ride, 7. best online only, 8. best enduro, 9. best utility bike, 10. other options.

• How to choose
• How we test

1. Best overall 2. Best full-power 3. Best lightweight 4. Best all-rounder 5. Best long travel 6. Best agile ride 7. Best online only 8. Best enduro 9. Best utility bike 10. More options How to choose How we test

After riding many of the best electric mountain bikes currently on the market, the Bike Perfect team has been thoroughly impressed. The latest crop of pedal-assisted mountain bikes have reliable motor systems , great components, and excellent suspension, making them a blast to ride on all manner of trail types. 

e-MTBing has become massively popular and if you head out on the trails you'll see loads of riders hammering around with electrical assistance. There are many reasons why riders would opt for an e-MTB rather than a regular bike, whether it's packing in as many runs as possible, fitness issues, or simply preferring the different riding style of an e-MTB.

All the bikes here are full-suspension models as we reckon hardtail e-MTBs are not quite up to the job of full-on mountain biking. They can still be a blast to ride on easy trails or fire roads though.

We've fully tested all the e-MTBs in this guide and have come up with a list that we reckon is the finest around. Our best electric mountain bike is also a top lightweight e-MTB – the Specialized S-Works Turbo Levo SL II, weighing at a featherweight 17.6kg (38.8lb). If you want an e-MTB with a full fat motor though, our top-rated option is the Whyte E-160 RSX.

If you have less cash to splash, we also have a guide for the  best budget e-MTBs , as well as an article on the  best women's electric mountain bikes . And if you need more advice before taking the plunge on an e-MTB, you'll find buying advice at the bottom of this article.

Best electric mountain bikes

Why trust BikePerfect Our cycling experts have decades of testing experience. We'll always share our unbiased opinions on bikes and gear. Find out more about how we test.

Specialized S-Works Turbo Levo SL II

Our expert review:

Specifications

Reasons to buy, reasons to avoid.

Specialized’s latest S-Works Turbo Levo SL II has more power, more suspension travel, rad adjustable geometry and a rowdy mixed wheel build, but it’s still seriously lightweight.

A 10mm increase in travel to 160mm front and 150mm rear matches the non-electric and excellent Stumpjumper Evo . The Levo SL II also adopts the Stumpy’s super easy to switch headset inserts and shock link flip-chip so you can switch from the default 64.25-degree head angle to 63 or 65.5 degrees. A second pair of eccentric flip-chips let you run either a 29in or 27.5in rear wheel without disturbing other geometry. Interestingly, the SL II comes with a 27.5in rear as standard, while the Evo is a 2 x 29er by default. 

The frame is Specialized’s well-proven Fact 11 composite with different “Rider Engineered” layups designed to give a consistent ride character for each of the S1 to S6 sizes. There are also proportional geometry changes to the different frames and you get a bottle cage that’ll take a full size bottle and soft chain quietening/ rock shrugging armor where you need it.

The custom 320Wh capacity battery is unchanged from the previous model and you still get a 160Wh bottle style range extender supplied 'free' with the S-Works. However, the SL II gets an all new SL 1.2 motor. This uses a two-piece honeycomb motor casing and a greater gain gearbox, increasing maximum power up to 50Nm and 320W. That’s a 43 percent increase in potential poke over the previous motor while actually reducing weight and dramatically reducing noise.

Our reviewer, Guy Kesteven, found it easy to forget he was riding an e-bike, "with none of the usual snowplough/runaway train terror of extra weight on steep descents and it's genuinely lively and poppy on flow trails, rather than needing heaving around to avoid high siding." 

Overall, our trail testing showed that it's a super adjustable, enduro-confident yet agile fun-focused shredder, with excellent pedaling manners, a very natural feeling range and speed boosting motor, class leading electronics and dealer support. It’s very light too. This S-Works version does come with a serious price-tag, though the range starts with the Comp Carbon version at $8,000 / £7,000.

For more info, see our full Specialized S-Works Turbo Levo SL II review .

Whyte E-160 RSX

Whyte's e-MTB bikes have been getting praise from us and many other mags and websites since their launch and during our testing we found that the E-160 RSX is a great example of why they work so well. For 2024, Whyte have improved the RSX's spec and lowered the price by a grand.

Taking learnings from the excellent Whyte E-150 series , at first glance the E-160 RSX has a very similar look to its predecessor, but the frame is actually very different. It's been beefed up in all the right areas and the downtube now incorporates a sliding rail for easier battery removal. There are loads of weatherproofing details on the frame too.

Componentry choices are top-notch for an e-bomber such as this and at the heart of the bike is a Bosch Performance CX motor powered by a large capacity 750Wh battery. The suspension comes in the form of a Fox 38 Float Performance Elite 160mm fork and a 44mm offset/ Fox Float X Performance Elite shock. For 2024, the drivetrain has been upgraded to SRAM's excellent GX EagleTransmission, you also get SRAM CODE RSC brakes with 220/200mm rotors, and a DT Swiss HX1700 wheelset.

Tester Mick Kirkman found it hard to fault in his review, saying. "The RSX delivers beautifully composed handling and suspension and excels in steep and demanding DH terrain, but being noticeably heavy means it demands some muscle to push it to the limits of its agility. The flipside of this, however, is the E-160 is incredibly stable, assured and easy to steer for anyone and has got your back wherever you end up while maximizing the huge range of Bosch’s sorted CX system."

For more details, check out our latest Whyte E-160 RSX review .

Whyte E-Lyte 140 Works

Along with its more aggro-intentioned 150mm sibling, the E-Lyte 140 Works is Whyte's newest e-MTB. Rather than being designed to be super capable, like the full-fat E-160 RSX above, the E-Lyte 140 is all about riding as fast and as far as possible – and it does that extremely well.

Our size large test bike weighed in at an impressive 17.4kg and uses a lightweight carbon frame with Bosch's SX lightweight motor and a 400Wh battery. The SX offers 600 watts of peak power, which is twice that of most lightweight rivals – including the Turbo Levo SL II. At 55Nm, torque levels are similar though, so you'll need to work harder to get maximum watts out of the motor compared to an 85Nm full-fat e-MTB.

Components are definitely at the XC/downcountry end of the spectrum, suspension comes courtesy of a Fox 34 FIT4 Factory 140mm travel fork and Fox Float Factory Evol LV 135mm shock.

Our E-Lyte 140 Works test pilot, Guy Kesteven said, "If you want to max out speed on climbs and singletrack, mix a powerful sprint with quiet efficiency and use the excellent handling to cope with XC tires and brakes though then it’s a better epic XC/trail e–MTB than anything else I’ve ridden."

For more on why it got 4.5 stars out of 5, see our full Whyte E-Lyte 140 Works review .

Merida eONE-SIXTY 2024

For 2024, Merida has radically overhauled its eOne-Sixty range and brought to it the successes from the redesign of its conventional One-Sixty bikes. That means a new suspension system that's shifted the shock position and removed the rear pivots in favor of flexstays. The updated bikes also get more progressive geometry and a sizing system that's based on bike length rather than frame size.

The new e-bike range is made up of five models, three of which are carbon and two aluminum. The carbon framed bikes are known as CF, while somewhat confusingly, the heavier aluminum options are called Lite. All the models get Shimano's latest EP801 motor, but the Lite bikes come with a removable 750Wh battery while the CF options get a fixed 600Wh option. The bikes can run an optional 360Wh range extender, but it will add 3kg of extra weight.

Rich Owen tested the eOne-Sixty 675 Lite and was really impressed with the bike which felt livelier than its 25.64kg weight (for the Mid size). It's a capable all-condition performer with confident handling and a top-spec Maxxis tire combo. In summing up, Rich said, "While it's pretty rare to find a bike that takes that much getting used to these days, I instantly felt right at home on the eOne-Sixty. The excellent suspension system and well-balanced geometry give a confident and capable ride." For more, see our full Merida eOne-Sixty 675 review .

We've yet to test the CF version, but will be doing so ASAP. The frame design is essentially the same as the aluminum option, but with less weighty materials and a smaller battery, it's a significantly lighter bike. The top-of-the-range eOne-Sixty 10K weighs in at 22.2kg for the Mid size. Selected models of the previous version of the eOne-Sixty will continue to be available. For details on how they ride, head to our eOne-Sixty 6000 review .

Santa Cruz Bullit X01

The Bullit has been in Santa Cruz's range since 1998, but after 2011 the Californian brand put the model on hiatus. Now it's back in a completely new format: a burly, long-travel e-MTB. 

The all-new Bullit has 170mm of travel front and rear, making this a long-travel bike meant for the gnarliest terrain. Santa Cruz's Carbon CC frame is built around a mullet wheel size setup, with a 29-inch wheel in the front and a 27.5-inch wheel in the back. Supplying the power is a Shimano EP8 motor with a full-size 630Wh battery so you can cover lots of ground. 

While we've been impressed with Shimano's EP8 drive system, we're also impressed by the suspension performance, both on the downs as well as the ups. Santa Cruz's VPP suspension platform allows for burly downhill riding, while also providing a stable pedaling platform. Put together, this all means the Bullit is a beast of a bike. 

Guy Kesteven got really stuck into the details in his review saying that, "optimizing it for a mixed wheel setup has also injected an addictively playful and involving aspect whether you’re hustling rolling singletrack or snaking down near-vertical black runs. The suspension kinematic means the extra travel is always a bonus and never a precision- or power-sapping wallow and with the impressively low weight it’s as grin-splittingly fun on an epic ‘all the best trails’ day out as it is throwing it down in the park without waiting for an uplift."

Read our detailed review of the  Santa Cruz Bullit 101 to see how it earned a spot in this guide.

YT Decoy MX Core 4

At first glance, the short reach and wheelbase on the YT Decoy Elite e-MTB might make it easy to overlook. However, YT now offer a large capacity 720Wh battery option (which increases the bike's range by 35 percent) and a build featuring reliable Crankbrothers/Industry 9 wheels and a Shimano XT drivetrain makes the Decoy a well specced option. We found the short reach can make climbing a bit twitchy, but it's that same geometry that made this bike a riot on tight, corner-filled trails. 

A mullet setup with a 29er front wheel and 27.5in wheel in the back meant in testing, the Decoy flowed through twisty trails with ease while still taking rocks, roots and drops in its stride. Maxxis Assegai and Minion DHR II tires give fantastic all-condition grip, while top spec Fox Factory suspension helps to give a great ride and can to get you out of trouble when required.

Our tester, Rich Owen, summed up the bike in his review. "The reach maybe short compared to more recently updated rivals, but the playful yet capable Decoy offers great spec for the price and is a blast on everything from flowy to technical trails.."

For more details on how the  YT Decoy Core 4  performed during testing, read our full review.

Canyon Spectral:ON CF 8

Canyon’s Spectral:ON CF is a do-it-all trail bike that has evolved over the years with continual updates, but always maintained a reputation as being a riot to ride. 2022 saw the Spectral get a full carbon frame, redesigned geometry and beefier battery capacity, and the 2023 Spectral brings in a 160mm fork and a motor upgrade from Shimano’s STEPS EP8 to the lighter and quieter EP801. 

We reviewed a medium test model of the 2022 CF 8 with a 900Wh battery, which weighed in at a competitive 23.74g. The mullet wheel setup (29 front with 27.5-inch rear) keeps things fun and shreddy, while the low bottom bracket height helps give the bike a very planted and stable feel on the trail, and the 76.5 degrees seat angle enabled an efficient pedaling position on steeper climbs.

The bike is kitted out with a Shimano Deore XT M8100 12-speed drivetrain and SLX M7120 brakes. The suspension is handled by Fox's Float line, with 150mm of travel in the rear and 160mm in the front. Sun Ringle Duroc SD37 Comp rims (DT Swiss HLN350 on 2023 model) are outfitted with Maxxis rubber.

The Spectral:ON feels like a proper trail hoodlum that wants to smash trails pointing in every direction in equal measure. A low-slung motor and center of gravity means the Canyon plants the pilot right in the heart of the bike. That means a secure out-of-the-saddle position which massively boosts descending confidence and encourages you to hammer the trails harder. The low BB height meant more pedal strikes than most though.

Overall, reviewer Rich Owen concluded. “The Canyon Spectral:ON CF 8 does a fantastic job straddling the line between being a highly capable e-MTB while still giving an agile and engaging ride. 150mm travel suspension isn't massive, but the bike will happily take enduro and DH runs in its stride. The really impressive range means your legs are likely to run out of juice long before the battery.” 

Want to know more? Check out our Canyon Spectral:ON CF 8 review.

Mondraker Crafty XR

With the Crafty XR, Mondraker has brought its signature geometry and handling characteristics to an e-MTB with an industry-leading Bosch CX motor and battery. 

The Crafty XR comes with Bosch's Smart System suite. This includes a new 3D multi-button remote control just inboard of the left grip and a new highly customizable, high-clarity Kiox 300 head unit on an ‘out front’ mount. The 750Wh battery is new for this year, but the ‘racers' favorite’ Bosch CX Gen 4 motor is still the same well-proven unit, albeit with Mondraker custom covers. The big suspension news on the XR is that you get the latest RXF 38 M.2 fork and TTX Air piggyback rear shock from Swedish damper legends Ohlins. The XR front fork also has a 170mm stroke while other Crafty bikes use 160mm forks of different types.

Mondraker has done a typically awesome job of marrying up two seemingly conflicting characteristics in the Crafty XR. The Ohlins fork and shock offer superlative damping control and sensitivity to flatter an already excellent suspension setup. 

The frame, cockpit, geometry and relatively low weight keep the ride feel very alive, responsive and hugely entertaining to play and slay on and our tester Guy Kesteven "finished every tech section with a really big grin". A bigger battery and better display/management will multiply the amount of time you’ll be getting those grins, too. 

The Crafty XR gets the Ohlins suspension comparatively cheaply compared to buying it separately. The only downside is the non-removable battery.

For more, see Guy's full Mondraker Crafty XR review .

Focus THRON2 6.9

On the Focus website, the THRON2 6.9 is described as suitable for "...trail tours through alpine terrain to your daily commute and bikepacking", which is a pretty wide range of applications.

While we commonly think of e-MTBs as more of a self-uplift than a utility vehicle, there are plenty of riders who are looking to invest in a comfortable and enjoyable e-MTB that can ride red and blue trails but also leisurely riding too. That does mean the geometry and componentry isn't going to be as capable as other bikes, but it's still engaging enough to light up and flow at a trail center.

It's certainly not going to be a bike that will appeal to everyone, particularly UK or US riders where there is more of a send-it-only culture, but in Europe there is far more demand for the mass-appeal utility ATB type of bike.

In Guy Kesteven's words, "the THRON2 is definitely a properly balanced, long-range XC/trail e-bike with bonus ‘lifestyle’ versatility and value rather than a town bike playing dress up in the dirt." For more info on this genre-straddling bike, have a look at our full-length Focus THRON2 6.9 review .

Scott Patron E-Ride 900 Tuned

If you're looking for the cutting-edge in e-MTB features then Scott's Patron E-Ride should be top of your list. The all-mountain bike features 160mm of travel front and rear and is powered by a Gen4 Bosch Performance CX motor with 85Nm of torque and a 750Wh. According to Scott, that should be enough to give you 2,000m of climbing in Eco mode.

It's clear from simply looking at the Patron with its futuristic aesthetic that Scott has put a lot of work into the design of the frame. Centrally Scott has focused on lowering the center of gravity as much as possible by rotating the motor and dropping the battery as low as possible in the downtube. The shock is hidden within the top tube, keeping it away from dirt penetration and maintaining the futuristic look. 

On the integration front, a one-piece bar and stem routes all the gear, brake, motor, and Twin-Loc suspension controls into the frame. Scott has mounted the Bosch Kiox 300 display above the stem for easy reading while riding. There are also fenders that feature integrated LED lights.

The result is a superbly well-rounded bike that climbs and descends with composure and confidence – vital when you are tackling big days out and are likely to experience a wide variety of terrain. Something which was clear when Mick Kirkman tested the bike saying, "the Patron feels more like the e-trail bike it’s designed to be, disguising its weight very well where it matters most on the fun bits and will prove a versatile do-it-all rig for the all-mountain rider who doesn’t need to shred every downhill within an inch of its life."

Read our thoughts on the Scott Patron E-Ride 900 Tuned when we took it for a first ride.

Focus Jam2 7.0

It's well known that what works for the pro riders often doesn't necessarily work for the weekend warrior. That's because speeds, line choice and the types of trails ridden are hugely different. 

Focus has looked to cater for new and intermediate riders with the Jam2 which means the 150mm of forgiving suspension adds comfort and control. Big brakes and tires help make the most of the FOLD linkage suspension system too so you can feel confident to push into increasingly difficult trails. The offset is that more radical riders who are hitting things hard might find that the suspension is overall eager, but ultimately we found the Jam2 stayed calm when the trail became chaotic.

Shimano's new EP8 motor is paired with a custom slimmer-shaped 720Wh battery which packs neatly in the downtube. The overall geometry is pretty neutral as well with a 65-degree headtube, 76-degree seat angle, and 480mm reach (large) to make the bike predictable and easy to handle on the trail.

As Guy Kesteven put it in our review, "to put it in the language of Focus, the Jam2 is genuinely geared towards more riders finding their ‘happy place’ and keeping them there all day whatever the terrain rather than helping extreme riders find their ragged edge euphoria."

For more details, check out our Focus Jam2 7.0 review .

Nukeproof Megawatt Elite

With 13 years of downhill and enduro race experience, Nukeproof knows a thing or two about building bikes that can get the most out of gravity-fed riding. Nukeproof has electrified the enduro Mega to create the Megawatt, a 170mm mullet e-MTB. 

The huge amount of travel does a great job of calming hard and fast trails with big features. We found the suspension characteristics offered the initial suppleness and midstroke support needed to track through rooty or rocky sections without blowing deep into reserves when slamming high-speed bike park berms. The grip and support in corners are further enhanced by the agility offered by the mullet wheel setup, which cuts corners tighter and makes it easier to pop the front wheel up.

If you're looking for a self-uplift cruiser and a gravity slammer back down, Guy Kesteven reckons the Nukeproof Megawatt is one of the best e-MTBs around. "When it comes to gravity-biased, super-dynamic ride quality, the Megawatt has very few competitors. It’s relatively light, naturally agile, and perfectly poised to make the most of the insanely planted and controlled handling and suspension in every extreme situation."

For more details, check out Guy's full review of the Nukeproof Megawatt Elite .

Unfortunately, at the time of writing, the Megawatt Elite is not currently available due to the change of ownership of Nukeproof's parent brand. If/when the situation changes we will update this article.

How to choose the best electric mountain bike

Are there e-mtb restrictions.

In the US, rules for e-bikes vary from state to state; with 30 states classifying e-bikes as ordinary bicycles, while the remaining 20 label e-bikes as mopeds, scooters or something else altogether. 

Federal law defines an electric bicycle as a "two- or three-wheeled vehicle with fully operable pedals and an electric motor of fewer than 750 watts, whose maximum speed on a paved level surface when powered solely by such a motor while ridden by an operator who weighs 170 pounds, is less than 20mph." 

It's worth noting this statute defines the maximum assisted speed of the bike propelled solely by the motor, not when it's being pedaled. To make things more confusing, state regulations can supersede the federal statute. 

The Bicycle Product Suppliers Association has proposed a three-class system that divides electric bikes up based on their maximum assisted speed:

For all three classes, the motor can only put out a max of 750 watts, and the class needs to be clearly labeled.

Even so, the Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management and the National Parks Service categorize e-MTBs as 'motorized', and they are only permitted where motorized vehicles are allowed. This means that the trail networks near your house might not be open for electric mountain bikes, however, some local and state land management agencies have made exceptions.  

Our friends over at People for Bikes and MTB project have put together a pretty comprehensive map of trails where electric mountain bikes are permitted. You can see the full map here .

The UK adopted a lot of the EU's regulations regarding e-bikes, but considering Brexit, it's hard to say if these restrictions will change as things move along.

The 'Electrically Assisted Pedal Cycle (EPAC) Amendment Regulations' mandates that electric assistance can only provide 250 watts of aid and must cut out at 25kph. It also stipulates the rider must be at least 14 years old and the bike must be in motion before the motor kicks in.

Electric bikes (and riders) that meet these standards have the same legal standing as regular bicycles and are allowed on roads, bike paths and singletrack.

In Australia, e-bikes are split into throttle operated and pedal assist. Both systems must be limited to 25kph, and the throttle-operated motors can only output 200 watts while pedal assist is legal up to 250 watts. Anything that exceeds these figures is considered a motorbike and must be licensed and insured.

Are mid-drive e-bikes better?

While the best e-MTB motors can be placed in either wheel or at the bottom bracket, e-MTBs should have a mid-drive motor system. The motor and battery are the heaviest parts of the bike, and with this weight between the wheels and close to the ground, it doesn't throw your center of gravity out of whack.

Mid-motor systems also perform more efficiently at a lower cadence and have sensors to measure how hard you're pedaling to tailor the level of torque and maintain grip. The motors are optimized for trail use, with a few levels of assistance ranging from low-watt 'eco' modes to gradient flattening 'turbo'.

Batteries will be described in Watt-hours or Wh, taking both output and capacity into account – a bigger number means the battery will take you farther on a single charge, but those with more capacity are heavier which will impact the ride characteristics.

Are electric mountain bikes good for trail riding?

Improvements in design and geometry mean that the best electric mountain bikes are extremely capable and fun to ride off-road. That said there are a lot of spec considerations that will affect the way a bike performs off-road.

Many e-mountain bikes come with robust aluminum framesets, but brands are rolling out more carbon options as they get the hang of this new segment of bikes. As with analog mountain bikes, full-suspension reigns supreme when it comes to e-MTBs, and with the right suspension tune, the extra weight can improve descending. Look for robust suspension and a fork with at least 36mm stanchions for proper trail riding.

With the extra weight from the motor and battery, it takes considerably more force to slow an e-MTB down, and when you're hurtling toward an unsuspecting hiker or a hairpin corner, you're going to want four-piston brakes and 200mm rotors.

The additional weight also means the wheels will be built solid, with more spokes and wrapped in 2.5in (or bigger) tubeless tires. With rolling resistance being less of a consideration, manufacturers opt for puncture-resistant casings and more aggressive tread. 

How we test electric mountain bikes

All the e-MTBs we've tested here have been put through many hours of riding on different terrains and in varied weather conditions. We test the bikes within their intended use, but we also push them to their limits to fully assess their components, build, battery and motor, ride and performance.

Meet the testers

Rich has been riding mountain bikes for more than 30 years and testing bikes and kit for over a decade. He mostly rides trail bikes with and without an electric motor.

Guy's been testing and writing about mountain bikes since the '90s. He’s written several million words about several thousand test bikes and a ridiculous amount of riding gear.

Graham is all about riding bikes off-road with almost 20 years of riding experience covering downhill, enduro, and gravel.

An ex-elite downhill racer, Mick's been mucking about and occasionally racing mountain bikes for over 20 years. Nowadays, he's mostly riding enduro-style terrain on conventional and electric bikes.

All the bikes here are full-suspension models as we reckon hardtail e-MTBs are not quite up to the job of proper mountain biking. They can still be a blast to ride on easy trails or fire roads though.

We've fully tested all the e-MTBs in this guide and have come up with a list that we reckon are the finest around. Our best electric mountain bike is also our top lightweight e-MTB – the Specialized S-Works Turbo Levo SL II, weighing at a featherweight 17.6kg (38.8lb). If you want an e-MTB with a full fat motor though, our top rated option is the Whyte E-160 RSX.

Guy's been testing and writing about mountain bikes since the 90s. He’s written several million words about several thousand test bikes and a ridiculous amount of riding gear.

Graham is all about riding bikes off-road with almost 20 years of riding experience covering downhill, enduro, and gravel. Based in Edinburgh he has some of the best mountain biking and gravel riding in the UK right on his doorstep. 

An ex-elite downhill racer, Mick's been mucking about and occasionally racing mountain bikes for over 20 years. Racing led to photo modeling and testing kit for magazines back in the day, and, nowadays, he's mostly riding enduro-style terrain on conventional and electric bikes.

Rich has been riding mountain bikes for more than 30 years and testing bikes and kit for over a decade. A jack of many trades, he has competed in cross-country, enduro and long distance MTB races.

Rich has been riding mountain bikes for over 30 years and mostly likes hitting flowy yet technical trails that point downhill. A jack of many trades, he has competed in cross-country, enduro and long distance MTB races. A resident of North Devon, Rich can mostly be found pedaling furiously around his local trails, or slightly further afield in the Quantocks, the Mendips or Exmoor. 

Current rides: Merida One-Forty 6000, Banshee Paradox

Height : 175cm

Weight : 68kg

• Guy Kesteven Technical-Editor-at-Large
• Mick Kirkman Freelance writer
• Graham Cottingham Senior reviews writer, Bike Perfect

Best mountain bike clipless pedals 2024 – the top-rated clipless MTB pedals for XC, trail and gravity riding

Best MTB saddles for comfort 2024 – 6 top-rated butt-pleasing perches for mountain biking and off-road cycling

Yeti builds on the SB165's Red Bull Rampage legacy and says the latest addition to its next-gen mountain bike range is more capable than ever

Most Popular

By Guy Kesteven 15 March 2024

By Paul Brett 13 March 2024

By Guy Kesteven 13 March 2024

By Guy Kesteven 8 March 2024

By Neal Hunt 4 March 2024

By Guy Kesteven 1 March 2024

By Paul Brett 29 February 2024

By Graham Cottingham 26 February 2024

By Guy Kesteven 23 February 2024

By Paul Brett 21 February 2024

By Guy Kesteven 20 February 2024

• Skip to primary navigation
• Skip to main content

Electric Bike Report | Electric Bike, Ebikes, Electric Bicycles, E Bike, Reviews

Electric Bike Reviews, News, and Information; plus e-bike riding and maintenance tips!

• Black Friday

• Electric Bike Reviews
• Electric Bike Brands
• Accessories & Parts
• Electric Bike News
• Black Friday Deals 2023
• Best Overall Electric Bikes
• Best Cruiser Electric Bikes
• Best Cheap (Budget) Electric Bikes
• Best Electric Bikes Under $1,000 – 2024
• Best Electric Cargo Bikes
• Best City & Urban Electric Bikes
• Best Commuter Electric Bikes
• Best Folding Electric Bikes
• Best Fat Tire Electric Bikes
• Best Electric Bikes For Seniors
• Best Electric Bikes For Heavier Riders
• Best Electric Hunting Bikes
• Best Value E-Bikes
• Best Mid Drive Electric Bikes
• Best Moped-Styled E-Bikes
• Best Electric Tricycles (E-Trikes for Adults)
• Best E-Bike Repair Stands
• Commuter E-Bike Reviews
• City / Urban E-Bike Reviews
• Hybrid Path E-Bike Reviews
• Affordable E-Bike Reviews
• Step-Thru E-Bike Reviews
• Folding E-Bike Reviews
• Fat Tire E-Bike Reviews
• Cargo & Utility E-Bike Reviews
• Cruiser E-Bike Reviews
• Gravel E-Bike Reviews
• Mountain E-Bike Reviews (eMTB)
• Road E-Bike Reviews
• Class 3 E-Bike Reviews
• Class 2 E-Bike Reviews
• Aventon Aventure.2 Review
• Aventon Level.2 Review
• Aventon Pace 500.3 Review
• Blix Sol Eclipse Review
• Electric Bike Company Model R Review
• Electric Bike Company Model S Review
• Evelo Omega Review
• Lectric XP 3.0 Review
• Lectric XP Lite Review
• Lectric XP Trike Review
• Lectric XPeak Review
• Lectric XPedition Review
• Lectric XPremium Review
• Himiway Cruiser Review
• Himiway Zebra Review
• Mokwheel Basalt Review
• QuietKat Jeep Review
• Ride1UP 700 Series Review
• Ride1UP Prodigy V2 LX Review
• Ride1UP Revv 1 Review
• Ride1UP Roadster V2 Review
• REI Co-op Cycles Generation e1.1 Review
• Rad Power Bikes RadCity 5 Plus Review
• Rad Power Bikes RadExpand Review
• Rad Power Bikes RadRover 6 Plus Review
• Rad Power Bikes RadRunner Plus Review
• Radio Flyer M880 Review
• Specialized Globe Haul ST Review
• Specialized Turbo Como Review
• Specialized Turbo Vado Review
• Tenways CGO600 Pro Review
• Velotric Discover 1 Review
• eBikes For Older Riders
• What Is The Best Budget E-Bike?
• Hub Motor Brands: The Complete Guide
• Best Car Racks For Electric Bikes – 2021
• Electric Bike Modes: Throttle vs Pedal Assist (Pedelec)
• The Complete Guide to E-Bike Mid-Drive Motors
• Calculating Range on Electric Bikes: How To Find The Long-hauler For You
• E-Bike Batteries: Volts, Amps, & Watt Hours Explained
• A Guide to E-Bike Locks and Security Ratings
• Why You Don’t Want a Superfast Electric Bicycle
• Understanding the Differences Between Direct Drive & Geared Electric Bike Hub Motors
• Replacement Electric Bike Batteries Guide
• Guide To E-Bike Gearing Systems
• Cargo Trailers for eBikes – The Complete Guide
• The Advantages Of A Lightweight eBike
• Cool Looking Bike Helmets …. Really?!
• Guide To Electric Bike Drivetrains
• Guide To Electric Bike Brakes
• Accessories & Parts
• E-Bike Organizations & Market Reports
• BestElectricBikes.com
• TreadmillReviewGuru.com

Some links may be affiliate links. We may get paid if you buy something or take an action after clicking one of these.

Best City and Urban Electric Bikes 2024

*Electric Bike Report aims to help consumers find the right electric bike for their needs. When you buy a product we recommend, we may earn a commission.

This is a broad category of e-bike, with dozens and dozens of bikes sold today that would work great as city and urban e-bikes. But there are some that are better than the rest, and we’ve listed our top picks below.

City and urban e-bikes are a part of the larger commuter bike category, but they have certain characteristics that make them, in our opinion, best suited for short-range commutes in densely populated urban environments. They’re usually a little lighter, a little more nimble and sometimes have a little less power and range than pure commuter bikes, though they may look extremely similar at first glance. Many of the bikes on this list have been put through the wringer by our team of qualified bike testers on EBR’s home roads and paths in southwest Utah, but some of them made the list on their specs alone — they were just too good to ignore.

Obviously, any bike can be a city and urban bike. You could happily ride a full suspension eMTB around the streets of New York City, but is that really the best use of that bike? Our goal is to help consumers suss out the best use for each e-bike we review. In the case of the bikes listed below, we feel that they’re most at home in a dense urban environment.

*Editor’s Note: Last updated November 20th, 2023 with updated picks for the best city & urban e-bikes.

Our picks for the Best City and Urban Electric Bikes of 2024

• The Best Overall City and Urban Electric Bike: Aventon Soltera.2 | Check Best Price
• The Best Affordable City and Urban Electric Bike: Lectric XP Lite | Check Best Price
• The Best Single-Speed City and Urban Electric Bike: Tenways CGO600 Pro | Check Best Price
• The Best Class 2/3 City and Urban Electric Bike: Aventon Pace 500.3 ST | Check Best Price
• The Best Cargo-Hauling City and Urban Electric Bike: Specialized Globe Haul ST | Check Best Price
• The Best Class 1 City and Urban Electric Bike: Trek FX+2 | Check Best Price
• The Best Lightweight City and Urban Electric Bike: Ride1UP Roadster V2 | Check Best Price
• The Best Folding City and Urban Electric Bike: GoCycle G4 | Check Best Price
• The Best High-End City and Urban Electric Bike: Specialized Turbo Vado | Check Best Price
• The Best Accessible City and Urban Electric Trike: Rad Power Bikes RadTrike | Check Best Price
• The Best Carbon Fiber City and Urban Electric Bike: LeMond Prolog | Check Best Price
• The Best New City and Urban Electric Bike: Ride1UP Portola | Check Best Price

Aventon Soltera.2

The best overall city and urban electric bike, 2024.

We were big fans of the original version of the Soltera, but the bike and its cadence sensor felt somewhat mismatched. Now, with Aventon’s sweeping upgrade to torque sensors with their 2024 lineup, the Soltera.2 feels significantly more complete.

The bike’s combination of a 350W rear-hub motor with a torque sensor helps it to feel much more like a “regular” bike. Its motor helps riders accelerate faster and travel at higher speeds, of course, but the Soltera.2 still needs – and responds to – its rider’s effort. This is a bike for those who enjoy a classic cycling experience, but who also might want a bit more pep and fun in their lives!

With a relatively lightweight 46-lb frame and 700c x 38mm tires, the Soltera.2 handles well and feels highly nimble. It’s also easy to lift, whether you need to carry it up a flight of stairs or throw it on a bike rack.

We’re also thrilled about some of the additional new features – the addition of turn signals helps with communication on the road, and Aventon’s reduction to 4 PAS settings (from the previous 5) makes the bike a bit more user-friendly and intuitive. Add in some flexibility and breathing room with Class 3 speeds above 20 mph and the Soltera.2 is one fantastic bike!

• The motor responds quickly and naturally to pedal pressure thanks to the torque sensor.
• It feels light, agile, and highly maneuverable with a 46-lb frame and 700c x 38mm tires.
• It feels like a regular bike, just more fun! The 350W motor makes pedaling easier but isn’t overpowering.
• Added safety on the road with both brake lights and turn signals!
• It’s comfortable with a less aggressive lean, ergonomic rubber grips, and a nice saddle.

• The throttle helps when you need a break from pedaling, but it lacks some uphill power.

Lectric XP Lite

The best affordable city and urban electric bike, 2024.

We don’t often recommend e-bikes below the $1,000 mark due to performance and quality concerns, but every model we’ve tested from Lectric has met – and often exceeded – our expectations. The Lectric XP Lite lands on this list for its budget-friendliness, but also for its portability; the bike folds to a compact size for transport and/or storage and is easy to lift and carry.

Weight is a big factor for city bikes; the lighter they are, the easier it is to carry them up to a 2nd- or 3rd-story apartment. The XP Lite’s 46 lbs falls below our threshold for urban e-bike weight, and its battery can be removed to shave off another 7 lbs when carrying. Such a low weight also allows the bike to be more nimble and maneuverable, and grants it faster acceleration.

The XP Lite is basic, but still highly functional; its single-speed drivetrain keeps things simple and cost-effective but requires less maintenance, and riders can rely on the pedal-assist system to adjust speed and hill-climbing ability. Furthermore, commuters looking for utilitarian accessories like fenders, a cargo rack, and pannier bags can add Lectric’s “Carry Package” for an extra hundred bucks.

It’s capable and versatile, too! The bike’s 300W motor is modest, but as a Class 2 e-bike, it can travel up to 20 mph through throttle or pedal assist. It lacks a front suspension, but knobby tires can allow riders to cut across short dirt lots or take similar shortcuts.

The Lectric XP Lite has a lot to love for budget-conscious riders, which is why we chose it for the Best Affordable City and Urban Electric Bike.

• A great bike at a great price! It’s fun and practical, which is a rare combination for under $1,000.
• Nimble maneuvering thanks to a low weight of just 46 lbs.
• Lifting can be made easier by removing the 7-lb internally-hidden battery.
• Fewer flats thanks to tubes that come pre-filled with slime.
• Can handle limited travel on dirt with its knobby tires.
• It’s not a huge deal, but we’d prefer the ability to ride without the key in the battery.

Tenways CGO600 Pro

The best single-speed city and urban electric bike, 2024.

While it may not be the lightest model on this list of the best city and urban electric bikes, the Tenways CGO600 Pro makes up for it with great design, simplicity, and ride feel.

As a Class 1 e-bike, the CGO600 Pro does not include a throttle, but its 350W rear-hub motor can assist you when pedaling up to 20 mph. Like some of the others on this list, it’s a single-speed e-bike, but its use of a torque sensor instead of a cadence sensor allows it to give you more power as you pedal harder. We were happy to experience the resulting traditional bicycle feel, and pleasantly surprised by how zippy it felt!

The absence of a full cassette may be limiting to some riders – especially on hills – but with no need to shift, it makes the bike extremely simple to operate. The drivetrain uses a Gates Carbon belt drive instead of a chain, which is much more durable, requires no maintenance, and does not require lubrication. We love not having to worry about getting our legs or pants greasy!

Instead of the usual five pedal-assist settings, the CGO600 Pro uses just three, so finding the power level that works best for you is straightforward and easy.

We also really like the bike’s overall visual appearance; it’s streamlined and contemporary, and also comes in unique color options like the “Avocado Green” on our test bike!

• A torque sensor gives the bike a natural and responsive feel!
• The single-speed drivetrain requires no shifting, so riders can rely on the simple 3-stage pedal assist system.
• A Gates Carbon belt requires no maintenance or lube, so commuters can keep their work clothes clean.
• We liked the speed delivered by the 350W motor; it’s more powerful than we typically see on city bikes.
• Tenways’ design style is eye catching and clean with an integrated headlight and unique color options.
• The single-speed drivetrain gives a fun and unique feel, but some riders may prefer more flexibility on hills.

Aventon Pace 500.3 ST

The best class 2/3 city and urban electric bike, 2024.

The Aventon Pace 500 has been on our list of the best city and urban electric bikes for some time, but the newest version of the bike – the Pace 500.3 – has gone above and beyond to reaffirm its place. As with the brand’s other models, Aventon has updated and upgraded the Pace with turn signals for added safety and a torque sensor for a greatly improved ride feel.

Also similar to most of the other Aventon models, the Pace 500.3 ST ships as a Class 2 e-bike with throttle and pedal assist up to 20 mph, but it can be unlocked through the Aventon app to a Class 3. This allows it to keep pace (sorry, we couldn’t resist) with the previous version of the bike that shipped as a Class 3 with pedal assist up to 28 mph.

Regardless of Class and speed limit, the Pace 500.3 is a zippy and highly maneuverable e-bike that combines the upright positioning and comfort level of a cruiser with the low(ish) weight and contemporary styling of a city bike. The Step-Thru version of the bike is easier for riders to mount and dismount, and better accommodates commuters wearing business attire.

The Pace 500.3’s torque sensor allows the bike to respond much more naturally to the rider and provides a more responsive feel than the previous version’s cadence sensor. It also creates a more efficient interaction between the motor and battery; since the sensor requires some effort, it draws less power and extends the bike’s range. We saw up to 67 miles in our testing in the 500.3’s lowest setting, Eco mode!

The Pace 500.3 ST is a capable little city cruiser that adds a bit more flair to its style than many of the other city e-bikes on this list, so we think it’s a great addition.

• The new torque sensor makes the bike extra responsive and fun to ride!
• Great range due to increased energy efficiency and a 614 Wh battery.
• Excellent handling and grip on paved surfaces thanks to the 27.5” x 2.1” tires.
• Turn signals for added safety and visibility.
• A low standover height for easy mounting and dismounting.
• The bike doesn’t include fenders or a cargo rack for commuters, but these items can be purchased separately.

Specialized Globe Haul ST

The best cargo-hauling city and urban electric bike, 2024.

Common characteristics of the best city e-bikes include being easy to handle, being highly responsive and provide something you can tune to your needs and preferences for how to navigate your city. So a fat tire utility bike might not sound like the most natural fit, but don’t count out how capable a city e-bike the Globe Haul ST can be – especially if you need to take a little or a lot with you.

City-dwellers often have cargo-carrying needs, but if you don’t have ample garage space then a long-tail cargo bike may present a challenge, so a short-tailed utility bike could better fit the bill for you. And few are more adaptive to city life than the Globe Haul ST. That’s due in large part thanks to its massive 419 lbs carrying capacity and accessories that can fit your needs.

Also, its motor can move fast, or move heavy things, or move heavy things surprisingly fast. All of this on a bike with a low center of gravity that makes handling easy and tires that provide the stability of a fat tire, while somehow feeling more maneuverable than they should.And even if you’re trying to climb the hills of San Francisco, this bike will reach the top with ease. It had one of our best hill climb tests of any e-bike to date.

We think the Globe Haul ST has some serious appeal for managing most city needs.

• The incredibly responsive motor is fun and can be fast when needed. It also climbs hills with ease!
• Fits riders from 4’-5” to 6’-4” due to Specialized’s precise engineering and numerous adjustment points.
• Great balance and responsive handling from the small 20”x3.5” tires.
• It offers excellent value despite its higher price – the quality of components is well worth it!
• It is functional and versatile with both pack mounts and an MIK-compatible cargo rack. The total payload capacity is 419 lbs!
• The stout rack is beefy but feels a bit short with the seat tube angle. Those looking to carry passengers should consider the long-tail (LT) version.

The Best Class 1 City and Urban Electric Bike, 2024

One part lightweight city bike, one part commuter; the Trek FX+ 2 is a functional, practical hybrid. It’s speedy, maneuverable, and easy to carry, plus it comes equipped with lights, a rack, and fenders!

Like a few other models on this list of the best city electric bikes, the FX+ 2 is also super stealthy. The bike’s quiet, unobtrusive rear hub motor is about the only thing that makes it clear from a visual standpoint. From the perspective of its ride, you’d almost never know either; the use of a torque sensor means you’ll be putting in some work , and the 250W motor adds just enough input to make you feel superhuman. As a Class 1 e-bike, there’s also no throttle to fall back on, so be prepared to pedal!

Speaking of the motor, while it’s a rear-hub, it’s tuned to feel about as close to a mid-drive as you can get. And the bike’s pedal assist system is about as intuitive as it gets, delivering noticeable and steady increases in power between levels.

The internal battery on the FX+2 adds a lot to its stealth factor, but does limit its range significantly, and can make replacement difficult when the battery eventually stops functioning. Similarly, the super-minimal LED indicator panel fits the theme of the bike, but doesn’t offer ride data beyond PAS level and a 5-bar battery readout.

That said, the lightweight frame and natural ride feel are huge reasons to love this FX+ 2, and allow us to regard it as a highly capable city electric bike.

• The FX+2 maintains the spirit of a non-electric bike in its ride feel, interface, and appearance.
• The bike’s lightweight, 40-lb frame gives it good handling and isn’t difficult to lift.
• We appreciated how the 3 PAS settings were tuned so each gives a measurable, intuitive boost in power.
• Lights, fenders, and a cargo rack are included right out of the box.
• Visually, the bike would be tough to pick out amongst a lineup of non-electric bikes.
• The LED indicator panel fits the bike, but we’d love to see even a small LCD.

Ride1UP Roadster V2

The best lightweight city and urban electric bike, 2024.

Ride1UP’s Roadster V2 has the looks, it’s got the reliability and it’s got the cheap price point. But does it have the ride quality we want from a city and urban e-bike featured on our best list?

The answer is an emphatic yes.

The Ride1UP Roadster is among the most modestly powered and priced city and urban e-bikes on this list, but it packs a surprising punch. This bike is a single speed outfitted with a carbon belt drive, which is an unusual feature on a bike priced this low. The motor is a 350w geared rear hub powered by a 252Wh battery entirely hidden in the downtube of the frame. On paper, that’s not a big motor or battery. But in real life, it equated to an extremely lightweight e-bike (33 lbs) with a motor just large enough to give heaps of power when you need it, but can ride like a normal bike when you don’t. The handling is snappy, and the slightly more aggressive geometry puts your body in a really efficient pedaling position.

The motor and battery are so small and carefully hidden that you hardly notice it’s an e-bike at first glance. With a top motor-assisted speed of 24 mph, the Roadster is a Class 3 e-bike but it rides like a souped-up Class 1 bike. We found it likes to cruise at around 20 mph to 21 mph, but unlike the Class 1 bikes, the motor stays on the whole time — which makes for an extremely smooth and effortless ride.

Overall, the Roadster is perfect for people who like to pedal their bikes but want a little motor-assisted help on hills and while cruising. It’s a fun and stealthy e-bike that’s a really great value for the price.

• The motor delivers power smoothly and in a way that compliments your natural pedaling.
• The bike looks great. It’s a staff favorite based on styling alone
• The hidden battery and very small motor make this a stealthy e-bike
• It’s incredibly easy to maneuver and lift with its low 33-lb weight.
• The belt drive keeps things low maintenance and protects your pant leg from grease
• The bike’s 350W motor was surprisingly powerful and carried us up most hills with ease
• Longer trips might require some careful battery management due to the Roadster’s small 252Wh battery.

The Best Folding City and Urban Electric Bike, 2024

GoCycle’s newest iteration of their iconic fast-folding electric city bike has the same funky styling and ride quality we’ve come to love, only better.

The e-bike now has more carbon — its unique single-sided fork is now made of the stuff and its midbody, the part that connects the front half of the bike with the rear, is now also carbon fiber. This makes the bike lighter and more vertically compliant, making for a more comfortable ride.

GoCycle has also retooled their proprietary front hub motor to make it more torquey and better at uphill starts, and a new battery gives the bike better range. Other than those upgrades, the newest iteration of the GoCycle looks and — most importantly — folds up the same way it always has.

We tested the previous GX model of the GoCycle late last year and really enjoyed its pep and rideability for such a compact bike. Even some of our larger test riders felt comfortable. We have yet to get our hands on the latest G4 model for our full scope of testing, but we’d be remiss to leave it off this list. GoCycle’s bikes have long been the standard bearer of functionality, rideability and unique design in the folding e-bike category. They flatly just work, and the latest upgrades to the G4 model look like they’ll only further compliment an already great bike.

This e-bike is for the seasoned urban and city commuter who is short on space; either at home, at the office, or on public transport.

• An impressive design from a company that’s clearly invested in R&D.
• Lives up the the “fast-folding” name. The GX will fit just about anywhere
• It’s lightweight, easy to carry, and compact.
• The PitStop wheels make tire changes a breeze
• Pedals easy even with the motor off
• For quick adjustments, an Allen key is conveniently stored under the saddle.
• It’s a clean, lightweight design that makes the GoCycle fun to ride with the motor on and off.
• Integrated lights and fenders are not included as standard, but Gocycle sells them as an accessory.

Specialized Turbo Vado

The best high-end city and urban electric bike, 2024.

Even when considering only the basic specs of the Specialized Turbo Vado, this top-tier city and urban e-bike stands out from the crowd.

It features a proprietary – and highly tuned – 250W mid-drive motor with 70 Nm of torque and a torque sensor, a 710 Wh removable battery, a SRAM 11-speed drivetrain, and SRAM hydraulic disc brakes. The Turbo Vado brings a couple of uncommon features as well; a suspension seatpost and front suspension fork to make the ride that much more comfortable. It also comes standard with commuter essentials like a cargo rack, fenders, and lights.

As a Class 3 e-bike, the Turbo Vado can reach motor-assisted speeds of 28 mph, making it easy to keep up with traffic. We adored the advanced motor that provides fast acceleration, steady speed, and solid uphill capability. Specialized’s marketing claims the bike provides 4x your own input!

The Specialized Turbo Vado is also hugely customizable, with both high-step and step-thru frames available in a variety of different sizes. There are also a bevy of trim packages including one with an IGH, or internally-geared hub that replaces the standard cassette. Finally, the Turbo Vado also comes in an “SL” or super-light model that’s super easy to carry.

With a price tag of around $4,000, it’s definitely one of the more expensive options on this list, but the bike’s cost is definitely justified by its features and specs. Customers of Specialized also have the benefit of excellent customer service from a global brand.

Check Best Price | Read Full Review | Watch Our Video Review

• The proprietary Specialized 2.0 250W mid-drive motor is fast and can power uphill with ease.
• The bike’s list of specs and top quality components backs up its price tag of around $4,000.
• Specialized’s MissionControl app can be paired with the bike to deliver software updates and also tune the PAS system.
• The MasterMind display has some uncommon features including rider wattage and battery efficiency.
• We found the magnetic battery charger to be tough to put in place correctly, but removing the battery from the frame made charging easier.

Rad Power Bikes RadTrike

The best accessible city and urban electric trike, 2024.

Let’s be honest: whether due to balance or mobility concerns, not everyone can ride a bike. The folks at Rad Power Bikes saw this gap in the market and designed the RadTrike to meet the needs of those who need (or want) the larger degree of safety and stability offered by a vehicle with three wheels instead of two. They also focused on making the product affordable – and therefore more available for a wider range of potential users.

We found the RadTrike to be fun to ride, but that is just a bonus to the fulfillment of its design intent. As with all of their products, Rad thoughtfully and intentionally designed the trike to be functional, comfortable, practical, and useful.

Evidence of that thorough approach can be found across the board. First, in the RadTrike’s width; it easily fits through doors of standard size. Next, by keeping the trike’s center of gravity low and limiting its speed to 14 mph; this greatly reduces the tendency of similar three-wheeled vehicles to tip up on two wheels. Third, in weight capacity; the RadTrike can handle a 325-lb rider, 60 lbs of cargo on the optional rear rack, and an additional 30 lbs on the optional front rack. These are just a few examples – the RadTrike is chock full of similar details.

The RadTrike is no slouch when it comes to ride comfort and power, either. A low standover height of just 13.4” makes it easy to hop on and off, and a large, padded seat with a backrest makes for a supportive and comfortable experience. The trike’s 750W front-hub motor gives it the ability to haul up to a total of 415 lbs, and allows it to handle hills with ease. And the 780 Wh battery proved capable of matching Rad Power’s claimed 55+ mile range in our testing.

With a price tag of around $2,500, the RadTrike is an affordable and highly accessible alternative to a car or an e-bike, and one that is extremely practical for city and urban use.

• At around $2,500, the RadTrike was purpose-built to provide quality and affordability.
• The low center of gravity and 14-mph speed limit make safety a top priority. Plenty of other features back this up.
• The trike’s 750W front-hub motor gives it plenty of power for climbing hills.
• We were pleasantly surprised by the trike’s demonstrated 25-59 mile range.
• A reverse throttle feature gives the trike ample maneuverability.
• The twist throttle worked well for us, but we’d like to see throttle speed limited by the PAS system.

LeMond Prolog

The best carbon fiber city and urban electric bike, 2024.

The LeMond Prolog is one of the more unique e-bikes on this list of the best city and urban electric bikes. First, in its stunningly good looks; as a carbon fiber e-bike, it has the luxury of scrapping the usual preformed and welded aluminum frame members. Instead, it uses a clean and sculpted single-piece carbon fiber shell with internally-routed components and integrated lights.

Second, in shockingly low weight and great handling; the composition of its composite components results in an e-bike that weighs just 26 lbs! The frame can feel like it’s not even there when pedaling around, it’s amazingly easy to lift and carry, and its handling and maneuverability are made highly responsive with such a featherlight frame.

Third is its technology; the Prolog uses a high-end Mahle x35 drive system with a fully-internal battery, a minimal 250W rear hub motor, and a single-button user interface instead of a display. As a Class 1 e-bike with such a slight motor, the Prolog will help you pedal up to 20 mph, but it’s made for riders who want to feel like they’re doing most of the heavy lifting. The bike’s interface is unique and effective despite its simplicity; it communicates pedal assist setting, battery charge, and light system activation through a full-color light ring around its button.

Fourth, in its history; the bike’s manufacturer is a company owned by three-time Tour de France winner Greg LeMond. LeMond was the first non-European to win the race, and he rode the first carbon fiber bike to cross the finish line in first place. This experience gives the brand a unique perspective on function and design.

• The Prolog focuses on a traditional cycling experience; it extends your capabilities but wants you to pedal.
• The subtle motor power provides a “superhuman” feeling when pedaling!
• Its 26-lb frame is incredibly light, easy to lift, and quick to maneuver.
• High-end materials and technology like the Mahle X35 drive system are unique – and just cool looking!
• It has a huge stealth factor with no obvious display or battery.
• The bike ships almost fully assembled in one of the best packaging setups we’ve seen.
• We like the visual aspect of the monocoque stem/handlebar design but we’d prefer to see more adjustability.

Ride1UP Portola

The best new city and urban electric bike, 2024.

Frankly, the brand new Ride1UP Portola delivers some of the best value we’ve ever seen. Prior to its release, Lectric more or less had the affordable / high quality folding e-bike market cornered – but with a ton of great features and a starting price around $1,000, the Portola raised the bar.

It’s not a copycat, either; the Portola includes uncommon features for its price point. This includes a powerful 750W rear-hub motor with 65 Nm of torque, a passenger-capable cargo rack with 130 lbs of carrying capacity, and even a strap to keep the bike together when it’s folded – surprisingly, this is a feature most folding bikes don’t include.

The Portola also includes a few different options for its battery capacity, and therefore the distance it can travel on a single charge. The bike includes a 48V, 10.4 Ah battery but you can choose a larger 13.4 Ah battery at purchase. Spare 14 Ah batteries are also available for purchase separately for even greater range.

Additionally, the bike can travel at Class 3 speeds, it can accommodate a wide range of riders between 4’-10” and 6’-4”, it includes hydraulic disc brakes, and we think its ride quality is a step above what you usually find for the price. The icing on the proverbial cake is the Portola’s trademark Ride1UP styling and finish; we think the matte blue paint job looks great, but there are some gloss options as well.

• An above-average hill climbing ability from the uncommon 750W rear hub motor.
• Two battery capacity options with different price points to fit different budget/range needs.
• Tons of rare components for the price means great value. Things like the 8-speed Shimano Altus drivetrain, hydraulic disc brakes, and a cargo rack rated for 130 lbs.
• It comes decked out for commuting with the rack, fenders, a headlight, and a tail light.
• The option for Class 3 speeds above 20 mph!
• The bike fits a huge range of riders, both taller folks might have a bit less leg extension.

How we picked these bikes

There are an absurd number of e-bikes on the market today, and they come in all shapes, sizes, and variations, and intended uses.

Because of that, we’re not going to kid you (or ourselves) by claiming this best list is perfect. What this list is, is a hard-debated and long-considered inventory of – in EBR’s opinion – some of the best city and urban e-bikes available.

We know all of these bikes intimately; we’ve pedaled them hundreds of miles up hills, through traffic and we’ve even put them through a gamut of tests to fully understand how well they perform. Those on this list stood out the most from the dozens of similar bikes we’ve tested.

We evaluated city and urban bikes based on a few key criteria, mainly:

• Range: How long will the battery last? And how long could you actually ride the bike before it becomes uncomfortable? City and Urban bikes typically need to cover shorter distances but they should be able to last for a solid day of riding.
• Weight: Could you carry the bike up a flight of stairs or lift it onto a bus? This is a tough bar to clear for most e-bikes, but we feel the cutoff for city and urban bikes is around 50 lbs.
• Maneuverability: Can the bike fit into tight spaces between cars and is it quick enough to dodge pedestrians? Also, does it fold up?
• Other: We also weigh a host of other variables, ranging from the type of rack(s) it’s outfitted with to the bike’s styling and body positioning.

Remember that many of these criteria are subjective. The EBR brain trust has a lot of experience on bicycles, but by no means are we trying to impress an elitist position on what bikes should and shouldn’t be used for. That’s the cool thing about bikes — especially e-bikes! — you can do just about anything on any bike if you try hard enough.

Bottom line: Evaluate your needs before opening your wallet

We did our best to walk a mile in the average city and urban e-bike commuter’s shoes when making this list, but everyone’s needs are different.

More than reading online best lists, the most important thing you can do when buying a new e-bike is to have a solid idea of what you want to do with it. For the purposes of compiling the above list, the EBR team envisioned a person who needed a bike capable of covering a modest distance while sharing the road (or path) with lots of other users. Maybe they also wanted the bike to be comfy; maybe they wanted it to be stylish; and maybe they wanted to be able to carry a little cargo or a little human. Most importantly, they needed a bike that was nimble and reliable. If that sounds like you (even a little) this is probably the right place for you. If not, we’ve got lots of other lists covering the best bikes in categories from commuters to cruisers and more.

Think long and hard about what you want to do with your bike. Be real with the distance you need to cover each trip and what type of hills and obstacles you need to navigate — get a bike that matches those needs. If you’re new to e-bikes and need help figuring out watts from motor controllers, we’ve got a guide for that . We’d also especially recommend checking out our commuter e-bike best list , as many of those bikes are very similar to the ones featured here.

Reader Interactions

April 2, 2023 at 11:19 pm

What’s with the apostrophes on “Pro’s” and “Con’s?” They’re plural not possessives.

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed .

Don’t be a stranger, stay connected

Subscribe to our newsletter.

• Email Address
• Black Friday Deals
• All-In-One Wheels
• Electric Bike Kit Guide
• Cheap E-Bikes
• Stylish Electric Bikes
• Folding eBikes
• E Cargo Bike Guide
• E Mountain Bike Guide
• Fat Electric Bikes Guide
• E-Bike Reviews >>
• E-Bike Kit Reviews >>
• LEED Electric Bike Kit Review
• Clean Republic Hill Topper
• Conveniences of a Car
• Video: E-Bike Commuting
• Video: Cargo Revolution
• Video: FedEx E-Trike
• Prodeco Visit
• 10 E-Bike Range Tips
• Battery Care Tips
• Stop Flat Tires!
• Top 3 Maintenance Tips
• Throttle vs Pedal Assist
• Volts & Amp Hours?
• Cool Looking Helmets?
• Burley Travoy Review
• Find Bike Routes
• E-Bike Insurance
• Keep Your E-Bike Secure
• Recover a Stolen Bike
• Videos: E-Bike Polo!
• Bike Commuting Routes
• EBR Community
• Electric Bike Accessories
• Electric Bike Advocacy
• Electric Bike Benefits
• Electric Bike Components
• Electric Bike Concepts
• Electric Bike FAQ
• Electric Bike Guides
• Electric Bike Maintenance
• Electric Bike Podcast
• Electric Bike Riding Tips
• Electric Bike Videos
• Electric Bikes & Money

• Best City & Urban Electric Bikes
• Cargo & Utility E-Bike Reviews
• E-Bike Organizations & Market Reports

Copy short link

Top 8 Best Enduro Bikes | The best enduro mountain bikes ridden & reviewed

There is no doubt about it. We have entered an exciting age in the world of enduro bikes. The sport is growing exponentially with self-perpetuating momentum. Technology available on bikes is more refined and capable than ever, which is leading to a boom in the expanse and quality of trails exploding all over the world, which fuels riders to go out and push these bikes to new limits, and opening the gates to new shredders entering the sport for the first time. Enduro racing has also become gnarlier and more competitive than ever, driving bike brands to go back to the drawing boards, constantly chasing better. And this, you guessed it, feeds back into greater bikes and accessibility to the sport. And so the cycle continues.

We here at Flow are, let’s be honest, giant nerds when it comes to this stuff. We live and breathe these machines and the places they can take us, and are absolutely buzzing to be a part of the industry at a time such as this. And with the demands required of modern-day enduro bikes and their riders, we find this is a particularly concentrated segment of innovation, with exciting new tech pouring in at an astonishing rate that we believe is truly making improvements in leaps and bounds to the bikes we ride, and the fun we can have on them.

We’ve tested a boatload of these ultra-capable machines, and as an outlet for all of this excitement, we have compiled the following list of enduro bikes available now that we think are pushing the sport in the right direction. While every bike in this list can descend with the best of them while still climbing to the beginning of the next trail or stage, each of them possesses unique design features and ride characteristics that set them apart from the competition, and one another.

It’s also worth noting that you don’t necessarily need an ‘enduro bike’ to race enduros. Even some of the world’s best are choosing slightly shorter options —  Canyon CLLCTV’s Dimitri Torodo has been racing a Spectral at World Cups while Charlie Murry from the Specialized Enduro Team has been riding a Stumpjumper EVO .

Of course, this is not an exhaustive list, and there are some popular bikes — like the Specialized Enduro — that aren’t here. The reason for that is that we haven’t tested one, and therefore can’t comment on its performance and how it compares to others in this category. Sure, we could make some assumptions based on what other folks have said, but that’s not how we run this show.

So without further ado, here are eight of the best enduro bikes we’ve ridden and reviewed.

• Looking for something a bit more svelte? Check out our pick of the top XC bikes
• Keen for some help on the climbs to maximise your adventures? Check out our pick of the top e-MTBs

The best enduro bikes ridden & reviewed

Giant Reign

Highs: Race-ready geometry and spec, fantastic composure in the rough stuff, mullet compatibility via a 3-position flip-chip, well-placed frame armour. Lows: Frame storage hatch impractically small, the stiff 35mm bars transfer a bit of chatter up front.

Overhauled, stretched out and beefed up in all the right places, the all-new Giant Reign has entered 2023 with its best tyre forward — proving its race-winning potential already at the opening round of the Enduro World Cup in some seriously rowdy Aussie conditions.

• Squid’s Eye View Part 1 | Maydena EDR through the lens of Kristina Vackova
• Squid’s Eye View Part 2 | Maydena EDR through the lens of Justin Castles

Compared to its previous iteration, the Reign’s travel has been stretched out to 170mm up front and 160mm on the rear, activated via the fabled Maestro platform to deliver an awesomely plush, confidence-inspiring ride. The head angle has been slackened, chainstays stretched and reach increased, boosting the Reign’s enduro capabilities through the roof. Although this bike was never made for XC courses, power transfer is surprisingly efficient when stomping on the pedals, and its 15.04kg weight isn’t too hefty when compared to similar bikes in the category. Even with a climb switch on the rear shock, we predominantly left the bike in the fully open mode, serving up plenty of traction on loose and techy climbs. This bike really comes into its own however the moment you bring gravity into the equation.

With flip chips allowing for high, mid and low positions, the Reign allows riders to dial in the bike’s geometry for riding style, trail type or wheel configuration. With the flip-chip set to the low position, the 63.5° head angle rewards those that like to attack the descents. On the flip side, the high setting raises the BB to provide greater clearance for technical climbs, which are aided by the nice and steep seat tube angle of nearly 78°. We did however find that in this high-BB setting, the bike felt quite tall and awkward to handle. This setting does also allow the party animals out there to drop in a 27.5in rear wheel to go full-mullet if desired. All models also come with an adjustable long-stroke dropper post, which is a great feature by our books. The burly frame protection is well placed and provides not only great protection, but a nice and quiet ride regardless of how teeth-chattering the trail is.

The all-new Reign is as attractive as enduro bikes come these days, both in its curvy, understated aesthetic (we think), and its four competitively priced, well spec’d models. The Reign SX model has also made a comeback, with this model sitting even further in the gnar-zone, and features a dual crown fork and coil shock for those that have no interest in pedalling up, and full interest in sending big. You can see all of the specs, prices and details of the full lineup in our first-look article.

To dive deeper into just why we think this bike deserves its place on the list of the latest and greatest, check out our full 2023 Giant Reign review .

Merida One-Sixty

Highs: Modern enduro geometry, super playful suspension characteristics, mullet compatibility, 230mm dropper post, wide offering of models to suit most riders. Lows: Cramped in-frame storage, issues with dropper post on test bike, headset cable routing

Gracing our eyeballs since its launch in late-2022 is the completely redesigned Merida One-Sixty. The aim of the game was to deliver one of the most playful, capable and versatile enduro bikes on the market. And gee-whiz, has Merida delivered.

From the very moment it was released, the One-Sixty struck us as an entirely different bike when placed next to its predecessor. And upon our first five minutes on the trail, we were able to confidently confirm that it too feels like an entirely new bike. The One-Sixty is right on the money with modern enduro bike geometry, employing a playful mix of longer, lower and slacker to result in a rig that is just as comfortable on backcountry epics as it is the enduro race stages — a statement few current bikes out there can boast.

The One-Sixty offers a few interesting changes between sizes. Firstly, sizes up to the medium come stocked with a 27.5in rear wheel and the large and XL options as full 29ers. The suspension receives a size-specific tune and making the leverage ratio more progressive the further up the sizing chart you move, providing greater support for heavier riders. When rocking the mullet configuration, the frame offers 171mm of rear travel, while opting for the 29er will reduce it to 160mm. This ample rear squish paired with a 170mm fork —or 180mm if you want to go big — makes this bike feel just at home on full-blown downhill laps as it does on undulating adventure rides. The head angle sits at a relaxed 64° whereas the very steep 79° seat angle still provides a comfortable climbing position.

Merida has now done away with the rearmost pivot on the bike, instead opting for a Flexstay rear triangle that the brand claims to boost stiffness, drops weight and creates a unique, lively ride characteristic. We can confirm that this bike is particularly playful, popping off jumps and blasting through chunky terrain with an energetic feel. The excellent seat angle on the One-Sixty places you in a comfortable position to tackle the climbs, however the lively suspension kinematic does feel a little over-zealous when you’re cranking hard out of the saddle.

The bike feels incredibly agile on those particularly curvy trails when the smaller rear wheel is dropped in — a fact that is far less apparent when running the 29er option. The tradeoff here is the increase in high-speed stability and composure on technical climbs. The great thing is, any new One-Sixty model in any size will be able to take either setup with the flip of a 2-position chip in the rear linkage.

The One-Sixty is available in 5 different models spanning both alloy and carbon chassis, each boasting a solid assortment of tiered spec options. Ranging from value-focused fit-outs to the stuff our wallets have nightmares about, we are genuinely impressed at Merida’s offering of a race-ready enduro bike the entire way through the lineup. Every model benefits from the same geometry, mullet options, primo Maxxis rubber and 230mm adjustable dropper post. Nice one, Merida!

Whether you’re looking to enter the gnarly end of the sport or you’re up for a blingy new upgrade to your fleet, check out the Merida One-Sixty review  to fill yourself in on the rest of the tech, the niggling issues we encountered, alongside a side-by-side comparison to one of the most popular enduro rigs on the market.

Canyon Strive

Highs: One of the most race-aligned production bikes available, versatile personality thanks to the Shapeshifter, incredibly stable at speed through any kind of terrain. Lows: Race-focused geo makes it less appropriate for everyday riders, and length makes the bike tougher to handle on tighter trails.

The Canyon Strive. Perhaps one of the most aggressive and well-known enduro sleds received a remake for 2022, incorporating feedback from racers like 2021 EWS Champion Jack Moir — before he changed teams of course. The result is something wildly aggressive, a veritable weapon beneath the right rider.

But what has changed from the previous model? To cope with the increasingly bonkers nature of modern enduro stages and the breakneck speeds they are raced at, the latest Strive CFR has been given a drastic update, taking it from one of the most conservative to one of the most aggressive, race-focused bikes out there. Travel has been bumped up from 150 to 160mm, which is paired to a 170mm fork. As previously, the bike still features Canyon’s trademark Shapeshifter system in order to radicalise the geometry to the extent it has.

For those unfamiliar, the Shapeshifter is a handlebar remote-activated system with two options – Pedal or Shred. This lever activates a gas spring in the rear shock, altering the bike’s geometry, travel and suspension kinematics on the fly. This allows the rider to shorten travel to a much rampier 140mm, raise BB height by 15mm and steepen the head angle by 1.5°.

Whether you’re stomping on the pedals in flat sections or conserving energy on the climbs, the Shapeshifter can lead to significant benefits in a race setting. With such powers being brought to your fingertips, this granted the Canyon team the freedom to make this bike seriously aggressive when in Shred mode. Sporting a mega-slack 63° head angle (the same as Canyon’s DH bike, the Sender), this bike feels right at home on the enduro circuit’s steepest trails. To further add to the Strive’s race alignment, reach has been stretched out to a very long 480mm on a medium — a figure that would not be uncommon on many competing brands’ large frames. So you’re able to actually reach the bars at all, a nice’n’steep 76.5° seat angle puts riders in a reasonably comfortable pedalling position, while a nifty reach adjust headset allows further dial-ability of your cockpit.

There are currently just three models available in the Strive, including an extra-pimped out special edition Troy Lee Designs model for those chasing the same look and spec list as the Canyon team riders.

There is so much more to this weapon than we were able to cover here, so make sure you take a look over the 2022 Canyon Strive Review to fill in on the specifics.

Cannondale Jekyll

Highs: Unique design delivers excellent stability and handling, scaled rear centre between sizes, double-take factor. Lows: Could use a longer dropper post, shock cavity captures trail crud.

While we’ve now had a bit of time to process the new Jekyll since its greatly hyped release in mid-2021, we still can’t help but let out a little sheeesh every time we see one. Cannondale caused quite a stir with their addition to the growing family of high-pivot enduro sleds , taking a truly innovative approach to their offering geared towards the rowdy end of the sport.

Just one look at this bike tells you that it is something different. The unique frame delivers 165mm of well-balanced, progressive squish via a redesigned four-bar linkage, driving a rear shock that sits tucked exceptionally low in its downtube hollow. A 170mm fork up front completes the equation, making this a ride created to deal with some seriously gnarly terrain. The real eye-catching feature of this bike is its mid-high pivot design, implemented to provide a more rearward axle path that makes it feel as though the suspension doesn’t just soak up those square edge hits, but instead moves with the terrain.

An idler pulley then helps to minimise chain growth and pedal-kick as the suspension moves through its travel. You’ll find a similarly situated pivot placement on the GT Force, and a much higher pivot design on the Norco Range, among a few other long-travel bikes on the market. The Jekyll is 29in specific, with no adjustable geometry or flip chips to be found. This renders the bike incapable of rocking the mullet hairstyle, just in case you were wondering.

But when the going gets tough, how do these space-age aesthetics and fancy features translate into on-trail performance? The Jekyll’s well-balanced geometry, supple suspension and thoughtfully selected components make for an incredibly stable bike at high speed, while also not feeling as long and cumbersome as some of the other enduro-specific rides out there today.

The bike is reasonably hefty, with our large-size test bike weighing in at 16.14kg, however much of this weight sits low in the frame, adding to its feeling of unmovable stability and rail-like cornering. The highly active suspension can be felt on steep climbs, and the climb switch on the shock is made difficult to reach due to the shock’s tucked-away placement. A 77.5° seat angle does however position the rider comfortably for stints in the saddle. When it comes down to it though, it is the descending prowess of the Jekyll that really shines. A 64° head angle and tall riser bar give this bike a fun yet sure-footed feeling at any speed. We do however wish that Cannondale stocked this bike with a longer dropper, with the 150mm dropper post limiting manoeuvrability.

There are two Jekyll models available, both with the same carbon frame and high-pivot design, offering a mid-level and a high-end fit-out. Both models are great value, however we imagine that many folks wanting to race this bike may have a few initial upgrades that they might make before it reaches that A-list spec that we all dream of. Another cool thing? Each size of the Jekyll comes with slightly altered pivot placements, scaling the rear centre, retaining a balanced position and optimising suspension kinematics for different sized riders.

Overall, we’re mighty impressed with this striking enduro whip, performing exceptionally well throughout our testing period regardless of what we threw at it. To dive further into the Jekyll’s nooks, crannies and hollows, take a read of our full review here .

Highs: Incredibly capable descender, adjustable dropouts, immediately comfortable geometry. Lows: Hefty, sluggish on the climbs, fairly noisy.

Having played things rather conservatively in years gone by, GT has made a statement with the release of the Force for 2022. An undeniable shred-sled, the Force is a high-pivot monster with an insatiable appetite for sketchy terrain. But is it perfect? Read on to find out.

The GT Force is an exclusively 29in enduro beast with a set of credentials that immediately tell you exactly what this bike is about. At 16.24kg for a size medium with a carbon mainframe and alloy rear triangle, the bike is no featherweight fighter. It rocks 170mm up front paired with 160mm at the rear, with the mid-high pivot, four bar suspension layout tracing a slightly rearward axle path over the traditional up-and-down movement, albeit moving only about 10mm backwards as it plunges through its travel. This does however help the bike to not only deal with chunky terrain, but also accelerate through it as you hurtle your way down just about anything in front of you. The idler pulley then helps to deal with chain growth and pedal kickback, a similar design to what you’ll find on the Cannondale Jekyll and the Norco Range.

The 63.5° head angle, towering stack height and out-of-the-box riser bars means this bike will excel on anything pointing downwards, be it enduro stages or downhill bike park laps. A very steep seat angle of 78° balances such aggressive numbers nicely, making it quite a comfortable bike to climb on, too. However, the aforementioned weight of the bike will still have you working hard for those trailheads. The rear dropouts on the Force feature a flip chip that allows riders to extend or shorten the length of the bike, dialling in its character to suit the rider style or terrain, be it tight and jibby, or freight-train-without-brakes kinda riding.

The suspension on the Force does take a bit of noodle-scratching to figure out, with us having to remove fork tokens and stray from recommended suspension pressures before we landed on a set-up that felt balanced. Once we did though, this bike felt phenomenal, tracking the terrain beautifully and making us want to push harder through the sketchy stuff than we usually feel comfortable doing.

With all of these praises, it must also be mentioned that this bike is by no means quiet. Chain angle in the lower gears causes noisy rubbing on the idler pulley chain guide, and cable routing is noisy and causes rubbing at points.

When we reviewed the Force there were three models available, however for 2023 it appears PSI is only bringing the top-end Force Carbon Pro LE into Australia. This build comes in at $7,999 AUD, and features a slick set of running gear from Rockshox and SRAM.

We had a lot to say about this bike, and not all could be said here. Head over to the full review of the GT Force to get the rest of the good stuff!

Norco Range

Highs: Incredibly capable and confidence-inspiring descending, great tyre combo Lows: Lifting the bike above ankle-height, manoeuvrability on tighter trails

After a four-year run with the previous layout, 2022 brought us the hotly anticipated redesigned Norco Range. A high pivot, low-slung monster truck of a bike that doesn’t just excel on rough trails, but devours them.

We’ll start this off by addressing the elephant in the room. This is one big-boned beast. Our Large size Norco Range C2 test bike, with its carbon chassis, 29in hoops, tubeless-setup DoubleDown tyres, coil shock, GX drivetrain with idler pulley and a chainring bash guard for good measure, all came in at a hefty 17.15kg. This figure puts it well beyond most of the enduro field we have ever tested, and even places it amongst some of the lighter e-MTBs out there.

When the terrain points down however, this weight all but goes out the window, making this bike one seriously aggressive high-speed descender. 170mm of super supple travel front and rear, the frame employs a funky Virtual High Pivot design that allows this bike to swallow entire trails whole. The linkage allows the rear wheel to move significantly backwards as the suspension compresses, meaning it can avoid becoming hung up on large square-edge hits, allowing you to track perfectly — and rapidly — across the gnarliest terrain imaginable.

The idler pulley, much like the GT Force and the Cannondale Jekyll, prevents chain growth and reduces pedal kickback while the linkage does its thing. A mega-slack head angle of 63.25° makes the handling feel like a DH bike on the descents, while a conversely steep 77° seat angle means this bike is actually quite comfortable to climb —providing you’re not in a rush to get where you’re going. With the distant reach and the bike growing in length as the suspension compresses, it can be a tough rig to wrangle on tight trails, preferring to hold the wide line around most corners as opposed to cutting in tight. In fact, it’s actually quite difficult to break traction on this beast, meaning you’ll want to pick your line from the start, hold on tight and let this beast of a bike do its thing.

The Range features size-specific geometry with a scaled rear centre length to ensure weight distribution remains optimal regardless of frame or rider size, retaining the same confidence-inspiring handling characteristics across the size curve.

The Range is made up of three models, spanning from mid-level to high-end componentry, all coming ready to race right out of the box.

If you want to find out more about the bike that could double as the boulder that chased Indiana Jones in the first movie, then check out our full 2022 Norco Range review here.

Pivot Firebird

Highs: Super stable yet responsive feeling on rough terrain, still a fun bike on more chilled and longer rides, bling bling Lows: Eye-watering price tag, rattle from gear and dropper cables, under-gunned tyres

After 13 years and four highly successful preceding models, the Pivot Firebird has entered its 5th evolution for the 2022 season. And damn, is this thing a stunner. We assure you that these clean, refined looks are only surface level however, with the Firebird 29 being one seriously mean bike the moment you throw the leg over it.

It wouldn’t be incorrect to label the Firebird 29 as the fighter jet of enduro bikes, being an ultra-premium, high-performance ride worthy of the World’s fastest pilots. Its sleek carbon frame delivers 165mm of travel, which is paired with a 170mm fork and rolling on fancy 29in wheels out of the box. This can be set up to suit just about any rider however, with a 2-position flip-chip enabling a 0.6° head angle alteration and 6mm BB height adjustment, or a mullet conversion if desired. The frame will also handle swapping out to a 180mm fork if you’re that way declined. Head angle in the low position sits at a relaxed 64°, with the seat angle spanning between 76°-77° – a figure that fluctuates based on the frame size. Yep, the rear centre of each frame is scaled to suit the size, ensuring a balanced weight distribution of the rider regardless of the selected frame size.

These geometric figures place the Firebird right within the range of modern enduro bikes, positioning the rider from the get-go to conquer any descent or climb before them. It is the incredibly balanced, super progressive suspension characteristics of this bike that really make it shine through. The DW-link design delivers insane traction and a rearward axle path, meaning obstacles become less of a concern as you charge through them faster than you previously thought possible. The nuance of this bike that helps it stand apart from others in the category however is its lively feeling. Where some other bikes truck through chunky rock sections in a straight line as you barely register their existence, the Firebird retains a delicate feedback beneath you that allows you to manipulate the bike as you please without it ever feeling uncomfortable — a trait being the result of a light, stiff frame, balanced geometry, well-tuned suspension and superb componentry.

The overall weight of our Large test bike came to 14.66kg, an impressive figure for a long-travel enduro bike. This number does factor in the lightweight EXO+ tyre casings however, which we found to be insufficient for the kind of riding this bike is otherwise capable of.

The Pivot Firebird comes in a mind-boggling 15 spec combinations, the “most affordable” of them still a staggering $10999. With this kind of price tag though, you can be sure that you’re not just getting a pretty showbike, but a mean, performance-oriented machine that lives for the top step of the podium. But yes, it does look pretty damn sweet too.

If you need any more convincing on the prowess of this bike, jump over to our full review of the 2022 Pivot Firebird 29 her e.

Highs: Supple yet very lively suspension performance, quiet ride, well armoured Lows: Comparatively slack seat angle, tight access to in-frame storage

The Slash. The very silhouette of this bike is instantly recognisable, there’s a good chance you’ll spot one model or another out on the trails on any given day. The 2021 season saw Trek’s flagship enduro rig undergo a major overhaul, making one of the world’s most popular enduro bikes better than ever before. So, what’s new?

To cope with the rigorous demands and silly speeds of modern enduro racing, the Slash has added 10mm of travel to both ends of the bike, with 170mm up front and 160mm at the rear. Trek, alongside RockShox, have co-designed a proprietary rear shock, especially for the Slash that delivers a supremely responsive and buttery feeling to the suspension regardless of the trail type or conditions. This is largely due to the ultra-tuneable proprietary rear shock found throughout most of the range. The overall package delivers quite a progressive spring rate, meaning we were able to go big on this bike without ever feeling like we were blowing through the travel. Trek’s initial suspension setup guide also proved to be a great baseline that we didn’t need to stray far from at all.

However following RockShox’s major revamp of its boingers and the launch of Flight Attendant , Trek has shifted back into off-the-rack rear shocks.

From the moment we jumped on the Slash, we noticed the welcome changes over the geo of the previous model of Slash. Trek’s Mino Link flip-chip features a low and a high position, with the low position rocking a head angle of 64.1° and a seat tube angle of 75.7°. The high position will lift the BB height by 7mm and steepen the head and seat angles by 0.5°. This seat angle may just be one of the only slight niggles we have with the Slash’s geometry, sitting a little slacker than many other bikes within the category. Once we slid the seat forward on the rails however, this brought things to a much more comfortable climbing position, closer to 78°.

In fact, bike does climb surprisingly well, provided you remain seated. As soon as you stand up to put the power down, that super-active suspension will join the party and gobble up some of that precious energy you’re expending. The total package of our Slash 9.9 X01 came in at a very respectable 14.56kg, making it much more pleasant a bike for those longer days than much of the competition.

Although it can definitely be a plough-machine if that’s how you want to ride, the Slash is surprisingly playful despite having such supple and active suspension. If you want to switch line mid-send through a rock garden, the Slash will happily oblige. Much of this feeling comes down to the short chainstays, making it all too easy to shift weight over the back of the bike to maneuver how you see fit, aided further by the ample mid-stroke support that can give you that needed pop in the rough stuff if you want to get airborne. It possesses traction in spades, yet the playful nature and short stays of the bike allow you to break the rules and square corners off if you feel like it.

The closer you look, the more detail you’ll find on this bike. Trek have revised their Knock Block headset allowing greater range of motion before abruptly stopping, and beneath the bottle cage mounts you’ll find a handy, albeit rather tight downtube storage window. The frame protection is all exceptionally well placed and gave us peace of mind even on those particularly loose, rocky trails.

There are currently 10 models of the Slash available, ranging from entry-level alloy models through to robo-suspension space-bikes from the future.

All in all, we believe that the Slash is one enduro bike that isn’t just defined by its geo chart, instead excelling in areas that pleasantly surprised us once out on the trail, culminating in an exhilarating and incredibly fun ride. And for most of us, isn’t that why we ride in the first place?

There is plenty more to learn about this mega-fun enduro bike, so make sure you take a read over our full review of the 2021 Trek Slash to fill in on the rest. But, Trek has also just revamped its big travel bruiser, and changed the suspension layout to a high-pivot design. We have one coming to Flow HQ, but in the meantime, here’s what you need to know. 

Honourable mentions

While our list here is of the creme de la creme of the category, there are a pair of bikes that we felt also garnered a mention on this list.

Polygon Collosus N9

First up is the Polygon Collosus. This alloy bruiser has a solid build kit and spot-on geometry, and with a competitive price tag, we expect you’ll see a lot of these ripping around your local trails.

With chunky tyres and supple suspension, it hugs the ground like it’s made from velcro and laughs in the face of rough and technical terrain. The IFS suspension platform also gives it fantastic pedal efficiency, but it has 16 pivot bearings that will need to be looked after over the lifespan of the bike.

With that, it’s chonky at 17.88kg, it lacks mullet compatibility and tool storage or accessory mounts.

But priced at $4,999 AUD, it’s half the cost of some of the other bikes on this list and the value-to-capability proposition is through the roof. Read more about the Polygon Gollsus N9 here .

Marin Alpine Trail 7

Coming in below the $4,000 price barrier, the Marin Alpin Trail 7 is a stupendously capable bike for the money. Built around 150mm of rear travel and a 160mm fork, it’s one of those slightly shorter travel, but ready for shreddy steep and technical riding, bikes we mentioned at the top.

With a robust chassis and contemporary geometry paired with smooth and sorted suspension, it’s ready for hard-hitting descending and corner-ripping shenanigans. There’s is plenty of progression built into the rear suspension, so you can access all the travel, but it’s never obvious when you’ve run out.

The Alpine Trail 7 is for riders who prioritise getting down the mountain as fast as possible while being able to jump, jib and manual along the way. This is a bike that rewards and aggressive pilot on more demanding trails.

When things go back up, it’s not the sprightliest climber, and the rear end is active, which is a boon on crumbly surfaces and techy ascents. Thankfully there’s also a climb switch for when it’s time to put the watts down.

It’s not an all-day pedaller, but that’s not what it’s supposed to be, and there are other bikes in Marin’s range designed for that purpose. It’s gimmick-free, simple, well spec’d and a ball of fun to ride.

For more, read our full review of the Marin Alpine Trail 7 .

Wrapping up

Enduro has absolutely exploded, and the bikes are becoming ever more capable and reliable — as is a requisite of the racing format. There was a time not all that long ago, there would be an audible groan at the proposition of going uphill aboard a slacked-out gravity rig, with 160mm+ of rear travel. Now these bikes can tackle terrifyingly steep, nasty and rough gravity trails, and then pedal back up to the top no problem.

Better still, brands are taking these big travel bruisers in a tonne of different directions — high pivot vs non-high pivot, mullet vs no-mullet, etc. — and rethinking every aspect of these bikes all in the pursuit of creating the best enduro platform. With that, this is not an exhaustive list, and there are plenty of bikes we’d love to test, like the Forbidden Dreadnought, Nukeproof Mega and the new Santa Cruz Nomad — we have that last one coming, so stay tuned.

And with that, we’re constantly reviewing bikes, and we’ll be updating this feature as we come across more bikes worthy of this list.

If there’s something you’d like to see, sing out in the comments and let us know.

• Submit for Review
• Terms & Conditions

Enjoy reading this?

Get similar articles delivered directly to your inbox

Love Exploring

The Best e-Bike Tours In The US, From Wine Country to Washington

Posted: April 23, 2023 | Last updated: November 29, 2023

Small-Group E-Bike Adventure Tour through Hidden Santa Fe, New Mexico

A treasure trove of Indigenous artifacts, desert-like southwestern landscapes and fascinating Spanish forts await you on this three-and-a-half hour guided tour. Run by Heritage Inspirations , the trip aims to uncover lesser-known gems in the New Mexico capital, all with the ease of battery-assisted bikes – which come in an aesthetically pleasing mint green color.

Starting at the Cross of the Martyrs in Fort Marcy Park (pictured), cyclists will pedal their way through the city, visiting attractions including the Randall Davey Audubon Center, the stunning River Park and the hip Railyard District. According to recent Tripadvisor reviews , guides are highly knowledgeable, and the tour takes guests along quieter streets, while thorough lessons in how to use the e-bikes are provided. 

17-Mile Drive Tour, Big Sur, California

Although it’s better known as a road trip destination, California’s wild and windswept Big Sur coastline is perfect for exploring by e-bike. This well-planned tour , which takes you along an ultra-scenic 17-mile (23km) section of the road in around two and a half hours, is a great way to experience some of the most stunning and diverse landscapes along this storied route.

Beginning at Asilomar State Beach, you’ll learn the history of this beautiful surfing beach before hopping onto your e-bike and cycling along the rugged coastline towards the start of 17-Mile Drive. Memorable stops along the way include Lone Cypress (pictured) – a starkly beautiful Monterey cypress set on its own headland jutting out to sea – as well as the pristine stretch of sand at Carmel Bay and Bird Rock point, where you’ll get to watch sea lions frolicking in the water. 

3-hour Guided Wine Country Tour in Sonoma on Electric Trike, California

Although they offer something a little different from the conventional e-biking experience, the e-trikes provided by Pushpak Motors are a fun and environmentally friendly way to explore California’s wine country. With space for two riders apiece, these three-wheeled electric trikes will whizz you past scenic vineyards in no time – with plenty of stops along the way.

Check out America's best destinations for wine lovers

And it’s not just sightseeing you’ll get to do on this no-holds-barred tour. Over the course of three hours, guests can enjoy stops for wine and cheese tasting at prized local wineries. If you want a little more time to relax and enjoy the views (and wine), book onto the more elaborate five-hour tour, which includes an additional winery visit and plenty more time to explore lesser-known roads.  

Fat Tire E-Bike Tour through Volcanoes National Park, Hawaii

Covering more than 500 square miles (1,295sq km) of Hawaii’s Big Island, including two active volcanoes (Kīlauea and Mauna Loa), Volcanoes National Park is jam-packed with awe-inspiring landscapes. And what better way to take them in than on an electric bike? Volcano Ohana offers a three-hour experience on its trademark fat tire e-bikes, which are just the thing for navigating the region’s challenging volcanic terrain. 

Love this? Follow our Facebook page for more travel inspiration

Asheville Historic Downtown Guided Electric Bike Tour, North Carolina

Surrounded by the stunning Blue Ridge Mountains and full of historic attractions, Asheville is a great city to discover by e-bike.  The Flying Bike  offers a three-hour tour of downtown, allowing you to learn about the city’s inspiring architecture, discover its fast-changing arts and cultural scene and pick up some brilliant recommendations from local guides. 

Half-Day Electric Bike Tour of Red Rock Canyon, Las Vegas, Nevada

With the option to take either a guided or self-guided tour via e-bike, Escape Adventures ’ half-day experience is an ideal way to see this National Conservation Area. Recent Tripadvisor reviewers have praised the tours’ organization and the quality of the bikes, with many reporting that the added help of an e-bike was necessary to manage the hills along the route.

Discover the most eco-friendly destinations to visit this year

Guided E-bike tour of downtown St Petersburg, Florida

Tucked between the Gulf of Mexico and Tampa Bay, St Petersburg is one of Florida’s most charming cities and it’s perfect for some pedal-powered adventures. With Bay E-Bikes’ downtown tour , a local expert will take you around the city’s most noteworthy attractions, including colorful murals, waterfront parks and St Pete Pier.

Discover more about Tampa Bay and its surrounding areas here

The family-friendly three-hour tour, which has received rave reviews on Tripadvisor , includes bike, helmet and lock rental, as well as drop-off and pick-up. Bay E-Bikes also offers a wildlife and history tour around Fort De Soto Park, located just southwest of the city, during which you’ll get to explore these gorgeous offshore keys and learn about the plants and wildlife they support.

San Juan Islands biking tour, Washington

If you’re after a full-blown, multi-day adventure, this incredibly beautiful bike tour through Washington’s San Juan Islands is well worth considering. The seven-day adventure covers a total of 134 miles (216km) by either regular or e-bike, including ferry trips across the Salish Sea, six nights of accommodation at boutique inns and a tried-and-tested, detailed itinerary.

Ketchikan Electric Bike and Rainforest Hike Ecotour, Alaska

For an intrinsically Alaskan tour experience, look no further than this highly rated excursion from the Ketchikan Kayak Company . Taking visitors around the most scenic parts of Ketchikan – famously the entrance to the Inside Passage – it includes a journey down the so-called ‘Road to Nowhere’ and a guided hike through the Tongass National Forest.

You’ll get the chance to spot some incredible wildlife, including porpoises, seals and sea lions, along the coastal section of the route. Meanwhile, the journey through the rainforest gives you the chance to see an active salmon-spawning stream, a waterfall and plenty of native Alaskan flora and fauna. The trip includes a smoked salmon meal (or vegan option) and beverages, plus round-trip transportation from Ketchikan downtown. 

Discover more of Alaska's amazing sights

Boston City View Bike Tour, Massachusetts

The historic city of Boston can be explored on foot, of course – but a little pedal power will allow you to see many of its most important sights in a shorter amount of time. Urban AdvenTours’ flagship e-bike tour , which takes around two and a half to three hours, takes you through Fenway Park, Boston University Campus, Boston Common and past plenty of attractive brownstones.

Original Electric Cruiser Fat Tire Bike Tour, Boulder, Colorado

Boulder is a great city for cycling, with more than 300 miles (482km) of bikeways , including designated cycle-only paths, bike lanes and multi-use routes. And the fat-tire, electric-assisted cruiser bikes offered by Electric Cruiser Bike Tours are a great way for all the family to get out and explore the city. 

During a two-hour trip you’ll get to see some of the city’s best-loved neighborhoods, including the University of Colorado, the historic downtown, Chautauqua and along Boulder Creek. According to recent Tripadvisor reviews , the tours are well-paced, guides are knowledgeable and there are a good number of stops at interesting locations along the way. 

Now discover the amazing North American destinations to visit with your EV

More for You

Baby penguins jump from 50-foot cliff in never-before-seen footage

Pizza chain raises prices in California to offset new minimum wage law

I'm abrosexual - it took me 30 years to realise

Hostess Has a New Treat Only Available at Walmart

The 26 Most Dangerous Cities in the U.S. Ranked

‘Gladiator II' First Look Gets Thumbs Up & Loud Cheers From Exhibs At CinemaCon

Researchers make concerning discovery after observing 'unpredictable' behavior of African lions: 'We've already seen evidence of big changes'

K-pop singer Park Bo-ram dies aged 30, investigation into death underway

Decades-old military object washes up on Massachusetts beach

Kremlin sends Pacific Fleet troops to war against Ukraine - DIU

I Lost White Friends When I Finally Spoke Out

Keanu Reeves' Ballerina Cameo as John Wick Revealed at CinemaCon Screening

Travel Advisor Groups Around the World Sound the Alarm Over American Airlines' Sales Strategy

Disneyland clamps down on visitors who pretend to be disabled to jump queues

The Coolest Car From the Year You Were Born (1945-1995)

Ohio trucker predicts 'catastrophic' consequences for industry over California's zero-emissions standards

These are the 10 worst U.S. states to live in for your mental health, according to a new study

Jurassic World Star Joins Ben Affleck & Jon Bernthal in The Accountant 2

Taylor Swift gets a law named after her in Arizona to protect ticket buyers

The real US Navy Top Gun fighter school is nothing like the movies